0% found this document useful (0 votes)

238 views

Vol.2C Technical Specifications Distribution

Uploaded by

Exports Trafo Power

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

238 views

Vol.2C Technical Specifications Distribution

Uploaded by

Exports Trafo Power

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 305

Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission

Project - AKTP

Tender Documents
ZETDCAKTP001/2
ZETDC Tender No.______________________

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution

Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)6,
Substations – 33/11-0.4kV
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)6
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)6,
Substations – 33/11-0.4kV Revision: 0

Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project

PART 2 – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS (VOLUMES 2A, 2B and 2C)

Section VI(A) - Employer’s Requirements, Substations (Volume 2A)
• A1: General Technical Specifications
• A2: Particular Technical Specifications (Schedules)
• A3: Drawings (Substations)
Section VI(B) - Employer’s Requirements, 132kV Transmission Line (Volume 2B)
• B1: General Technical Specifications
• B2: Particular Technical Specifications (Schedules)
• B3: 132kV Line Drawings
• B4: Line Route Images
Section VI(C) - Employer’s Requirements, Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C)
• C1: Detailed Scope of Works
• C2: Distribution General Specifications
• C3: Medium Voltage Overhead Lines – 33-11kV
• C4: Low Voltage Overhead Lines – 0.4kV
• C5: Underground Cables – 33-1kV
• C6: Substations 33/11-0.4kV
• C7: Technical Schedules
• C8. Distribution Drawings
PART 3 – CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS
(VOLUME 3)
Section VII: General Conditions of Contract (GC)
Section VIII: Particular Conditions of Contract with Appendices
Section IX: Contract Forms

PART 4 – SPECIFICATIONS FOR WORKSITE ENVIRONMENTAL,

SOCIAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT (ESHS) (VOLUME 4)

2020-08-09 Assignment no.: 6035357 7, GIFP, Gaborone, Botswana

1 09 August 2020 Part 2: Employer’s Requirements, Distribution Lines & TRK OLO OLO
Substations (Volume 2C) - Section VI(C)6, Substations
– 33/11-041kV
Revision Date: Description Compiled Checked Accepted

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 2 of 32

Norconsult AS
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)6
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)6,
Substations – 33/11-0.4kV Revision: 0

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations

(Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)6 – Substations – 33/11-0.4kV
Contents
C1: Detailed Scope of Works
Index Contents
1.0 D-S-01-001 Scope of Works
C2: Distribution General Specifications
Index Contents
1.0 D-GS-01-001 General
2.0 D-GS-02-001 Mechanical Design of Overhead Lines
3.0 D-GS-03-001 Poles and Crossarms
4.0 D-GS-04-001 Foundations
5.0 D-GS-05-001 Grounding
6.0 D-SS-06-001 Environmental Requirements
C3: Medium Voltage Overhead Lines 33-11kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-MV-01-001 General
2.0 D-MV-02-001 Insulators and Stays
3.0 D-MV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-MV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-MV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-MV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C4: Low Voltage Overhead Lines 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-LV-01-001 General
2.0 D-LV-02-001 Clamps and Stays
3.0 D-LV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-LV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-LV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-LV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C5: Underground Cables 33-1kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-UC-01-001 General
2.0 D-UC-02-001 33kV and 11kV Underground Cables
3.0 D-UC-03-001 LV Underground Cables
4.0 D-UC-04-001 Joints and Terminations
5.0 D-UC-05-001 Cable Lugs
6.0 D-UC-06-001 Warning Tape
7.0 D-UC-07-001 Protection Sheets and Pipes
8.0 D-UC-08-001 Cable Pillars
9.0 D-UC-09-001 Construction Specifications
C6: Substations 33/11 – 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-SS-01-001 General
2.0 D-SS-02-001 Power Transformers
3.0 D-SS-03-001 Pole Mounted Transformers
4.0 D-SS-04-001 Prefabricated Compact Type Substations

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 3 of 32

C7: Technical Schedules

Index Contents
1.0 Distribution Technical Schedules (Including Preamble)
2.0 33kV Transformers Technical Schedules
3.0 11kV Transformers Technical Schedules
4.0 Insulators Technical Schedules
5.0 Conductors Technical Schedules
6.0 Wood Poles Technical Schedules
7.0 Construction Technical Schedules
C8: Distribution Drawings – To be Provided by the Contractor
Item No. Description
Distribution Line Drawings – To be Provided by the Contractor
33/18 Design 33kV Poles, Crossarms, Stays, Hardware & Fittings
11/30 Design 11kV Pole, Crossarms, Stays, Hardware & Fittings
0.4kV HDA 0.4kV Poles, Stays, Hardware & Fittings (For HDA/AAC Conductors)
0.4kV ABC 0.4kV Poles, Stays, Hardware & Fittings (For Aerial Bundled Conductors)
Sag and Tension Charts – To be Provided by the Contractor
Substation Drawings – To be Provided by the Contractor

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 4 of 32

Table of Contents

C6 – SUBSTATIONS – 33/11-0.4kV 8

1 D-SS-01-001 GENERAL 9
1.1 General Requirements 9
1.2 Grounding 9
1.3 Environmental and Protection Requirements (EPRS) 9

2 D-SS-02-001 POWER TRANSFORMERS 10

2.1 Reference Standards 10
2.2 Design 10
2.2.1 Service Conditions .............................................................................................................................. 10
2.2.2 Type ................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.3 Electrical data 10
2.3.1 Short-Circuit Currents ......................................................................................................................... 10
2.3.2 Insulation Level................................................................................................................................... 10
2.3.3 Rated Power Output ........................................................................................................................... 10
2.3.4 Rated Voltage ..................................................................................................................................... 11
2.3.5 Vector Group ...................................................................................................................................... 11
2.3.6 Impedance Voltage ............................................................................................................................. 11
2.4 Losses 11
2.5 Marking 11
2.6 Bushings 11
2.7 Off-Load Tap Changers 11
2.8 CorRosion Protection 12
2.9 Tank with Accessories 12
2.9.1 Tank ................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.9.2 Oil Conservator, Valves ...................................................................................................................... 12
2.9.3 Monitoring Devices ............................................................................................................................. 12
2.9.4 Oil ....................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.10 Testing 12
2.11 Information to be Provided with the Tender 13

3 D-SS-03-001 POLE MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS 14

3.1 Design 14
3.2 Poles and Crossarms 15
3.3 Foundations 15
3.4 Insulators and Stays 16
3.5 Power Tansformers 16
3.6 Fences and gates 16
3.7 LV Switchgear 16
3.7.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 16
3.7.2 Electrical data ..................................................................................................................................... 17
3.7.3 General Design................................................................................................................................... 17
3.7.3.1 LV Switchgear for Three-phase Transformers 17
3.7.3.2 LV Switchgear for Single-Phase Transformers 18
3.7.4 Current Transformer ........................................................................................................................... 18
3.7.5 Distribution Board ............................................................................................................................... 19

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 5 of 32

3.7.5.1 Local Power 19

3.7.5.2 Street Lighting 19
3.7.6 Information to be given with Bid.......................................................................................................... 19
3.7.7 Tests ................................................................................................................................................... 19
3.8 Marking of Equipment 20
3.9 Test on Completion 20
3.9.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 20
3.9.2 Conductors and Connections ............................................................................................................. 20
3.9.3 Grounding System .............................................................................................................................. 20
3.10 Surge Arresters 20
3.10.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 20
3.10.2 Reference Standard ........................................................................................................................... 20
3.10.3 Rating ................................................................................................................................................. 20
3.10.4 Discharge Current .............................................................................................................................. 21
3.10.5 Information to be Supplied with the Tender ........................................................................................ 21
3.11 Fuse Cut-Outs for Pole Mounted Transformers 21
3.11.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 21
3.11.2 Electrical Data .................................................................................................................................... 21
3.11.3 General Design................................................................................................................................... 21
3.11.4 Information to be Supplied with the Tender ........................................................................................ 21
3.12 Fuse for Fuse Cut-Outs 21
3.12.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 21
3.12.2 Electrical Data .................................................................................................................................... 22
3.12.2.1 Ratings 22
3.13 Conductors 22
3.14 Braces, Crossarms and Bolts 22

4 D-SS-01-001 PREFABRICATED COMPACT TYPE SUBSTATIONS 23

4.1 General 23
4.1.1 Design ................................................................................................................................................ 23
4.2 Power transformers 24
4.3 Marking of Equipment 24
4.4 Test on Completion 24
4.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 24
4.4.2 Power Transformers ........................................................................................................................... 25
4.4.3 Switchgear and Control Gear ............................................................................................................. 25
4.4.3.1 Switches 25
4.4.3.2 Current Transformers 25
4.4.3.3 Surge Arresters 25
4.4.3.4 Conductors and Connections 25
4.4.3.5 Grounding System 25
4.4.3.6 Test of Wiring 25
4.4.3.7 Test of Instruments 26
4.5 Metal Clad Indoor Switchgear 26
4.5.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 26
4.5.2 Electrical Data .................................................................................................................................... 26
4.5.3 General Design................................................................................................................................... 26
4.5.4 Load Break Switches .......................................................................................................................... 27
4.5.5 Fused Switches .................................................................................................................................. 27
4.6 LV Switchgear 28
4.6.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 28

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 6 of 32

4.6.2 Electrical Data .................................................................................................................................... 28

4.6.3 General Design................................................................................................................................... 28
4.6.4 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers .......................................................................................................... 29
4.6.4.1 Current Transformers 29
4.6.4.2 Distribution Boards 30
4.6.4.2.1 Local Power 30
4.6.4.2.2 Street Lighting 30
4.7 Information to be Supplied with the Tender 32
4.8 Tests 32
4.9 H.R.C. Fuses, Indoor 32
4.9.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 32
4.9.2 General ............................................................................................................................................... 32
4.9.3 Electrical Data .................................................................................................................................... 32
4.9.3.1 Ratings 32
4.9.4 Information to be Supplied with the Tender ........................................................................................ 32

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 7 of 32

C6 – SUBSTATIONS – 33/11-0.4kV

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 8 of 32

1 D-SS-01-001 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 1, General.

1.2 GROUNDING
See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 5, Grounding.

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS (EPRS)

See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 6, Environmental Protection Requirements (EPRS).

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 9 of 32

2 D-SS-02-001 POWER TRANSFORMERS

2.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The following publications shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60076 Power Transformers.
60137 Insulating bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V.

60296 Specification for unused mineral oils for transformers and switchgear

60354 Loading guide for oil-immersed transformers.

60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)

60551 Determination of transformer and reactor sound levels.

TR 60616 Terminal and tapping markings for power transformers.

61558 Safety of power transformers, power supply units and similar

2.2 DESIGN
2.2.1 Service Conditions
The transformer shall be designed for outdoor operation and continuous service. 250 kVA
transformers and smaller should be suitable for pole mounting.

2.2.2 Type
The transformer shall be of three-phase, oil-immersed, natural air cooled (ONAN) type. All distribution
transformers shall be of sealed type.

2.3 ELECTRICAL DATA

2.3.1 Short-Circuit Currents
The transformer shall withstand the thermal and mechanical effects of any short-circuit that can
appear at the terminal of any winding according to General Requirements.

2.3.2 Insulation Level

According to General Requirements.

2.3.3 Rated Power Output

The rated output at +40°C maximum ambient temperature is chosen from the series:
Three-phase: 50, 100, 160, 250, 315, 500, 630, 800, 1 200 and 5 000 kVA
Single-phase: 16, 25 and 32 kVA
SWER: 16, 25 and 32 kVA
SWER Isolating transformer: 160, 250 and 400 kVA
Step-up transformer: 630 and 1 000 kVA

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 10 of 32

2.3.4 Rated Voltage

The rated voltages shall be:
33 000 ± 2 x 2.5%/400 V
33 000 ± 2 x 2.5%/230 V
11 000 ± 2 x 2.5%/400 V
11 000 ± 2 x 2.5%/230 V
SWER Isolating transformer: 33 000 ±2 x 5%/19 100 V SWER/460-230 V
SWER Distribution transformer: 19 100 ±2 x 5% V SWER/460-230 V

2.3.5 Vector Group

The vector group of the three-phase transformers should be Dyn11.
SWER isolating transformers hall be equipped with a tertiary winding rated 10 kVA at 460/230 V
brought out to external bushings.

2.3.6 Impedance Voltage

The impedance voltage at rated current should be approximately 4% for 16, 25, 32, 50, 100, 160,
250 and 315 kVA transformers and 6% for 500, 630, 800, 1 200 and 5 000 kVA transformers.

2.4 LOSSES
The losses should be stated and guaranteed in the Bid. These guarantees should be assumed as
maximum values and shall not be exceeded.
The capitalised value of the guaranteed losses will be taken into account when comparing Bids and
will be added to the Bid price.
Should it be found that any losses exceed the guaranteed values; the Supplier/Contractor shall for
the excess of the losses, over the guaranteed value, pay a penalty of the transformer(s).

2.5 MARKING
Each transformer should be provided with a rating plate including the information stated in the IEC
standards. The plate should be in English.

2.6 BUSHINGS
Bushings should withstand the same current as the windings and for the same period of time.
Current carrying outer parts should be made of copper or copper alloy.
It should be possible to change the bushings without dismantling the transformer cover.
Each bushing should be marked with manufacturer and type. The marking should be visible after
assembly of the fittings.
The outer creepage distance for the bushing should not be less than 25 mm/kV.
The insulation levels of the bushings should be at least equal to those specified for the windings.
The neutral connection should have a permanent, special marking, different from the phase
connections.

2.7 OFF-LOAD TAP CHANGERS

The high voltage windings should be provided with an off-load tap changer. The off-load tap changer
should have an external mechanism for manual operation. The operating mechanism should have
an effective locking device for locking of the tap changer in any desired position.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 11 of 32

2.8 CORROSION PROTECTION

Transformers suitable for pole mounting should be hot-dip galvanised. Galvanising should consist of
a continuous coating of zinc to a minimum weight of 600 g/m2. The zinc coating should meet the
requirements according to ASTM, A123, A143, A239 and A385. Other type of corrosion protection
that can be shown to give a similar protection as hot-dip galvanising may be accepted after special
agreement.
The inner surfaces of the tank, oil conservator and radiators should be coated by an oil resistant
paint.
Separate radiators and smaller parts such as brackets, etc. should be hot-dip galvanised.
Fasteners mounted on hot-dip galvanised or ready painted part should be galvanised or made of
stainless steel ISO class F1 or A2.

2.9 TANK WITH ACCESSORIES

2.9.1 Tank
The tank should be designed for natural cooling (ONAN) with a corrugated tank.
The transformer should be equipped with lifting lugs for lifting the complete transformer with oil and
mounted bushings. Lifting lugs should also be available for lifting the core and coils out of the tank.
16, 25, 32, 50, 100 and 160 kVA transformers should have a plane tank bottom. Transformers with
a rated power above 200 kVA should be equipped with flat wheels adjustable for longitudinal or
lateral travel.
Two earthing terminals for connection of earth wires of at least 120 mm2 cross-sectional area should
be provided, one placed on the cover close to the neutral terminal and one placed at the bottom of
the tank.

2.9.2 Oil Conservator, Valves

All transformers shall be of sealed type and should be designed for the expansion of the oil due to
changes in the temperature.
A filling stub with an inner diameter of at least 25 mm should be placed at the top of the cover or oil
conservator.
Transformers should have an oil drain valve placed at the bottom of the tank.

2.9.3 Monitoring Devices

Sealed transformers should be equipped with a pressure relief protection.
Transformers rated over 1 000 kVA transformers should be equipped with thermal and gas relays.

2.9.4 Oil
The transformer should be filled with oil before delivery. The oil should contain at least 0.3 per cent
by weight oxidation inhibitor of type diterbutyl paracresol (DBPC) according to IEC 60296
The oil must not contain PCB. If oil samples taken from the transformer on delivery contain 2 ppm or
more of PCB, the purchaser has the right to refuse the delivery of the transformer.

2.10 TESTING
All transformers should be routine tested according to IEC 60076.
The Purchaser’s/Employer’s representative will have the right to be present during the acceptance
testing.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 12 of 32

One set of the routine test records for each individual transformer should be handed over to the
Purchaser/Engineer.
At the first delivery of a new type of transformer type test records should be submitted. Type test
records older than five years will not be accepted.

2.11 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH THE TENDER

 Rated power
 Rated voltages
 Vector group
 Short-circuit impedance
 Estimated zero-sequence impedance
 No-load current
 On-load losses
 No-load losses
 Insulation levels
 Noise level
 Bushings (make, type, rated current and creepage distance)
 Weight (Total and oil)
 Painting instructions
 Dimension sketch
 Cost of impulse and heat run test.
 Deviations from Technical Specifications

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 13 of 32

3 D-SS-03-001 POLE MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

3.1 DESIGN
For MV/LV transformers up to and including 50 kVA or maximum 600 kg the transformer should be
mounted onto a single pole or placed on a metal frame attached to the pole.

Pole Mounted Transformer – Single Pole

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 14 of 32

Larger transformers 601 - 1250 kg should be placed in a two pole (H) construction. Transformers
larger than 250 kVA should be placed either on four poles or mounted on the ground on a concrete
base if not placed in a compact substation.

Pole Mounted Transformer – Two Poles

The transformer should be protected by surge arresters and fuse cut-outs.
The outgoing ABC shall normally be strung directly from the substation structure/pole. In this case
the ABC will be connected directly – without joints - to the LV switchgear outgoing feeder.
In special cases where the ABC can not start from the substation structure/pole, an LV underground
cable shall be used from the LV switchgear outgoing feeder to the first LV pole.
A fence with gate shall be erected around the pole mounted substation.

3.2 POLES AND CROSSARMS

See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 3, Poles and Crossarms.

3.3 FOUNDATIONS
See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 4, Foundations.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 15 of 32

3.4 INSULATORS AND STAYS

See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)3, Medium Voltage Overhead Lines
– 33-11kV, Chapter 2, Insulators and Stays.

3.5 POWER TANSFORMERS

See Chapter 2.

3.6 FENCES AND GATES

The fence shall be 2 m high and include three numbers of 4-point galvanized barbed wire at the top.
All parts of the fence must be corrosion resistant, galvanized or of aluminium.
The chain link shall have a mesh width of maximum 50 mm, and each wire shall have a minimum
failure load of 2 000 N.
Straight line posts shall have a minimum bending failure load, applied horizontally on the top, in the
most unfavourable direction of 600 N.
Top and bottom tension wires shall have a minimum failure load of 5 000 N.
End and corner posts shall be adequate braced.
The gate shall have provision for securing by padlock. The padlocks shall be able to lock by a
common key, master key system.

3.7 LV SWITCHGEAR
3.7.1 Reference Standards
The following publications shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60044-1 Instrument transformers - Part 1: Current transformers.
60044-2 Instrument transformers - Part 2: Inductive voltage transformers.
60269-1 Low-voltage fuses - Part 1: General requirements.
60269-2 Low-voltage fuses. Part 2: Supplementary requirements for fuses for use by
authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application).
60309-1 Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes - Part 1: General
requirements.
60309-2 Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes - Part 2: Dimensional
interchangeability requirements for pin and contact-tube accessories.
60439-1 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies - Part 1: Type-tested and
partially type-tested.
60439-5 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies - Part 5: Particular
requirements for assemblies intended to be installed outdoors in public places
- Cable distribution cabinets (CDCs) for power distribution in networks
60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
60664-1 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 1:
Principles, requirements and tests.
60664-2 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 2-1:
Application guide - Dimensioning procedure worksheets and dimensioning
examples
60664-2-2 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 2-2:
Interface considerations - Application guide.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 16 of 32

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60664-3 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 3: Use
of coating, potting or moulding for protection against pollution.
60664-4 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 4:
Consideration of high-frequency voltage stress
60664-5 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 5: A
comprehensive method for determining clearances and creepage distances
equal to or less than 2 mm
60947-2 Low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 2
60947-3 Switches, disconnectors and fuse-combination units

3.7.2 Electrical data

Electrical data according to Design Manual – Distribution Networks, Volume 1, General
Requirements, Chapter 1, General.

3.7.3 General Design

The LV switchgear should include an enclosure suitable for outdoor mounting.

3.7.3.1 LV Switchgear for Three-phase Transformers

The LV switchgear for three-phase pole mounted transformers should be equipped as below:
The LV switchgear shall be equipped with moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) for:
 The transformer feeder cable. The current rating should be as below:

- 50 kVA 100 A
- 100 kVA 200 A
- 160 kVA 350 A
- 200 kVA 400 A
 Outgoing feeder cables. The MCCB:s should be of the discriminating type and with adjustable
ranges of the long-time delay with the below indicated current ratings and with a non-adjustable
instantaneous trip at 10 x Ith.

- 50 kVA transformers should be equipped for two (2) outgoing feeders, with a rating of 80 – 100A.
- All other transformers should be equipped for five (5) outgoing feeders with a rating of 100 –
125A.
The LV switchgear shall be equipped with moulded case breakers (MCB) for:
 local power circuits with a fixed rating of 25 A

The LV switchgear shall also be equipped with:

 three ammeters including associated current transformers in order to measure the maximum current
in each phase simultaneously. The ammeters shall include the facility of thermal maximum demand
indicator, hand reset type, with an integrating period of 15 minutes.

 one voltmeter 0-500 V with a selector switch with four positions (OFF, Ll-L2, L2 -L3, L3 -Ll)

 single phase supply with MCB for the control circuits

 one 3-phase kWh meter measuring the total energy of the transformer.

The switchgear shall comply with IEC 60439. The switchgear shall be complete with all necessary
accessories.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 17 of 32

Busbars shall be made of hard drawn electro-copper and be silver- or tin-plated at joints. The rated
current of the busbars should be 600 A
Enclosures shall be metal structures made of bolted or welded steel framing of sufficient strength to
maintain alignment and withstand the mechanical stress at the rated fault level. Degree of protection
shall IP 44, according to IEC 60529.
All connections to the 0.4 kV switchgear should be done from the front, the same with maintenance.
The switchgear shall be provided with full-scale ammeters, voltmeters, current-transformers and
selector switches mounted in the incoming feeder cubicle.
Legend

Three-way
switch
MV/0.4 kV
max. 200 kVA
Selector
A A A switch
A max Amax A max kWh
Supply for
Control Circuits V

6A
2A 600 A
0.4 kV

25 A
63 A
Control
Equipment

10 A
Space for a total number of 5 outgoing Feeders,
(50 kVA – 2 outgoing Feeders) 10 A
Op Test

Legend

Load break
switch Transformer
Local Power
with earthing
switch

Fused switch Contactor 25 A

with earthing
switch
Street Lighting
Fuse
OPTIONAL
Voltmeter
V
MCCB
A Ammeter with
A max maximum
demand indicator

Pole Mounted Transformer – Single Line Diagram

3.7.3.2 LV Switchgear for Single-Phase Transformers

The LV switchgear shall be equipped with moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) for:
Two (2) outgoing feeder cables. The MCCB:s should be of the discriminating type and with a long
time delay trip at 100 A for 25 and 32 kVA transformers and 63 A at 16 kVA ones, with a non-
adjustable instantaneous trip at 10 x Ith.

3.7.4 Current Transformer

Current transformers shall comply with IEC 60044-1 with a rating corresponding to the transformer
size.
The accuracy class shall be of a minimum Class 0.5 according to IEC 60044-1.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 18 of 32

Current transformers shall have thermal and mechanical ratings not less than those of the associated
main circuit.
Current transformers shall withstand 120% of the rated current without exceeding the temperature
limits prescribed.
Each transformer shall have a rating plate clearly and deeply engraved with the rating and marking
of windings.

3.7.5 Distribution Board

3.7.5.1 Local Power
A low-voltage board for local power shall be provided in the main LV switchgear for three-phase
transformers.
The local power distribution board shall be equipped with:
 1 MCB 25 A, 3-pole

 MCB 10 A, 1-pole

 1 lighting fitting, size E27 with associated switch

 2 socket-outlets, two-poled with earthing contacts according to IEC 600309, Group C, standard C2a.

3.7.5.2 Street Lighting

A low-voltage board for street shall be possible to install as a separately installed unit or behind a
separate access doors in the main LV switchgear for three-phase transformers.
The street lighting distribution board shall be equipped with:
 1 MCCB 63 A, 3-pole

 4 MCB 25 A, 1-pole

 1 Control switch 10 A Test-Run

 1 Contactor 63 A, 230 V

 1 Photocell

 1 three-phase kWh meter

Only photocell connected via a 10 A MCB and a connection box for 2 x 25 mm2 OH cable is needed
for single-phase transformers.

3.7.6 Information to be given with Bid

 As specified in the relevant IEC standards for switchgear and control gear.

 Drawing of the LV switchgear and enclosure showing all dimensions.

 Single-line diagram of the LV switchgear.

3.7.7 Tests
Type test records not more than 5 years old shall be provided for all equipment, according to the
corresponding IEC Publications. All equipment shall pass through routine tests at the factory
according to the corresponding IEC Publications.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 19 of 32

3.8 MARKING OF EQUIPMENT

All main parts of the plant shall be equipped with designation labels, such as substation number and
circuit number.
Sizes shall be chosen with regard to label location.
Warning labels shall be mounted on all dangerous parts of the installation. This means:
 On low voltage distribution boards, a general warning label.

 Labelling, as is deemed necessary to prevent dangers arising from palpation of equipment.

Warning labels shall have red lightnings at both ends.

Designation system for text on designation labels will be provided by the Purchaser/Employer.
Text on warning labels shall be approved by the Engineer.
Labels shall be fixed by stainless steel screws or rivets.
The text on operational and safety labels shall be in the English language.

3.9 TEST ON COMPLETION

3.9.1 General
The procedures for the Test on Completion shall be specified by the Contractor in a separate
document. The procedures are subject to the Engineer’s review. The extent of the Tests on
Completion is tentatively summarised below.
A general check of all the apparatus shall be made and shall include a check of the completeness,
correctness and condition of earth connections, labelling, cables and wiring.
Checks shall be made for oil leaks and that insulators are clean and free from external damage.

3.9.2 Conductors and Connections

The required torque shall be checked with a torque wrench for all bolts and nuts.

3.9.3 Grounding System

Tests shall be made on the effectiveness of the bonding and grounding which will include conductivity
tests on selected joints and at the connections to equipment and structures. Checks shall also be
made and precautions taken to avoid corrosion on the grounding system.
The resistance of the grounding system to ground shall be tested and recorded including the method
and equipment used to carry out the tests.

3.10 SURGE ARRESTERS

3.10.1 General
The surge arresters should be of the zinc oxide (ZnO) type without spark gaps.
The surge arresters should be delivered complete with brackets for mounting on transformers.

3.10.2 Reference Standard

The following publication is applicable:
IEC 60099 Surge arresters

3.10.3 Rating
The rating of the surge arresters should be 28.8 kV for 33 kV and 9 kV for 11 kV.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 20 of 32

3.10.4 Discharge Current

The discharge current should be 10 kA.

3.10.5 Information to be Supplied with the Tender

 As specified in the relevant IEC standard.

 Drawing of the surge arrester including brackets showing all dimensions.

3.11 FUSE CUT-OUTS FOR POLE MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

3.11.1 Reference Standards
The following standards are applicable:
IEC 60282-1 High-voltage fuses - Part 1: Current-limiting fuses.
IEC 60282-2 High-voltage fuses - Part 2: Expulsion fuses.
NEMA SG2

3.11.2 Electrical Data

The single phase fuse cut-outs should have the following main data:
Continuous current: 100 A
Nominal system voltage, maximum design voltage and insulation level in accordance with Electrical
data according to Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 1, General.

3.11.3 General Design

The cut-outs should be equipped with brackets for crossarm mounting and terminals for 95- 150 mm2
conductors.

3.11.4 Information to be Supplied with the Tender

 Rated voltage

 Rated insulation level

 Rated current

 Rated short-circuit current

 Rated breaking capacity

 Creepage distances

 Design and dimensions of the terminals

 Dimensioning sketches, descriptions, mounting instructions, etc.

 Deviations from Technical Specifications

3.12 FUSE FOR FUSE CUT-OUTS

3.12.1 Reference Standards
The following standards are applicable:
IEC 60282-1 High-voltage fuses - Part 1: Current-limiting fuses.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 21 of 32

IEC 60282-2 High-voltage fuses - Part 2: Expulsion fuses.

NEMA SG2

3.12.2 Electrical Data

Nominal system voltage, maximum design voltage and insulation level in accordance with Electrical
data according to Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 1, General.

3.12.2.1 Ratings
The rating of the fuses should correspond to the rated transformer capacity, in accordance with the
recommendations from the manufacturer of the fuses.
Fuses for cut-outs shall be adapted to the type of cut-out tendered.

3.13 CONDUCTORS
The Contractor/Supplier shall supply the conductors connecting the transformer LV bushings to the
LV switchgear. The conductor type should be XLPE-insulated 1 x 95 mm2 Cu-conductor for
transformers up to and including 250 kVA and 1 x 120 mm2 Cu-conductor for transformers above
250 kVA.

3.14 BRACES, CROSSARMS AND BOLTS

The Contractor/Supplier shall supply all braces, crossarms and bolts needed for the mounting of the
complete substations.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 22 of 32

4 D-SS-01-001 PREFABRICATED COMPACT TYPE

SUBSTATIONS
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Design
The substation shall be completely prefabricated with space for one 800 kVA transformer.
The building shall be constructed of sheet-metal or concrete.
The substation shall be operated from the outside through opened door.
The cable trenches are to be placed under the switchgear and all connections should be carried out
from the front.
Due considerations should be taken for the ventilation and the roof should be constructed with layers
of thermal insulation between the sheet-metal.
All doors should be of heavy-duty construction and able to lock with padlocks using a master key
system.

MV
LV MV
MV

Compact Substation

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 23 of 32

4.2 POWER TRANSFORMERS

See Chapter 2.

4.3 MARKING OF EQUIPMENT

All switchgear, distribution boards and control gear and units thereof, components mounted therein
and wiring and cables, shall be labelled and marked according to IEC.
Labelling and marking shall apply as follows:
 Each unit of switchgear or control gear (such as a cell, panel, cubicle or box) shall have a label
identifying the unit and stating its purpose in the plant.
 All apparatus or units of apparatus in the panels, cells, etc., shall have labels or markings
identifying the apparatus or units thereof (normally the relevant apparatus designations used
in the technical documents for the switchgear or control gear). In some cases this marking
shall be completed with function marking in plain text. Apparatus labels shall be affixed by
means of screw or reverts on the framework, so they remain in place when the apparatus is
dismounted or changed.
 All terminals of apparatus or apparatus units shall be clearly marked. However, this marking
may be omitted when the design and arrangement of the apparatus are such that a marking
is obviously unnecessary.
 All instruments, indicating devices and control devices shall have identification marking in plain
text or simple symbols or colours. Control devices shall in addition have marking of control
positions in plain text, simple symbols or colours.
 Control cable terminals and, for small load circuits, also power terminals, shall be clearly
marked for identification. The marking system shall be logically built up from letter and/or
figures in one system consistently used within the switchgear or control gear.
 Internal wiring within switchgear, control gear or apparatus units shall have all wire ends
marked, the marking to include as a minimum the same marking as has the terminal to which
the wire end is connected. The marking shall be carried out with sleeves or similar. Tape is
not permitted. Current and voltage circuits shall also have phase marking and, where
necessary, polarity marking. Protective earth wires shall be marked with green-and-yellow.
 Cables connected to switchgear, control gear, external apparatus, etc., shall be marked with
cable numbers according to the cable list and core number according to the external
connection diagram. In addition, all cable cores shall have the same marking as the terminals
to which cores are connected. Marking with glued tape is not permitted.
 The marking shall be indicated with ferrules. The ferrules shall be of white insulated material
and be provided with a glossy finish preventing adhesion and dirt. They shall be clearly and
durably marked in black and shall not be affected by damp or oil.
Warning labels shall be mounted on all dangerous parts of the installation. This means:
 On medium voltage distribution cubicles, a general warning label.
 On low voltage distribution boards, a general warning label.
 Labelling, as is deemed necessary to prevent dangers arising from maloperation of equipment.
Warning labels shall have red lightnings at both ends. Text on warning labels shall be approved by
the Engineer. The text on operational and safety labels shall be in the English language.
Designation system for text on designation labels will be provided by the Purchaser/Employer.

4.4 TEST ON COMPLETION

4.4.1 General
The procedures for the Test on Completion shall be based on applicable standards and codes of
praxis and recommendations from manufacturers, and shall be specified by the Contractor in a

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 24 of 32

separate document. The procedures are subject to the Engineer’s review. The extent of the Tests on
Completion is tentatively summarized below.
 A general check of the entire switchgear and ancillary equipment shall be made and shall
include a check of the completeness, correctness and condition of ground connections,
labelling, painted surfaces, cables, wiring, blanking plates and all other auxiliary and ancillary
items.
 Checks shall be made for oil and gas leaks and that insulators are clean and free from external
damage.
 Shutters, earthing procedures and the interchangeability of components shall be checked.
 All interlocking arrangements both electrical and mechanical shall be fully checked and tested.
4.4.2 Power Transformers
After completion of erection, the transformer shall be inspected and tested as follows:
 Visual inspection for oil leakage and correct erection.
 Insulation test of high and low voltage windings, cables and accessories.
 Visual inspection of oil level, valves, control cabinet, electric clearances between live parts
and grounding connections.
4.4.3 Switchgear and Control Gear
4.4.3.1 Switches
a. Switches shall be visually inspected.
b. Operational tests.

4.4.3.2 Current Transformers

a. Insulation tests at 1 000 volts to earth and between windings.
b. Burden, ratio and polarity check of all current transformers shall be carried out.

4.4.3.3 Surge Arresters

Surge arresters shall be inspected concerning installation and ground connections.

4.4.3.4 Conductors and Connections

a. Conductivity tests are required on all connections and joints that are made on site without any
exceptions.
b. The required torque shall be checked with a torque wrench for all bolts and nuts.

4.4.3.5 Grounding System

a. Tests shall be made on the effectiveness of the bonding and grounding which will include
conductivity tests on selected joints and at the connections to equipment and structures. Checks
shall also be made and precautions taken to avoid corrosion on the grounding system.
b. The resistance of the grounding system to ground shall be tested and recorded including the
method and equipment used to carry out the tests.

4.4.3.6 Test of Wiring

a. Insulation resistance tests at 1 000 V AC for one minute shall if possible be carried out on all AC
and DC protection, control, alarm and indication circuits to ensure that wiring is in satisfactory
condition. Visual inspection shall be made on cable glands, cable jointing, fuse or circuit breaker
ratings and small panel items such as indicating lamps.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 25 of 32

b. Static equipment which may be damaged by the application of test voltages shall have the
appropriate terminals short-circuited.

4.4.3.7 Test of Instruments

Instruments and instrument transformer circuits shall be checked for polarity of direction and for
calibration including any interposing transformers or transducers. These checks shall be made on all
current transformer ratios where applicable.
a. An operation and stability test shall be carried out for on-load commissioning.
b. On load checks shall be made after the protective gear has been placed in service to ensure that
all connections and test links have been replaced and test leads removed, as well as to confirm
the integrity of the current transformer circuits.

4.5 METAL CLAD INDOOR SWITCHGEAR

4.5.1 Reference Standards
The following publications shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60060 High-voltage test techniques.
60071 Insulation co-ordination.
60265 High voltage switches.
60282 High voltage fuses.
60298 A.C. metal-enclosed switchgear and control-gear for rated voltages above 1
kV and up to and including 72.5 kV..
60376 Specification and acceptance of new sulphur hexafluoride.
60420 High-voltage alternating current fuse-switch combinations..
60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
60694 Common clauses for high-voltage switchgear and control gear standards.
4.5.2 Electrical Data
Electrical data shall be according to Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2,
Distribution General Specifications.

4.5.3 General Design

The switchgear should be equipped as below:
 Type 1, Substation Two (2) load break switches and one (1) fused switch.
 Type 2, Substation Three (3) load break switches and one (1) fused switch.
The switchgear shall comply with IEC 60298 and IEC 60694 metal clad, completely enclosed type -
with air insulated or individually insulated single busbars, designed for indoor installation or be
accommodated in a common hermetically sealed enclosure containing SF6 at low pressure.
All the equipment shall be designed to prevent the risk of accidental short circuiting or damage due
to insects and vermin. The degree of protection against hazardous approach to live parts shall be IP
41 according to IEC 60529. However, ventilation inlets could be IP 32.
The switchgear shall be supplied complete with all necessary accessories.
Compartments and equipment shall be protected against corrosion. Extra paint of each required type
shall be supplied in spray cans for field touch-ups.
Nameplates shall be provided and flush mounted on the front surface of each cubicle and major
devices thereon, such as meters, instruments, control switches, relays, etc.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 26 of 32

The switchgear shall be completely wired and ready for connection of external power and control
cables.
The switchgear cubicles shall be bolted together to form rigid, self-supporting assemblies.
An approved arc test according to IEC 60298 shall be performed.
Primary cable compartments shall be amply sized to accommodate cable stress cones, and shall
include cable connectors and cable supports.
The switchgear shall be provided with suitable interlocks and adequate safety devices to prevent
access to the live compartments.
Protection screens should be installed between the cable compartment and switch compartment with
a minimum degree of protection of IP 20.
Earthing device of the built in type, integrated with the switch-disconnector, shall be provided for
grounding of the cable feeders and the transformer feeder.
Insulation material used for switchgear and switch disconnectors shall be selected to ensure
continuity in operating under all conditions.
The insulation material shall maintain its dielectric strength under conditions of high humidity and
temperature, and shall provide high resistance to tracking, high flame retardance, low moisture
absorption, high mechanical strength and dimensional stability as well as a sufficiently low
deterioration ratio due to ageing.
Busbars shall be of high conductivity, electro-copper dimensioned for the rated continuous and
momentary currents within allowable rise in temperature limits, and shall not be tapered. Bolts shall
be made of a non-magnetic corrosion resistant material. Joints shall have at least 2 bolts as the
required minimum. The rated current of the busbars should be min. 630 A.
A ground bus extending the entire length of each switchgear assembly shall be provided according
to the standards, and shall be provided with a compression type terminal at each end for external
cable connections.
Measures shall be taken to compensate for expansion and contraction due to variations in
temperature.

4.5.4 Load Break Switches

The load break switches shall comply with IEC 60265 and be three poled for manual operation with
an operating device with an insulated handle. The continues current rating shall be 630 A.
The load break switch shall be spring controlled, giving a quick make and break with a free handle
action. The breaking capacity shall correspond with the rated current as above and the making
capacity not less than the short-circuit current of the system.
The load break switch should be equipped with a quick-make earthing switch mechanically
interlocked with the load break switch.

4.5.5 Fused Switches

The fused switches shall comply with IEC 60265 and IEC 60420 and be three poled for manual
operation with an operating device with an insulated handle. The continues current rating shall be at
least 200 A.
The fused switch shall be spring controlled, giving a quick make and break with a free handle action.
The breaking capacity shall correspond with the rated current as above and the making capacity not
less than the short-circuit current of the system.
The fused switch should be equipped with a quick-make earthing switch mechanically interlocked
with the fused switch.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 27 of 32

The fused switch shall be furnished with a tripping device, activated by the fuse striker in case of trip
of a fuse in any phase.
The energy requirement for the tripping of the switch disconnector by the fuse striker shall, with a
good marginal, be less than the minimum energy available by the striker according to IEC 60282.

4.6 LV SWITCHGEAR
4.6.1 Reference Standards
The following publications shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

4.6.2 Electrical Data

Electrical data shall be according to Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2,
Distribution General Specification, Chapter 1, General.

4.6.3 General Design

The LV switchgear shall be equipped with moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) for:

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 28 of 32

 the transformer feeder cable

 supply of local power distribution board
 each outgoing feeder cable
 local power circuits
The LV switchgear shall also be equipped with:
 three ammeters including associated current transformers in order to measure the maximum
current in each phase simultaneously. The ammeters shall include the facility of thermal
maximum demand indicator, hand reset type, with an integrating period of 15 minutes.
 one voltmeter 0-500 V with a selector switch with four positions (OFF, Ll-L2, L2-L3, L3-Ll).
 single phase supply with MCB for the control circuits.
 one 3-phase kWh meter and one kVAr meter measuring the total energy of the transformer.
The switchgear shall comply with IEC 60439. The switchgear shall be complete with all necessary
accessories.
Busbars shall be made of hard drawn electro-copper. The rated current of the busbars should be
2000A
Enclosures shall be metal structures made of bolted or welded steel framing of sufficient strength to
maintain alignment and withstand the mechanical stress at the rated fault level. Degree of protection
shall be IP 43 indoor and IP 44 outdoor, according to IEC 60529.
All connections to the 0.4 kV switchgear should be done from the front, the same with maintenance.
The switchgear shall be provided with full-scale ammeters, voltmeters, current-transformers and
selector switches mounted in the incoming feeder cubicles.

4.6.4 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

The MCCB located between the transformer and the busbar should be of the discriminating type and
with adjustable ranges of the long-time delay with a rating of 630 A for 315 kVA, 800 A for 500 kVA
and 1250 A for 800 kVA. It should be furnished with an adjustable instantaneous trip of 2 - 12 x In,
with a rated breaking capacity of minimum 25 kA.
The MCB protecting the local power board should have a fixed rating of 25 A
The MCCB:s for the outgoing feeders should be of the discriminating type and with adjustable range
of the long-time delay, normally the following number and current ratings of the MCCBs’ should be
installed at the different transformer sizes:

MCCB rating
315kVA 500kVA 800kVA
A

100 - 125 3 2 2

200 - 250 2 4 4

320 - 400 - - 2

All MCCB´s shall be furnished with a non-adjustable instantaneous trip at 10 x In.

Note that the number of MCCB:s and current ratings must be adapted to the actual network
requirements.
4.6.4.1 Current Transformers
Current transformers shall comply with IEC 60044-1 with rating adapted to the transformer size.
The accuracy class shall be of a minimum Class 0.5 according to IEC 60044-1.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 29 of 32

Current transformers shall have thermal and mechanical ratings not less than those of the associated
main circuit.
Current transformers shall withstand 120 % of the rated current without exceeding the temperature
limits prescribed.
Each transformer shall have a rating plate clearly and deeply engraved with the rating and marking
of windings.

4.6.4.2 Distribution Boards

4.6.4.2.1 Local Power
A low-voltage board for local power shall be provided as a separately installed unit or behind separate
access doors in the main LV switchgear.
The local power distribution board shall be equipped with:
 1 MCB 25 A, 3-pole
 3 MCB 6 A, 1-pole
 2 lighting fitting, size E27 with associated switch
 2 socket-outlets, two-poled with earthing contacts according to IEC 600309, Group C, standard
C2a.
4.6.4.2.2 Street Lighting
A street lighting unit shall be provided as a separately installed unit or behind separate access doors
in the main LV switchgear.
The street lighting distribution board shall be equipped with:
 1 MCCB 63 A, 3-pole
 1 Control switch 10 A Test-Run
 1 Contactor 63 A, 230 V
 1 Photocell
 1 three-phase kWh meter

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 30 of 32

Type 2
MV4 MV1 MV3

630 A 630 A 630 A

MV2

200 A

Transformer

A A A
kVAr kWh Amax Amax Amax

0.5 kV 2000 A

25 A 63 A

Outgoing Feeders 63 A 10 A
6A 6A 6A
315 kVA 5 Feeders
500 kVA 6 Feeders
800 kVA 8 Feeders
Op Test

kWh
V

Loc al Power

25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A

Outgoing Feeders Street Lighting

Compact Substation – Single Line Diagram

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 31 of 32

4.7 INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED WITH THE TENDER

As specified in the relevant IEC standards for switchgear and control gear.
 Weight of the substation.
 Surface treatment, available types and colours.
 Drawing of the substation showing all dimensions.
 Single-line diagram of the substation.
4.8 TESTS
Type test records not more than 5 years old shall be provided for all equipment, according to the
corresponding IEC Publications
All equipment shall pass through routine tests at the factory according to the corresponding IEC
Publications.

4.9 H.R.C. FUSES, INDOOR

4.9.1 Reference Standards
The following standards are applicable:
IEC 60282 High-voltage fuses.
IEC 60787 Application guide for the selection of fuse-links of high-voltage fuses for transformer
circuit applications.

4.9.2 General
Fuses shall comply with IEC 60282 and be of the current limiting type. The size of H.R.C. indoor fuse
shall be according to IEC 60282-1A, Type I. The fuse striker shall be medium type according to IEC
60282-1, Table XII.

4.9.3 Electrical Data

According to General Requirements.

4.9.3.1 Ratings
The rating of the fuses should correspond to the rated transformer capacity, in accordance with the
recommendations from the manufacturer of the fuses and IEC 60787.

4.9.4 Information to be Supplied with the Tender

 Current-time characteristics for each type

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)6_Substations-33_11-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 32 of 32

Norconsult AS
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission
Project - AKTP

Tender Documents
ZETDC Tender No.______________________

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution

Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)4,
Low Voltage Overhead Lines – 0.4kV
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)4
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)4, Low
Voltage Overhead Lines – 0.4kV Revision: 1

Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project

PART 2 – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS (VOLUMES 2A, 2B and 2C)

Section VI(A) - Employer’s Requirements, Substations (Volume 2A)
• A1: General Technical Specifications
• A2: Particular Technical Specifications (Schedules)
• A3: Drawings (Substations)
Section VI(B) - Employer’s Requirements, 132kV Transmission Line (Volume 2B)
• B1: General Technical Specifications
• B2: Particular Technical Specifications (Schedules)
• B3: 132kV Line Drawings
• B4: Line Route Images
Section VI(C) - Employer’s Requirements, Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C)
• C1: Detailed Scope of Works
• C2: Distribution General Specifications
• C3: Medium Voltage Overhead Lines – 33-11kV
• C4: Low Voltage Overhead Lines – 0.4kV
• C5: Underground Cables – 33-11kV
• C6: Substations 33/11-0.4kV
• C7: Planning Guidelines
• C8: Technical Schedules
PART 3 – CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS
(VOLUME 3)
Section VII: General Conditions of Contract (GC)
Section VIII: Particular Conditions of Contract with Appendices
Section IX: Contract Forms

PART 4 – SPECIFICATIONS FOR WORKSITE ENVIRONMENTAL,

SOCIAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT (ESHS) (VOLUME 4)

2020-08-09 Assignment no.: 6035357 7, GIFP, Gaborone, Botswana

1 09 August 2020 Part 2: Employer’s Requirements, Distribution Lines & TRK OLO OLO
Substations (Volume 2C) - Section VI(C)4 – Low
Voltage Overhead Lines – 0.4kV
Revision Date: Description Compiled Checked Accepted

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 2 of 36

Norconsult AS
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)4
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)4, Low
Voltage Overhead Lines – 0.4kV Revision: 1

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations

(Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)4 – Low Voltage Overhead Lines – 0.4kV
Contents
C1: Detailed Scope of Works
Index Contents
1.0 D-S-01-001 Scope of Works
C2: Distribution General Specifications
Index Contents
1.0 D-GS-01-001 General
2.0 D-GS-02-001 Mechanical Design of Overhead Lines
3.0 D-GS-03-001 Poles and Crossarms
4.0 D-GS-04-001 Foundations
5.0 D-GS-05-001 Grounding
6.0 D-SS-06-001 Environmental Requirements
C3: Medium Voltage Overhead Lines 33-11kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-MV-01-001 General
2.0 D-MV-02-001 Insulators and Stays
3.0 D-MV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-MV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-MV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-MV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C4: Low Voltage Overhead Lines 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-LV-01-001 General
2.0 D-LV-02-001 Clamps and Stays
3.0 D-LV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-LV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-LV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-LV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C5: Underground Cables 33-11kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-UC-01-001 General
2.0 D-UC-02-001 33kV and 11kV Underground Cables
3.0 D-UC-03-001 LV Underground Cables
4.0 D-UC-04-001 Joints and Terminations
5.0 D-UC-05-001 Cable Lugs
6.0 D-UC-06-001 Warning Tape
7.0 D-UC-07-001 Protection Sheets and Pipes
8.0 D-UC-08-001 Cable Pillars
9.0 D-UC-09-001 Construction Specifications
C6: Substations 33/11 – 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-SS-01-001 General
2.0 D-SS-02-001 Power Transformers
3.0 D-SS-03-001 Pole Mounted Transformers
4.0 D-SS-04-001 Prefabricated Compact Type Substations

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 3 of 36

C7: Technical Schedules

Index Contents
1.0 Distribution Technical Schedules (Including Preamble)
2.0 33kV Transformers Technical Schedules
3.0 11kV Transformers Technical Schedules
4.0 Insulators Technical Schedules
5.0 Conductors Technical Schedules
6.0 Wood Poles Technical Schedules
7.0 Construction Technical Schedules
C8: Distribution Drawings – To be Provided by the Contractor
Item No. Description
Distribution Line Drawings - To be Provided by the Contractor
33/18 Design 33kV Poles, Crossarms, Stays, Hardware & Fittings
11/30 Design 11kV Pole, Crossarms, Stays, Hardware & Fittings
0.4kV HDA 0.4kV Poles, Stays, Hardware & Fittings (For HDA/AAC Conductors)
0.4kV ABC 0.4kV Poles, Stays, Hardware & Fittings (For Aerial Bundled Conductors)
Sag and Tension Charts – To be Provided by the Contractor
Substation Drawings – To be Provided by the Contractor

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 4 of 36

Table of Contents

C4 – LOW VOLTAGE OVERHEAD LINES – 0.4kV 8

1 D-LV-01-001 GENERAL 9
1.1 General Requirements 9
1.2 Mechanical Design 9
1.3 Poles and Crossarms 9
1.4 Foundations 9
1.5 Grounding 9
1.6 Environmental Protection Requirements (EPRS) 9

2 D-LV-01-001 CLAMPS AND STAYS 10

2.1 Clamps & Stays for All Aluminium Conductors (AAC) 10
2.1.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 10
2.2 Technical Requirements 11
2.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 11
2.2.1.1 Workmanship 11
2.2.1.2 Zinc Coating 11
2.2.1.3 Steelwork and Bolts 11
2.2.1.4 Insulators 11
2.2.1.5 Insulator Hardware 12
2.2.1.6 Stay Sets 13
2.2.1.7 Replacement of Stay with Strut or Outrigger 14
2.2.1.8 Stay Insulators 15
2.2.1.9 Stay Wire 16
2.2.1.10 Accessories 16
2.3 Clamps for Aerial Bundled Conductor (ABC) Cable 16
2.3.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 16
2.3.2 General Design................................................................................................................................... 16
2.3.2.1 Strain Clamp 16
2.3.2.2 Suspension Clamp 16
2.3.2.3 Rubber Insert 17
2.3.3 Testing ................................................................................................................................................ 17
2.3.4 Technical Information ......................................................................................................................... 17
2.4 Wedges for ABC Cable 17
2.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 17
2.5 Clamps for Overhead Concentric Service (Airdac) Cable 17
2.5.1 General Design................................................................................................................................... 17
2.5.2 Technical Information ......................................................................................................................... 17
2.6 Stay Wire 17
2.6.1 Material ............................................................................................................................................... 17
2.6.2 Construction and Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 18

3 D-LV-01-001 CONDUCTORS 19
3.1 Reference Standards 19
3.2 Material 19
3.3 DESIGN and Dimensions 19
3.3.1 AAC or HDA Conductors .................................................................................................................... 19

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 5 of 36

3.3.2 ABC Cable .......................................................................................................................................... 20

3.3.2.1 Conductor 20
3.3.2.2 Insulation 20
3.3.2.3 Construction 20
3.3.2.4 Marking 20
3.3.2.5 Breaking Load 21
3.3.2.6 Current Carrying Capacity 21
3.3.3 Conditions for Continuous Ratings ..................................................................................................... 21
3.3.4 Conditions for Short-time Rating......................................................................................................... 21
3.3.5 Testing ................................................................................................................................................ 22
3.3.6 Technical Information ......................................................................................................................... 22
3.3.7 Packing ............................................................................................................................................... 22
3.4 Overhead Concentric Service Cable 22
3.4.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 22
3.4.2 General ............................................................................................................................................... 22
3.4.3 Dimensions and Mechanical Requirements........................................................................................ 23
3.4.4 Electrical Requirements ...................................................................................................................... 23
3.4.5 Tests ................................................................................................................................................... 24
3.4.5.1 Type Tests 24
3.4.5.1.1 General 24
3.4.5.1.1.1 Bending Radius 24
3.4.5.2 Routine Tests 24
3.4.5.2.1 Conductor Resistance 24
3.4.5.2.2 Voltage Withstand 24
3.4.5.2.3 Dielectric Resistance Tests 24
3.4.5.3 Sample Tests 24
3.4.5.3.1 Thickness of Outer Sheath 24
3.4.5.3.2 Elongation Test 24
3.4.5.3.3 Insulation Test 24
3.4.5.3.4 Adherence to Cable Sheath Layer Test 24
3.4.5.3.4.1 Test Procedure 24
3.4.6 Marking / Labelling / Packing .............................................................................................................. 25
3.5 Entrance Cable 25
3.5.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 25
3.5.2 Design ................................................................................................................................................ 25
3.5.3 Type of Cables ................................................................................................................................... 25

4 D-LV-04-001 HARDWARE 26
4.1 General 26
4.2 Insulink Joint Sleeves 26
4.2.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 26
4.2.2 General ............................................................................................................................................... 26
4.2.3 Strength .............................................................................................................................................. 26
4.3 Insulation Piercing Connectors 26
4.3.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 26
4.3.2 General ............................................................................................................................................... 26
4.3.3 Types .................................................................................................................................................. 27

5 D-LV-05-001 APPARATUS 28
5.1 Pole Top Box 28
5.1.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 28

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 6 of 36

5.1.2 Electric Data ....................................................................................................................................... 28

5.1.2.1 Types and Ratings 28
5.1.3 Technical Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 28
5.2 Joint Box 28
5.2.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 28
5.2.2 Design ................................................................................................................................................ 28
5.2.3 Technical Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 29
5.3 Meter Box 29
5.3.2 Electrical Data .................................................................................................................................... 29
5.3.2.1 Types and Ratings 29
5.3.3 Technical Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 29
5.4 Meters 29
5.4.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 29
5.4.2 Electrical Data .................................................................................................................................... 29
5.4.2.1 Types and Ratings 29
5.4.2.2 Class 29
5.4.3 Technical Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 29
5.4.4 Special Requirements for Prepayment Meters ................................................................................... 30
5.4.5 Ready Boards ..................................................................................................................................... 30
5.4.6 Testing ................................................................................................................................................ 30
5.5 Luminaries 30
5.5.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 30
5.5.2 Design ................................................................................................................................................ 30
5.5.3 Mounting ............................................................................................................................................. 31

6 D-LV-06-001 CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 32

6.1 Line Routes 32
6.1.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 32
6.1.2 Clearing of the Line Route .................................................................................................................. 32
6.1.3 Survey ................................................................................................................................................ 32
6.2 Erection of Poles 32
6.2.1 Location of Poles ................................................................................................................................ 32
6.2.2 Excavation and Backfill ....................................................................................................................... 32
6.2.3 Type and Size of Foundation .............................................................................................................. 33
6.2.4 Erection .............................................................................................................................................. 33
6.2.5 Repair of Damage .............................................................................................................................. 33
6.3 Installation of Insulators, Clamps and Conductors 33
6.3.1 Insulators ............................................................................................................................................ 33
6.3.2 Repair Sleeves ................................................................................................................................... 34
6.3.3 Stringing Pulleys ................................................................................................................................. 34
6.3.4 Stringing ............................................................................................................................................. 34
6.3.5 Sagging .............................................................................................................................................. 35
6.3.6 Binding................................................................................................................................................ 36
6.4 Service Connections 36
6.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 36

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 7 of 36

C4 – LOW VOLTAGE OVERHEAD LINES – 0.4kV

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 8 of 36

1 D-LV-01-001 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 1, General.

1.2 MECHANICAL DESIGN

See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 2, Mechanical Design.

1.3 POLES AND CROSSARMS

See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 3, Poles and Cross Arms.

1.4 FOUNDATIONS
See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 4, Foundations.

1.5 GROUNDING
See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 5, Grounding.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS (EPRS)

See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 6, Environmental Protection Requirements (EPRS).

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 9 of 36

2 D-LV-01-001 CLAMPS AND STAYS

2.1 CLAMPS & STAYS FOR ALL ALUMINIUM CONDUCTORS (AAC)
2.1.1 Reference Standards
The following standards shall apply:
BS / EN / ISO British Standard / European Standards / International Standards
Organisation
BS 183 Specification for General Purpose Galvanised Steel Wire Strand

BS EN ISO 898-1 Mechanical properties of fasteners made of carbon steel and alloy steel,
Bolts, Screws and Studs
BS 3288 Insulator and conductor fittings for overhead power lines

BS 4102 Steel Wire for General Fencing Purposes

BS EN 10244-2 Non-ferrous metallic coatings on steel wire – Part 2: Zinc or zinc alloy
coatings on steel wire
BS EN 61284 Overhead Lines – Requirements and tests for fittings

ISO 9001 Quality System Model for Quality Assurance in Design/ Development,
Manufacture and Testing
ISO 9002 Quality System Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation
and Servicing
IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60071-1 Insulation coordination – part 1: Definitions, principles and rules

60383-1 Insulators for overhead lines with nominal voltage above 1000V – Part
1: Ceramic or glass insulator unites for a.c. systems – Definitions, test
methods and acceptable criteria
60672-2&3 Ceramic and glass insulating materials – part2 : methods of test; part 3:
specification for individual materials
ENA Energy Networks Association
TS 43-15 Insulator Binds and Equivalent helical fittings for overhead lines

TS 43-40 Specification for single circuit overhead lines on wood poles for use at
high voltage up to and including 33kV
TS 43-88 Selection and treatment of wood poles and associated timber for
overhead lines.
TS 43-90 Anti-climbing devices and safety signs for HV lines up to and including
400kV
TS 43-91 Stay strands and stay fittings for overhead lines

TS 43-92 Overhead line fittings

TS 43-93 Line Insulators

TS 43-95 Steelwork for overhead lines

TS 43-96 Fasteners and washers for wood pole overhead lines

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 10 of 36

These codes and standards set forth minimum requirements which may be exceeded by the
Contractor if, in the Contractor's judgment and Employer's acceptance, superior or more economic
designs or materials are available for successful and continuous operation of the Contractor's
materials as required by this specification.
In addition to the applicable standards, the Contractor shall comply with applicable national and local
laws, codes, regulations, statutes and ordinances.
The materials and services furnished shall comply with and not prevent the Employer's compliance
with all applicable standards of the local codes.
It is the intent of this specification to allow supply of hardware according to international standards.
If the Contractor customarily produces the specified hardware of national standards other than
mentioned, the Contractor shall describe the equivalences and/or differences of such standards with
his Tender.
For any such standards, which are not written in the English language, the Contractor shall make
available copies of an English translation thereof. In any event, the Contractor shall list all those
standards he proposes to use in the supply of the specified hardware.
In the event of any apparent conflict among standards or theses specifications, the Contractor shall
refer the conflict to the Employer for written resolution.

2.2 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.2.1 General
2.2.1.1 Workmanship
All parts shall be new and of the highest class and shall be furnished uniformly in quality and smoothly
on the surface in conformity to the best commercial practice without any harmful defects such as
flaws, ruts, air holes, cracks, burrs and rough edges, etc.
Filling or plugging of any defective parts shall not be permitted. The design shall avoid sharp corners
or projections, which will produce high electrical stress in normal operation.
The design of adjacent metal parts and contacting surfaces shall be so made as to prevent corrosions
of the contact surfaces and to maintain good electrical contact under service conditions.

2.2.1.2 Zinc Coating

All the iron and steel parts and members shall be zinc coated upon completion of the fabrication. The
zinc coating is to be uniform, clean, smooth and free from burrs, sharp edges, lumps and dross so
that interconnecting parts will fit properly and parts may be assembled and disassembled readily.
The zinc coating shall be carried out by the hot dip process for all parts.
Threaded parts shall be coated after being threaded and excessive zinc shall be removed from the
threads. Nuts and locknuts shall be retapped after being coated and shall be capable of being
threaded the entire length of threads without use of tools.

2.2.1.3 Steelwork and Bolts

The steelwork for the structure types included in this specification shall, where practical, conform to
the requirements of ENA TS 43-95.

2.2.1.4 Insulators
Reel insulators shall be utilised for supporting conductors and they shall be of brown glazed porcelain
type, as illustrated below:

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 11 of 36

Reel Insulator for 0.4kV Lines

2.2.1.5 Insulator Hardware

At tangent points, reel insulators shall be fitted to LV wood poles with through bolts in vertical
formation. At angle points, reel insulators shall be fitted with a “D” Clamp in vertical formation.
Aluminium binding wire shall be used to tie the conductors onto the reel insulators.

LV Line – Arrangement of Insulators at Strain Points – AAC Conductors

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 12 of 36

LV Line – Arrangement of Reel Insulator at Tangent (Suspension) Pole – AAC Conductors

LV Line – Arrangement of Stays for Strain Pole (Lines Strung with AAC Conductors)

2.2.1.6 Stay Sets

Stay sets shall be in accordance with the drawings supplied with the specifications for LV lines.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 13 of 36

2.2.1.7 Replacement of Stay with Strut or Outrigger

At locations where there is no possible to install a stay arrangement, this shall be replaced by an
outrigger or strut as illustrated below:

LV Line – Strut Arrangement

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 14 of 36

LV Line – Outrigger Arrangement

2.2.1.8 Stay Insulators

Stay insulators shall be of porcelain type, as illustrated below:

Guy Strain Insulators

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 15 of 36

2.2.1.9 Stay Wire

Stay wire in use in the ZETDC distribution shall be utilised. (Refer to the relevant Technical
Schedules). They shall be hot dip zinc-coated and manufactured from steel.

2.2.1.10 Accessories
Accessories shall include stay wire tensioning device, stay clamp, stay rod, thimble washer, stay
plate, stay wire anchors for soil and rock, and bolts and nuts and stay wire attachment devices to a
wood pole (preformed grip or clamp type).

2.3 CLAMPS FOR AERIAL BUNDLED CONDUCTOR (ABC) CABLE

2.3.1 Reference Standards
The following standards shall be applicable:
IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60071-1 Insulation coordination – part 1: Definitions, principles and rules

2.3.2 General Design

The material shall be designed to cover a suitable range of sizes for span length of up to 80 m. A
safety factor of minimum two (2), shall be used concerning the maximum calculated forces.
For overhead twisted cables the main necessary clamps are specified below

2.3.2.1 Strain Clamp

Strain Clamp
The strain clam is used for termination of the cables to a pole or a wall by means of standard hooks.
The plastic parts shall be made of heat and UV-radiation resistant material and the steel parts shall
be hot-dip galvanised.

2.3.2.2 Suspension Clamp

Suspension Clamp
The suspension clamp is used for suspension of the cable to poles or walls in straight lines and at
angles of up to 90o. The body of the clamp shall be made of weather- resistant aluminium alloy or
hot-dip galvanised steel

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 16 of 36

2.3.2.3 Rubber Insert

Rubber Insert
The rubber insert is used in suspension clamps to ensure even pressure on the cable. The inserts
shall be made of UV-radiation resistant rubber.

2.3.3 Testing
The clamps shall be type, sample and routine tested in accordance with the applicable standard for
Testing of suspension clamps for PE-insulated self-supporting aerial cable, type ALUS, rated voltage
1 kV.

2.3.4 Technical Information

The following information shall be given for each type of clamp:
 Detailed drawings showing the dimension of the clamp.

2.4 WEDGES FOR ABC CABLE

2.4.1 General
Wedges should be intended for separation of the conductors in the cable.

Wedge

2.5 CLAMPS FOR OVERHEAD CONCENTRIC SERVICE (AIRDAC) CABLE

2.5.1 General Design
The clamp shall be intended for overhead concentric service (Airdac) cable and should consist of an
open body made of high climatic and mechanically resistant insulting material and a wedge ensuring
positive grip on conductors with frictional pressure distributed evenly over the core.

2.5.2 Technical Information

The following information shall be given for each type of clamp:
 Detailed drawings showing the dimension of the clamp.

2.6 STAY WIRE

2.6.1 Material
The stay wire shall be hot dip zinc-coated and manufactured from steel.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 17 of 36

2.6.2 Construction and Dimensions

The stay wire shall have the following dimensions and strength:

Nominal cross sectional area Calculated diameter (mm) Calculated breaking

(mm2) load (kN)

25 6.4 33.9

52 9.2 68.7

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 18 of 36

3 D-LV-01-001 CONDUCTORS
3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The following standards shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60104 Aluminium-magnesium-silicon wire for overhead line conductors.
60228 Power cables. Resistance of conductors.

60502 Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated voltages from 1 kV to
30 kV.
60888 Zinc-Coated Steel Wires for Stranded Conductors.

60889 Hard-Drawn Aluminium Wire for Overhead Lines

61089 Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded conductors.

61232 Aluminium-clad steel wires for electrical purposes

61284 Overhead lines - Requirements and tests for fittings

61394 Overhead lines - Characteristics of greases for aluminium, aluminium alloy and
steel bare conductors
61395 Overhead electrical conductors - Creep test procedures for stranded
conductors
62219 Overhead electrical conductors - Formed wire, concentric lay, stranded
conductors

3.2 MATERIAL
Conductors should be manufactured from aluminium alloy meeting the requirements on resistivity,
tensile strength, etc. given in this specification. In addition the material shall have a resistance against
corrosion at least on the level of Al/Mg/Si wire according to IEC 60104. Conductors intended for
SWER systems (if applicable) should be extra high strength ACSR conductors.

3.3 DESIGN AND DIMENSIONS

3.3.1 AAC or HDA Conductors
The following are the AAC conductors normally used in the ZETDC system for LV overhead lines:

Calculated
Code Stranding
Nominal Sectional Overall Calculated Current –
Name & Wire Weight
Al Area Area Diameter Breaking Carrying
AAC or Diameter (kg/km)
(mm2) (mm2) (mm) Load (kN) Capacity
HDA (mm)
(A)1

Ant 50 52.83 7x3.10 9.30 145 8.28 180

Wasp 100 106 7x4.39 13.17 212 16.0 292

1) At 65oC

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 19 of 36

3.3.2 ABC Cable

The self-supporting feeder shall be of twisted 4-core type, HDPE or XLPE-insulated with aluminium
conductors. The single-phase cables shall be of twisted 2-core type. The neutral conductor shall be
of the same cross-section as the phase-conductors. 4 x 25 mm2 or 4 x 50 mm2, depending on the
load, shall be used as service cable for three-phase supplies.
The cables shall fulfil the following system data:
Nominal system voltage 0.4 kV
Insulation level 0.6/1 kV
System 3-phase. 4-wire with neutral solidly grounded

3.3.2.1 Conductor
Compressed, stranded conductor of aluminium:
2
Cross-sectional area: 95, 50 or 25 mm
2
Conductor resistance: 95 mm 0.320 ohm/km
50 mm2 0.641 ohm/km
2
25 mm 1.200 ohm/km

3.3.2.2 Insulation
3
Polyethylene with the density 0,93 g/cm and of weather resistant quality.
Melt flow index: max. 0.5
Insulation thickness: 1.3 mm
Percentage of carbon black: 2 to 3% by weight.
Colour: Black

3.3.2.3 Construction
The cable has a symmetrical right hand lay with a length of lay of about 40 times the diameter Dy
over the cores, laid up. The cores are of the same length and lie close to each other.

Number of conductors x rated External diameter Dy Weight/ length

cross-sectional area mm
mm2 kg/km

2 x 25 17 200

4 x 25 20 400

4 x 50 27 700

4 x 50 + 25 29 800

4 x 95 37 1,300

4 x 95 + 25 39 1,400

3.3.2.4 Marking
The live cores are marked with longitudinal triangle-shaped ridges.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 20 of 36

The neutral core is not marked.

3.3.2.5 Breaking Load

Conductor

Cross-sectional area Breaking load

2
mm kN min

25 4.2

50 7.4

95 14

Whole Cable
Number of conductors x rated cross- Breaking Load
sectional area
mm2 kN (minimum)
2 x 25 8.4

4 x 25 16.8

4 x 50 29.6

4 x 50 + 25 29.6

4 x 95 56.0

4 x 95 + 25 56.0

3.3.2.6 Current Carrying Capacity

The calculated current carrying capacities of the cable are as shown below:

Cross-sectional area Continuous rating Short-time Rating

2
mm A kA

25 75 1.2

50 120 2.4

95 190 4.6

3.3.3 Conditions for Continuous Ratings

 maximum conductor temperature +70°C
 ambient temperature +45°C
 solar radiation 1 200 W/m2
 wind velocity 0.6 m/s

3.3.4 Conditions for Short-time Rating

 conductor temperature at the beginning of short-circuit +70oC
 Maximum permissible conductor temperature after short-circuit +100oC
 Duration of short-circuit 1s

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 21 of 36

3.3.5 Testing
The cables shall be tested and fulfil the requirements in accordance with the relevant IEC or local
standards.

3.3.6 Technical Information

The following information should be given for each conductor cross-sectional area and type of cable.
 The value of the positive-phase sequence impedance in ohms/km.
 The value of the zero-phase sequence impedance in ohms/km.
 The value of the insulation resistance in MΩ between the phase-conductors and the neutral-
conductor
 Weight of aluminium per km of cable
 Overall weight per km of cable
 Overall diameter of finished cable

3.3.7 Packing
The AAC conductors shall be delivered on sea-worthy wooden drums in lengths of 2000m, while
ABC cables shall normally be delivered on sea worthy wooden drums in 1000m lengths.

3.4 OVERHEAD CONCENTRIC SERVICE CABLE

3.4.1 Reference Standards
The following standards shall apply

SANS South African National Standards

1411-1:2008 Materials of insulated electric cables and flexible cords - Part 1:
Conductors.
1411-4:2008 Materials of insulated electric cables and flexible cords - Part 4: Cross-
linked polyethylene (XLPE).
1411-7:2003 Materials of insulated electric cables and flexible cords - Part 7:
Polyethylene.
1507:2007 Electric cables with extruded solid dielectric insulation for fixed
installations (300/500 V to 1 900/3 000 V).
60811-1-1:2001 Common test for insulating and sheathing materials of electric and
optical cables - Part 1: Methods for general application - Section 1:
Measurement of thickness and overall dimensions - Tests for
determining the mechanical properties
6282-1:2007 Test methods for bare conductors and conductors of insulated electric
cables, Part 1: Conductor resistance.
6282-3:2007 Test methods for bare conductors and conductors of insulated electric
cables, Part 3: Mechanical tests
5526:2007 Dielectric resistance of electric cables
6101:2007 Adherence of dielectric to conductor of supporting cores of aerial
bundled conductors.
3.4.2 General
The cable shall be designed to have a rated voltage of 600 V (phase to neutral/earth).
The central conductor of the cable (see figure 1) shall be a circular, stranded, phase conductor; the
conductor may be compacted.
The core insulation of the conductor shall be red, UV stabilized XLPE that complies with the
requirements of SANS 1411-4 for a type B insulation.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 22 of 36

The central insulated core shall be surrounded by minimum 12 neutral/earth strands.

The total resistance of the neutral earth strands shall not be greater than that of the phase conductor.
The neutral/earth conductors shall be of annealed copper that complies with SANS 1411-1.
In the design and manufacture of the cable every effort shall be made to ensure that the neutral/earth
strands are equally spaced around the circumference of the cable.
The concentric assembly shall be enclosed in a black sheath of a weather stabilized grade
polyethylene that complies with material type PD1 in accordance with SANS 1411 –Part 7.
A ripcord laid under the sheath shall be provided for stripping of the cable.

Typical Construction – Concentric Service Cable

3.4.3 Dimensions and Mechanical Requirements

The nominal overall diameter of the cable shall be 10 to 12.5 mm.
The nominal thickness of the phase conductor insulation shall be not less than 0.7 mm.
When a cable is tested in accordance with clause 3.4.2.1.1.1 below, there shall be no signs of
distortion or cracking of the insulation or sheath.
When measured in accordance with clause 3.4.5.3.1 below, the thickness of the cable sheath shall
be 1.6 ± 0.34 mm.
When measured in accordance with clause 3.4.5.3.2 below, the elongation values of all individual
wires taken from the phase conductor of the cable and tested individually without straightening, shall
not exceed 4 %.
When tested in accordance with clause 3.4.5.3.4 below, the slippage of the outer sheath with respect
to the commercial clamps specified shall comply with the following requirements:

 slippage after 15 minutes at 0.7 kN S1 ≤ 2mm

 slippage after 1 hour at 1.0 kN S2 ≤ S1 + 3mm

3.4.4 Electrical Requirements

When a cable is tested in accordance with clause 3.4.5.2.1 below, the conductor resistance at 20°C
shall be not more than 1.9 Ω/km.
When a cable is tested in accordance with clause 3.4.5.2.3below, the dielectric resistance between
phase conductor and neutral/earth conductors shall be at least 60 MΩkm at 20°C.
When a cable is tested in accordance with the relevant clause 3.4.5.2.2 below, there shall be no
breakdown of the insulation.
The continuous current rating in air at 30°C shall be not less than 50 A when the phase conductor is
at 90°C.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 23 of 36

3.4.5 Tests
3.4.5.1 Type Tests
3.4.5.1.1 General
The type tests shall be performed by the manufacturer or a recognized test authority approved by
the Engineer. If a previous report on an identical cable has been produced, a copy of this report may
be submitted.
If any changes in the cable design are made, such as change of conductor type, change of insulation
thickness, change of conductor diameter or change of insulation material, then the type test shall be
repeated.
3.4.5.1.1.1 Bending Radius
Carefully bend the sample around a mandrel of diameter equal to eight times the diameter of the
cable, carefully bend a cable sample around the mandrel to make a 180° turn and check for
compliance with clause 6.4.3.

3.4.5.2 Routine Tests

These routine tests shall be performed on each completed cable drum.

3.4.5.2.1 Conductor Resistance

Use SANS 6282-1, and check for compliance with Clause 3.4.4, Electrical Requirements above.

3.4.5.2.2 Voltage Withstand

Apply, for at least 10 min., an a.c. r.m.s. voltage of 2000 V to the phase conductor with the concentric
layer conductor earthed. Check for compliance. Alternatively, apply 3000V d.c. for 5min.

3.4.5.2.3 Dielectric Resistance Tests

Use SANS 5526, and check compliance with Clause 3.4.4.

3.4.5.3 Sample Tests

Sample tests should be conducted at the manufacturer's works on a regular basis.

3.4.5.3.1 Thickness of Outer Sheath

Measure the thickness of the outer sheath, using SANS 60811-1-1 and check for compliance with
Clause 3.4.3.

3.4.5.3.2 Elongation Test

Measure the elongation of the individual wires of the phase conductor using SANS 6282-3 and check
for compliance with Clause 3.4.3.

3.4.5.3.3 Insulation Test

Measure the thickness of the insulation, using SANS 60811-1-1, and check for compliance with
Clause 3.4.3.

3.4.5.3.4 Adherence to Cable Sheath Layer Test

Conduct the tests at an ambient temperature between 10°C and 30°C and at a humidity of less than
80%.

3.4.5.3.4.1 Test Procedure

 Mount a reference clamp and a commercially available clamp on opposite ends of a section
of service cable of length about 4 m, at least 2 m apart.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 24 of 36

 Apply a steady increasing load (in Newton) up to a value of 0.7 kN onto the cable and allow
it to settle for a period of 5 minutes.
 Mark the cable at the inner end of the commercial clamp so that any slippage of the cable
sheath over the concentric layer is measurable.
 Maintain the tension on the cable at a constant load of 0.7 kN for 15 minutes.
 Mark the cable at the inner end of the commercial clamp and record the slippage.
 Increase the load steadily to 1.0 kN.
 Maintain the tension on the cable at a constant 1.0 kN load for 1 hour.
 After the 1 hour has elapsed, mark and record the slippage from the 0.7 kN point

3.4.6 Marking / Labelling / Packing

The outer sheath of the cable shall be sequentially marked at 1 m intervals.
Lengths of cable may be wound on drums, commencing at any sequential mark. The "start" and
"finish" lengths of sequential marking shall be shown on the drum label in those instances where the
start is not zero.
The year of manufacture shall be indicated. The method of indication shall be an embossed mark or
colour coded thread.
The standard length of supply shall be 500 m.

3.5 ENTRANCE CABLE

3.5.1 Reference Standards
The following standards shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60228 Power cables. Resistance of conductors.
60287 Calculation of the continuous current rating of cables.

60502 Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated voltages from 1 kV to
30 kV.
60811 Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of electric cables.

3.5.2 Design
The cable shall be PVC-insulated, PVC-sheathed with Cu-conductors and copper screen. The
neutral conductor shall be of the same cross-section as the phase-conductors. The cable shall be
suitable for clamping directly on house walls. The PEN-conductor shall be coloured green-and-
yellow.

3.5.3 Type of Cables

The following type of cables shall be used:
 0.6/1.0 kV four-core cable, Cu-conductors 6 mm2, max. 40 A.
 0.6/1.0 kV four-core cable, Cu-conductors 16 mm2, max. 80 A.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 25 of 36

4 D-LV-04-001 HARDWARE
4.1 GENERAL
Clamps and fittings shall be of a design approved for the conductor in accordance with the relevant
clause.
The connecting attachments, including bolts, nuts and washers, shall be included in the assemblies.
All materials shall be free from folds, cracks and other exterior and interior defects, which can affect
its strength, ductility, durability of ability to function.
All materials shall be inspected and tested in full to prove compliance with the requirements of the
Specifications and to the satisfaction of the Purchaser/Engineer.
The testing shall be carried out according to the relevant standards approved by the
Purchaser/Engineer.

4.2 INSULINK JOINT SLEEVES

4.2.1 Reference Standards
The following IEC standard shall be applicable:
IEC 61238 Compression and mechanical connectors for power cables with copper or
aluminium conductors.
4.2.2 General
Insulink joint sleeves should be supplied for the following type of conductors:
 Al-conductor 95/95 mm2.
 Al-conductor 50/50 mm2.
 Al-conductor 25/25 mm2.

4.2.3 Strength
The tensile strength of a jointed wire should be at least 90% of the value required for an unjointed
wire. The elongation requirements need not to be fulfilled.

4.3 INSULATION PIERCING CONNECTORS

4.3.1 Reference Standards
The following IEC standard shall be applicable:
IEC 61238 Compression and mechanical connectors for power cables with copper or
aluminium conductors.
4.3.2 General
The connectors shall be made of corrosion-resistant aluminium alloy with a tensile strength of min.
300 N/mm2.
The connectors shall pierce the insulation of the conductor, eliminating the necessity for stripping.
The connectors shall be insulated or include a separate insulation cover

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 26 of 36

Insulation piercing connector

4.3.3 Types
Connectors should be supplied for the following type of conductors:
 Covered Al-conductor 25 - 95/25 - 95 mm2.
 Covered Al-conductor 25 - 95/Cu-conductor 6 - 35 mm2.
 Covered Al-conductor 25/Cu-conductor 2.5 mm2 for street lighting luminaries.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 27 of 36

5 D-LV-05-001 APPARATUS
5.1 POLE TOP BOX
5.1.1 Reference Standards
The following standards shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60439-5 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies - Part 5: Particular
requirements for assemblies intended to be installed outdoors in public places
- Cable distribution cabinets (CDCs) for power distribution in networks.
60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).

60664-1 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 1:

Principles, requirements and tests.

60664-3 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 3: Use
of coating, potting or moulding for protection against pollution.

60664-5 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 5: A

comprehensive method for determining clearances and creepage distances
equal to or less than 2 mm
60947-2 Low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 2.

60947-3 Switches, disconnectors and fuse-combination units

5.1.2 Electric Data

5.1.2.1 Types and Ratings
The service boxes should be of the following types:
Type 1: Connection of four (4) single-phase consumers. The box shall be equipped with four (4)
MCB:s rated 63 A, with separate connection bars for neutral and earth. All clamps should
be suitable for Cu-conductors 16-10 mm2.
Type 2: Connection of one (1) three-phase consumer. The box shall be equipped with three (3)
MCB:s rated 63 A, with separate connection bars for neutral and earth. All clamps should
be suitable for Al-conductors 25-50 mm2.

5.1.3 Technical Requirements

The box shall be suitable for outdoor installation exposed to rain and dust. All cable entrances shall
be equipped with gable glands.

5.2 JOINT BOX

5.2.1 Reference Standards
Refer to Clause 5.1.1 above.

5.2.2 Design
The joint box shall be intended for connection of the service cable to the entrance cable to the meter.
Normally the box is only needed at three-phase supplies since the concentric service cable can be

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 28 of 36

used as entrance cable as well. The box shall be equipped with clamps suitable for Al-conductors
25-50 mm2 to Cu-conductors 10-35 mm2.

5.2.3 Technical Requirements

The box shall be suitable for outdoor installation exposed to rain and dust. All cable entrances shall
be equipped with gable glands.

5.3 METER BOX

5.3.1 Reference Standards
Refer to Clause 5.1.1 above.

5.3.2 Electrical Data

5.3.2.1 Types and Ratings
The meter boxes should be of the following types:
Type 1: Single-phase consumer. The box shall be equipped with one (1) MCB rated 35 A, with
separate connection bars for neutral and earth. All clamps should be suitable for Cu-
conductors 16-10 mm2.
Type 2: Three-phase consumer. The box shall be equipped with three (3) MCB:s rated 35 A, with
separate connection bars for neutral and earth. All clamps should be suitable for Al-
conductors 25-50 mm2 and Cu-conductors 10-35 mm2.

5.3.3 Technical Requirements

The box shall be suitable for outdoor installation exposed to rain and dust. The box shall be equipped
with inspection window. All cable entrances shall be equipped with gable glands.

5.4 METERS
5.4.1 Reference Standards
The following standards shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60521 Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating-current watt-hour meters.
5.4.2 Electrical Data
5.4.2.1 Types and Ratings
The meters should be of the following types and ratings.
 Single-phase 230 V, 10(40) A, 50 Hz
 Three-phase 3 x 230/400 V, 5 A, 50 Hz
 Three-phase 3 x 230/400 V, 15(45) A, 50 Hz
 Prepayment meters
 Ready-boards, single-phase with programmable daily allowance and demand limit.

5.4.2.2 Class
The meters should be of Class 2 according to IEC 60521

5.4.3 Technical Requirements

Conventional meters shall have cyclometer (drum) type registers, with five digits and one decimal.
On the decimal it must be possible to read also 1/100 kWh.
The decimal shall be coded or covered.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 29 of 36

The terminals shall be suitable for 10 mm2 Cu cables.

Meters shall be suitable for outdoor installation exposed to rain and dust.
The apparent power for three-phase meters, taken by each current circuit, shall not exceed 1.0 VA.
The meter identity number shall be able to be read with a bar code scanner. The numbers will be
supplied by ZETDC.

5.4.4 Special Requirements for Prepayment Meters

The meter shall operate with numeric tokens, 16 digit CTS encryption algorithm.
The meter shall:
 display the numbers entered during token entry;
 have the means to remove digits, one at a time, from the end of a partially entered number,
for example, a "Backspace" button;
 have the means to clear a partially entered number, for example, a "Clear" or "Enter" button.
 have a rate of consumption indicator (red LED) with 1000 impulses/kWh

5.4.5 Ready Boards (if applicable)

The ready boards shall be single phase and equipped as below:
 One earth leakage protection of 30 mA combined with overload protection (MCB) with current
rating 25 A.
 Two (2) single-pole CBs with current rating 16 A.
 Two (2) socket-outlets, two-poled with earthing contacts according to IEC 600309, Group C,
standard C2a.
 One light switch
Optional metering (to be installed in a separate space in the ready board)
 Prepayment meter
 Programmable flat rate metering with demand limit

5.4.6 Testing
The meters should be tested and fulfil the requirements according to IEC 60521. The peak value in
IEC 60651, Clause 6.5.2 shall be 12 kV instead of 6 kV.

5.5 LUMINARIES
5.5.1 Reference Standards
The following standards shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60662 High-pressure sodium vapour lamps.
60598-1 Luminaries – Part 1: General requirements and tests.

60598-2-3 Luminaries – Part 2: Particular requirements – Section 3: Luminaries for road

and street lighting.
5.5.2 Design
a. General
The gear and optical housing shall be made of high pressure die cast aluminium LM16.
The bowl shall be made of clear, impact resistant material and UV stabilized and it shall be held in
place by stainless steel clips.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 30 of 36

The luminary shall be permanently engraved with the mark EDM and the marking of the type and
size of lamp should be visible from the ground.
The Spigot entry is 34mm OD x 80mm or 42mm OD x 100mm standard and via use of a spigot
adaptor ensuring all bracket sizes are catered for.
b. HID Aluminium Luminaries
The luminary shall be a totally enclosed street light luminary suitable for use with one of the 70-400W
high-pressure sodium vapour, high-pressure mercury vapours and metal halide lamps.
The optical compartment shall be IP class 54.
The optical and gear compartments are separated sealed via neoprene gasket.
The optic chamber is to be powder coated white internally, combined with high purity A aluminium
reflectors.
The control gear shall be isolated from the heat of the lamp via a separate compartment with
removable gear tray.
The luminary shall be protected by a 5A MCB.
c. Energy Saving Aluminium luminaries
The luminary shall be a totally enclosed street luminary suitable for use with one of 14-24W tubular
fluorescent lamp, T5, high CRI, colour day light.
The optical and gear compartment shall be IP class 65.
Internal optical reflector is made from a highly reflective material. Which gives 96% reflectivity.
The connection compartments to be separated to the optics.
Use an electronic Ballast with Power factor at 0.98.

5.5.3 Mounting
The luminary shall be mounted on a bracket suitable for wooden, concrete or steel poles. The bracket
with an outreach of 1.5 m shall normally be included in the supply. Longer outreach may be needed
in special cases.
The luminary shall be connected to the feeder with a 3 x 2.5 mm2 PVC-insulated Cu-cable. The light
blue and the green-and-yellow cores of the cable should be connected to the neutral of the ABC
cable and the black core should be connected to the phase conductor by insulation piercing
connectors.
Thus, the bracket is grounded via the luminary. The neutral and the protection ground should not be
connected together in the luminary.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 31 of 36

6 D-LV-06-001 CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

6.1 LINE ROUTES
6.1.1 General Information
The preliminary line routes are shown on the maps.
Before the Contractor commences work on any property he shall obtain from the Engineer a
"Wayleave Schedule" which gives details of any special requirements of tenants or owners of the
property concerned.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for giving the occupiers of the land adequate notice on the
commencement of the work, and shall inform the Engineer at the earliest of any objections or
hindrances encountered.

6.1.2 Clearing of the Line Route

As stated in Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 1, General.

6.1.3 Survey
As stated in Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 1, General.

6.2 ERECTION OF POLES

6.2.1 Location of Poles
Unless otherwise specified, straight line poles shall be installed so as to have the crossarm at right
angles to the line direction, and angle structures to have the crossarm bisecting the line deviation
angle.
Tolerances of centres of pole location shall be as follows:
in span length 1.0 - 2.0 m
deviation from straight line between
two adjacent pole centres 0.10 m

6.2.2 Excavation and Backfill

Refer to Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 1, General.
No additional payment will be made for blasting, sheet piling or water pumping.
Excavated soil may be used as backfill if it is suitable for compaction. Rock and soil not suitable for
compaction shall, at the Contractors own cost, be removed and replaced with a suitable backfill to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
All filling material shall be free from cinders, ashes, refuse vegetation or organic material, boulders
and other material, which in the opinion of the Engineer is unsuitable.
Backfill shall be placed in layers of approximately 15 cm thickness. Each layer shall be carefully
compacted by means of suitable plant.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 32 of 36

Backfill shall be carried out to a minimum height of 20 cm over the original ground surface to
compensate for future settlement of the filling.
All backfill of pole foundation shall be protected from being washed away by running water in an
approved manner.
At all pole positions, the surface of the ground shall be sloping from the pole to provide drainage as
required. No additional payment will be made for such work.
At certain places, additional protection against erosion may be required, such as installation of riprap
or ditches. Any such work, when decided in agreement with and authorised by the Engineer, will be
paid for on the basis of prices in the schedule of rates and prices in the contract.

6.2.3 Type and Size of Foundation

The Contractor shall be responsible, at his own cost for ascertaining that the foundations to be
employed are suitable for each pole site.
For this purpose and at his own cost the Contractor will be responsible for classifying the sub-soils
at each pole site at an early stage of the Contract.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any subsidence or failure due, in the opinion of the Engineer,
to insufficient care not having been taken in his examination of ground conditions or in erection of'
the poles.

6.2.4 Erection
Poles may be erected by any suitable method, provided that no overstressing of any component
parts occurs.
After initial assembly, but before stringing of conductors, thorough check shall be made so that all
bolts are tightened to correct torque and all nuts are locked in an approved manner.
Handling and storage of all material shall be such as to prevent injury to members or damage to the
zinc-coating. Steel in storage shall be blocked off ground.
At each pole, the Contractor shall install the relevant pole signs as shown on the drawings.
Poles shall be plumb. After clamping-in of conductors, the maximum tolerated deviation in any
direction from the vertical shall be 2 mm/m (0.2 %) of the pole height above ground level.
After erection, all poles shall be cleared of all foreign matters.

6.2.5 Repair of Damage

Damaged poles shall be repaired in a manner approved by the Engineer, or replaced. Damaged
wooden poles should always be replaced.

6.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATORS, CLAMPS AND CONDUCTORS

6.3.1 Insulators
Insulators shall be handled with the utmost care in order to avoid chipping or cracking. Insulators
shall remain in their shipping crates until required for assembly at the pole site.
Before assembly, all units shall be closely inspected. Bent pins will not be allowed. In order to
minimise the risk of pin bending, no rope slings shall be used for lifting assembled units, but a suitable
hook shall be applied to the insulator.
Damaged insulator units shall be replaced. Invisible cracks may be detected by sounding each unit
with a light wood or hard-rubber club. The cracked ones shall immediately be destroyed in order to
avoid unintentional re-use.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 33 of 36

Immediately before and installation, the insulator shall be thoroughly cleaned, and all cotter pins shall
be checked for correct positioning and freedom from defects.
All screws, nuts and cotter pins shall be installed so as to facilitate easy, inspection and live line
maintenance work.
Compression joints and tension clamps shall be installed in accordance with good engineering
practice. The Contractor shall submit detailed written instructions for the complete installation
procedure for the approval of the Engineer.
Wherever possible, full use shall be made of maximum drum lengths of conductors in order to reduce
the number of joints.
The number of joints and their location in the spans shall be approved by the Engineer.
No joints shall be made in spans which cross main roads, power lines or in the major river crossings,
nor, whenever conductor drum lengths permit, in spans immediately adjacent thereto.
The distance between joints of the same conductor shall in no case be less than 100 m. Joints shall
in no case be installed closer than 20 m to the centre of suspension clamps.
The Contractor shall keep a record of all joints and tension clamps indicating the location, type and
date of each assembly.

6.3.2 Repair Sleeves

In case of damage to the conductor aluminium strand, an approved repair sleeve shall be installed
provided the damage consists of not more than one fourth of the strands in the centre layer are
broken, or dented deeper than one half of their diameter.
When more than one fourth of the strands are damaged, the damaged section of the conductor shall
be cut out.

6.3.3 Stringing Pulleys

Stringing pulleys shall have adequate strength and shall be of approved design. They shall be
equipped with ball or roller bearings.
The sheave diameter measure at the bottom of the groove shall not be less than 5 times the outside
diameter of the conductor.
The groove shall be wide enough for the passage of compression joints.
Pulleys shall be inspected daily for proper operation. The use of defective pulleys will not be
permitted.

6.3.4 Stringing
Conductors shall be pulled out and strung by an approved stringing method. Conductors shall, as far
as practicable, not be in direct contact with soil during laying an stringing.
The Contractor shall submit in writing, for the approval of the Engineer, a complete and detailed
description of the stringing equipment and the stringing and sagging procedure intended for use.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the stringing procedure shall be in strict conformity with
the recommendations of the manufacturer of the stringing equipment. Only specially trained linesmen
must be employed who are well acquainted with the handling and running of the particular equipment
to be used.
Reliable means of instantaneous two-way communication must be available between the pulling and
the braking crews, and between these crews and any observation posts that may be placed along
the stringing section.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 34 of 36

The stringing equipment shall be set up so as not to cause excessive vertical loads on the poles.
The distance to the nearest pole through which the cables are being strung shall be selected with
due regard to the relative levels of the pulleys on the pole and the stringing equipment reasonable
allowance should also be made for possible accidental over-tensioning of the cables.
Stringing pulleys shall preferably be located at approximately the same levels as that which the
conductors will occupy when installed.
At all times during stringing, the conductors shall be handled and protected so as not to be scratched,
nicked, abraded, kinked or damaged in any way. If during stringing it should prove inevitable to lower
the conductors to the ground, suitable non-metallic lagging shall be placed underneath.
Conductors, which have been subject to bird-caging during stringing, will not be accepted.
Stringing tensions shall at no time exceed corresponding sagging tensions.
Clamps for attaching the conductors to the hauling device shall be of approved design and shall
prevent relative movement of strand or layers of the conductors or overhead ground wires. Freely
rotating ball bearing swivels shall be used for each cable to be strung.
If, for any reason, stringing operations in progress must be interrupted, the conductors may be left in
the stringing pulleys, but their tension shall be reduced as far as possible.
In all cases, however, the cables must be kept completely clear of the ground, not lower than the
min. clearances given in Clause 2.5 of Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2,
Distribution General Specifications, Chapter 1, General and sufficiently far from any obstacles which
might cause abrasion of the cables, if touched by them.
If the interruption lasts for more than 40 hours or if stormy weather has prevailed, the cables shall be
closely inspected for damage.
Such inspection applies particularly to the suspension points where the cables have been resting in
the pulley sheaves.
At all times during stringing, sagging and clamping operations, the conductors, reels and hauling
equipment shall be effectively grounded.
The Contractor shall make suitable arrangements for temporary staying of poles, where necessary.
Damages to the conductors shall be immediately reported to the Engineer who will instruct the
Contractor on how to proceed.

6.3.5 Sagging
The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer sag and tension charts for use during
erection, which shall be established with due regard to the specific stringing and sagging methods
to be employed so that remaining creep after clamping may be assessed and taken into account with
reasonable accuracy.
Erection sagging charts or tables shall display sag in still air against span length for temperatures
between +5o C and 70o C in increments of 5o C.
Sagging temperature shall be read from a certified thermometer, the bulb of which has been inserted
in an approximately 50 cm long piece of conductor with the inner layers removed. The thermometer
so equipped shall be freely suspended in the air without any shielding and not less than 3 m above
ground. Temperature readings will be taken only after 20 minutes exposure.
After finishing stringing operations, the conductors and overhead ground wires shall be sagged in
accordance with agreed sagging procedure and relevant erection sagging chart or table.
It is essential that prescribed hold periods before definite sagging are rigorously observed.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 35 of 36

The Contractor shall check the sag of each conductor of a sagging section in at least one span of
approximate ruling span length. The sags shall also be checked in all spans exceeding 120 m and
in spans on each side of angle structures and sharp breaks in profile. Intermediate spans shall be
inspected for uniform sag.
Sag at the option of the Engineer will be checked by him, and the Contractor shall furnish such
assistance in equipment and personnel as may be required for this purpose.
Sagging sections shall be limited to such length as can be sagged satisfactorily.
Final sagging of conductors shall not be made earlier than 8 hours but not later than 48 hours after
they have been taken up to approximate specific sag. All conductors of a sagging section shall be
sagged at the same time.
Conductor tension shall be equalised between sagging sections so that the insulator strings will
assume the proper position when successive sagging sections have been clamped in.
The Contractor shall keep a record on approved schedules of the particulars of the sagging of
conductors and overhead ground wires on each sagging section.

6.3.6 Binding
After finishing sagging operations, the conductors shall be bound according to agreed procedure.
Tension clamps shall be installed and properly anchored prior to clamping-in at suspension strings.
In order to make future adjustments possible, approximately one half of the available length
adjustment of turn buckles shall remain after anchoring.
Binding shall be done within 48 hours after completion of sagging, unless otherwise agreed.
All markings of the conductors, e.g. for the centring of clamps or armour rods, shall be done with
tape or other inoffensive means. Scratch marks or similar will not be permitted.
Immediately after binding, sag tolerances shall be plus or minus 1 % of specified sag, provided that
all conductors in the span assume the same sag, and specified clearance to ground will be obtained.

6.4 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

6.4.1 General
The Employer shall connect all service lines to the customers’ meter boards.
All conductors shall be supplied by the Contractor.
Hardware, such as clamps, connectors and service boxes needed for the installation of the service
connections by the Employer shall be supplied by the Contractor.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)4_LV Lines-0.4kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 36 of 36

Norconsult AS
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission
Project - AKTP

Tender Documents
ZETDC Tender No.______________________

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution

Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)7,
Technical Schedules
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)7
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)7,
Technical Schedules Revision: 1

Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project

PART 2 – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS (VOLUMES 2A, 2B and 2C)

PART 4 – SPECIFICATIONS FOR WORKSITE ENVIRONMENTAL,

SOCIAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT (ESHS) (VOLUME 4)

2020-08-09 Assignment no.: 6035357 7, GIFP, Gaborone, Botswana

1 09 August 2020 Part 2: Employer’s Requirements, Distribution Lines & TRK OLO OLO
Substations (Volume 2C) - Section VI(C)7, Technical
Schedules
Revision Date: Description Compiled Checked Accepted

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)7_Technical Schedules.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 2 of 15

Norconsult AS
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)7
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)7,
Technical Schedules Revision: 1

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations

(Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)7 – Technical Schedules
Contents
C1: Detailed Scope of Works
Index Contents
1.0 D-S-01-001 Scope of Works
C2: Distribution General Specifications
Index Contents
1.0 D-GS-01-001 General
2.0 D-GS-02-001 Mechanical Design of Overhead Lines
3.0 D-GS-03-001 Poles and Crossarms
4.0 D-GS-04-001 Foundations
5.0 D-GS-05-001 Grounding
6.0 D-SS-06-001 Environmental Requirements
C3: Medium Voltage Overhead Lines 33-11kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-MV-01-001 General
2.0 D-MV-02-001 Insulators and Stays
3.0 D-MV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-MV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-MV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-MV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C4: Low Voltage Overhead Lines 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-LV-01-001 General
2.0 D-LV-02-001 Clamps and Stays
3.0 D-LV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-LV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-LV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-LV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C5: Underground Cables 33-1kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-UC-01-001 General
2.0 D-UC-02-001 33kV and 11kV Underground Cables
3.0 D-UC-03-001 LV Underground Cables
4.0 D-UC-04-001 Joints and Terminations
5.0 D-UC-05-001 Cable Lugs
6.0 D-UC-06-001 Warning Tape
7.0 D-UC-07-001 Protection Sheets and Pipes
8.0 D-UC-08-001 Cable Pillars
9.0 D-UC-09-001 Construction Specifications
C6: Substations 33/11 – 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-SS-01-001 General
2.0 D-SS-02-001 Power Transformers
3.0 D-SS-03-001 Pole Mounted Transformers
4.0 D-SS-04-001 Prefabricated Compact Type Substations

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)7_Technical Schedules.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 3 of 15

C7: Technical Schedules

Index Contents
1.0 Distribution Technical Schedules (Including Preamble)
2.0 33kV Transformers Technical Schedules
3.0 11kV Transformers Technical Schedules
4.0 Insulators Technical Schedules
5.0 Conductors Technical Schedules
6.0 Wood Poles Technical Schedules
7.0 Construction Technical Schedules
C8: Distribution Drawings – To be Produced by the Contractor
Item No. Description
Distribution Line Drawings – To be Provided by the Contractor
33/18 Design 33kV Poles, Crossarms, Stays, Hardware & Fittings
11/30 Design 11kV Pole, Crossarms, Stays, Hardware & Fittings
0.4kV HDA 0.4kV Poles, Stays, Hardware & Fittings (For HDA/AAC Conductors)
0.4kV ABC 0.4kV Poles, Stays, Hardware & Fittings (For Aerial Bundled Conductors)
Sag and Tension Charts – To be Provided by the Contractor
Substation Drawings – To be Provided by the Contractor

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)7_Technical Schedules.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 4 of 15

Table of Contents

C7 – DISTRIBUTION TECHNICAL SCHEDULES 7

1 DISTRIBUTION PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SCHEDULES 8

1.1 Preamble 8
1.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................. 8
1.1.2 Definitions and Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 8

2 33kV TRANSFORMERS TECHNICAL SCHEDULES 10

2.1 10 kVA 33/0.4kV Transformers 10
2.2 25 kVA 33/0.4kV Transformers 10
2.3 50 kVA 33/0.kV Transformers 10
2.4 100 kVA 33/0.4kV Transformers 10
2.5 200 kVA 33/0.4kV Transformers 10
2.6 5 MVA 33/11kV Transformer 10

3 11kV TRANSFORMERS TECHNICAL SCHEDULES 11

3.1 10 kVA 11/0.4kV Transformers 11
3.2 25 kVA 11/0.4kV Transformers 11
3.3 50 kVA 11/0.kV Transformers 11
3.4 100 kVA 11/0.4kV Transformers 11

4 INSULATORS TECHNICAL SCHEDULES 12

4.1 33kV Pin & Shackle Insulators 12
4.2 33kV Composite Insulators 12
4.3 11kV Pin & Shackle Insulators 12
4.4 11kV Composite Insulators 12
4.5 11kV Disc Insulators 12
4.6 0.4kV Reel Insulators 12
4.7 Stay Insulators 12

5 CONDUCTORS TECHNICAL SCHEDULES 13

5.1 SCA/ACSR Conductors 13
5.1.1 SCA Gopher ....................................................................................................................................... 13
5.1.2 SCA Rabbit ......................................................................................................................................... 13
5.1.3 SCA Raccoon ..................................................................................................................................... 13
5.1.4 SCA Dog............................................................................................................................................. 13
5.1.5 ACSR Wolf ......................................................................................................................................... 13
5.2 HDA/AAC Conductors 13
5.2.1 AAC Wasp .......................................................................................................................................... 13
5.2.2 AAC Ant .............................................................................................................................................. 13
5.3 ABC Conductors 13

6 WOODPOLES TECHNICAL SCHEDULES 14

6.1 For MV Lines 14
6.1.1 13.5m Long Wood Poles .................................................................................................................... 14
6.1.2 12.6m Long Wood Poles .................................................................................................................... 14
6.1.3 10.8m Long Wood Poles .................................................................................................................... 14
6.2 For LV Lines 14

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)7_Technical Schedules.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 5 of 15

6.2.1 10m Long Wood Poles ....................................................................................................................... 14

6.2.2 9m Long Wood Poles ......................................................................................................................... 14

7 CONSTRUCTION TECHNICAL SCHEDULES 15

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)7_Technical Schedules.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 6 of 15

C7 – DISTRIBUTION TECHNICAL SCHEDULES

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)7_Technical Schedules.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 7 of 15

1 DISTRIBUTION PARTICULAR TECHNICAL SCHEDULES

1.1 PREAMBLE
1.1.1 General
Tenderers (Contractors) shall complete the following Technical Schedules and in addition provide
the necessary technical brochures, layouts and detail drawings.
Technical Guarantees contains data which shall be the basis for the contractual guarantees.
All other schedules contain preliminary data and information for better understanding of the Tender.
Such data may, subject to the approval of the Engineer, be modified during the detailed design
phase. However, modifications which in the opinion of the Engineer represent substantial changes
of the intended function, quality and/or reliability of the Works will not be approved.
In addition to the schedules, the Tenderer shall submit with his Tender technical brochures, design
calculations, layout and preliminary arrangement drawings for all the equipment, poles and
assemblies. In particular, the Tenderer shall include dimensioned drawings and weights for those
parts which influences the dimensions of the substation, e.g. ground mounted transformers.
The technical schedules have a field for the Tenderer’s signature, which needs to be signed in the
normal way.

1.1.2 Definitions and Abbreviations

The following terms may be encountered in these Technical Schedules and shall be interpreted as
follows:
Symbol: Shall mean:
Hz hertz
kW (MW) kilowatt (mega-)
kWh (GWh) kilowatt hours (giga-)
VA(kVA, MVA) volt-ampere (kilo-, mega-)
A (kA) ampere (kilo-)
V (kV) mean volt (kilo-)
kV/mm kilovolts per millimeter
a.c. alternating current
d.c. direct current
IN rated (nominal) current
UN rated (nominal) voltage
Ah ampere-hours
lm lumen
lm/W lumen per watt
min minute
min.(max.) minimum (maximum)
μ (prefix) micro (= 10-6)

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)7_Technical Schedules.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 8 of 15

Symbol: Shall mean:

rms root mean square
p.u. per unit
p/p peak to peak
N Newton
Nm Newton meter
Pa, N/m2 Pascal, Newton per square meter
bar bar (1 bar = 105 N/m2 = 0.1 M Pa)
kg kilogram
ton (t) metric tonne (= 1000 kg)
mWC meters water column (10.2 mWC = 1 bar)
l litre
h hour
s or sec second
l/h litres per hour
l/s (l/min) litres per second (per minute)
rpm revolutions per minute
No. number
dB decibel
T (tesla) flux density
F Farad
oC degrees centigrade/celsius
K kelvin
t temperature, thickness, time
m2 square meter (mm2 for millimeter, etc.)
m3 cubic meter (mm3 for millimeter, etc.)
m3/s cubic metres per second
Nm3/h Normal (atmospheric) cubic metres per hour
m meter
cm centimeter
mm millimeter
J joules or Nm
% per cent
el. elevation
degr. degrees
ppm parts per million
cst centi-stoke
m/s meter per second

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)7_Technical Schedules.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 9 of 15

2 33kV TRANSFORMERS TECHNICAL SCHEDULES

2.1 10 KVA 33/0.4KV TRANSFORMERS
2.2 25 KVA 33/0.4KV TRANSFORMERS
2.3 50 KVA 33/0.KV TRANSFORMERS
2.4 100 KVA 33/0.4KV TRANSFORMERS
2.5 200 KVA 33/0.4KV TRANSFORMERS
2.6 5 MVA 33/11KV TRANSFORMER

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)7_Technical Schedules.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 10 of 15

Norconsult AS
Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 3 Rev. Final
33-0.4kV 10kVA Transformer.xlsx Guarantees Date: June 2020

33/0.4 kV Power Transformer / 10 kVA (ONAN)

Employer's Contractor's
33/0.4 kV Power Transformer Unit
Requirements Guarantees
Manufacturer’s Name
Country of Manufacture

3-phase, oil-
Type immersed, with on-
load tap changer

Standards IEC 60076

Installation outdoor
Rated Power(ONAN Colling) kVA 10
Rated maximum voltage (Primary / Secondary) kV 36 / 0.415
Rated frequency Hz 50
Rated service voltage
-Primary side (high voltage) kV 33
-Secondary side (low voltage) kV 0.4
Tapping Range on HV windings % ± 2 x 2.5
Number of tapping positions no. 5
Type of tap changer Off-voltage
Maximum continuous operation voltage of windings
-Primary Winding kV 36
Consistent with
-Secondary Winding kV
primary side
Connection group Dyn11
Delta connected,
with one terminal
-Primary Winding
permanently
grounded
Star, with neutral
-Secondary Winding
grounded
Number of Windings no. 2
o
Impendance voltage on principal tapping at 70 C % 4
No-load losses W
No-load current % ≤1.5
o
Load losses at 70 C W
Sound level [power] dB(A) <48
Insulation Class A
Cooling Method ONAN
Insulation Levels, primary winding
-Highest system voltage kVrms 36
-Power frequency withstand voltage kVrms
-Lightning impulse witstand voltage (1.2/50µs) kVpeak
Insulation Levels, secondary winding
-Highest system voltage kVrms
-Power frequency withstand voltage kVrms
-Lightning impulse witstand voltage (1.2/50µs) kVpeak
Induced withstand voltage of HV winding with tap-changer in
kVrms
intermediate position (34.5kV)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 2 of 3 Rev. Final
33-0.4kV 10kVA Transformer.xlsx Guarantees Date: June 2020

Employer's Contractor's
33/0.4 kV Power Transformer Unit
Requirements Guarantees
Temperature rises
-Windings average o
C ≤60
-Top oil o
C ≤55
-Winding hot spot o
C ≤70
-Core surface o
C ≤75
The transformer must withstand the short circuit special test as
per IEC 60076 part 5, on units seleceted at random by the Yes
Client's inspector from each lot submitted to acceptance test
At the Client's
discretion, after
Execution of Short Circuit Tests transformer
manufacturing per
lot
Short circuit test reports on similar transformers in an Shall be enclosed
independent test laboratory to the offer
Short circuit power of 34.5kV supply network for short circuit test Infinite
Construction
-Primary Copper
Copper or
-Secondary
Aluminium
-Cross section Uniform
-Current density in Copper A/mm2 HV: ≤3; LV ≤ 3
Magnetic Core
-Type 3 legged
Cold rolled grain
-Material oriented silicon
steel
-Flux density at rated voltage & frequency, with mean tap Tesla ≤1.65
-Bushing Characteristics IEC 137
-Type Porcelain
Primary Bushings
-Rated Voltage as per IEC 60694 kV 38
-Rated Current A
Withstand test voltage
-50Hz - 1 minute wet kVrms
-Lightning impulse (1.2/50µs) kVcrest
Creepage Distance mm
Secondary bushings
-Insulation level kV
-Rated Current A
Withstand test voltage
-50Hz - 1 minute wet kVrms
-Lightning impulse (1.2/50µs) kVcrest
Bushings Number
-Primary kVrms
-Secondary kVcrest

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 3 of 3 Rev. Final
33-0.4kV 10kVA Transformer.xlsx Guarantees Date: June 2020

Employer's Contractor's
33/0.4 kV Power Transformer Unit
Requirements Guarantees
Tank Rib type Rib Type

Made of Corrosion
Valves and bolts
resistant material

Painting
Protected aginst
hot oil at a
-Internal surfaces, including the conservator
temperature of
105oC
For tropical
environment, as
-External surfaces
specified in the
detailed specs.
Accessories Required
-Conservator Yes
-Oil level indicator Yes
-Oil filling plug Yes
-Pocket thermometer dial type Yes
-Skid Yes
-Filling and draing valves Yes
-Lifting eyes Yes
-Hitching holes Yes
-Rating Plate Yes
Overall Dimensions
-Height mm
-Length mm
-Width mm
Alternative bid for tank hermetically sealed, for life
With corugated
-Tank walls completely
full of oil
-Max. internal pressure between 0oC and 110oC bar 0.3

5,000 cycles, with

the oil volume
-Endurance test
variation between
0oC and 110oC

gas; over
temperature
-Functions of the integrated protection relay
(alarm and trip);
over pressure

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 1 Rev. Final
33-0.4kV 10kVA Transformer.xlsx Deviations Date: June 2020

All technical deviations shall be listed with reference to the relevant Clause in the Technical Specifications. A
comprehensive description can be given in a separate attachment, to be indicated in the far right column

Ref. Consequence/advantage for

Description Attachment
Clause
time schedule cost

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 1 Rev. Final
33-0.4kV 10kVA Transformer.xlsx Manufacturers Date: June 2020

SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS AND SUB-SUPPLIERS

State identity of equipment manufacturer and sub-suppliers including the parts manufactured below.

Item Name of Manufacturer Country

Conservator for transformer
Off-load tap changer
Current transformer (if applicable)
Dial type thermometer (if fitted)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)7
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)7,
Technical Schedules Revision: 1

3 11kV TRANSFORMERS TECHNICAL SCHEDULES

3.1 10 KVA 11/0.4KV TRANSFORMERS
3.2 25 KVA 11/0.4KV TRANSFORMERS
3.3 50 KVA 11/0.KV TRANSFORMERS
3.4 100 KVA 11/0.4KV TRANSFORMERS

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)7_Technical Schedules.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 11 of 15

Norconsult AS
Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 3 Rev. Final
11-0.4kV 10kVA Transformer.xlsx Guarantees Date: June 2020

11/0.4 kV Power Transformer / 10 kVA (ONAN)

Employer's Contractor's
11/0.4 kV Power Transformer Unit
Requirements Guarantees
Manufacturer’s Name
Country of Manufacture

3-phase, oil-
Type immersed, with on-
load tap changer

Standards IEC 60076

Installation outdoor
Rated Power(ONAN Colling) kVA 10
Rated maximum voltage (Primary / Secondary) kV 11 / 0.415
Rated frequency Hz 50
Rated service voltage
-Primary side (high voltage) kV 11
-Secondary side (low voltage) kV 0.4
Tapping Range on HV windings % ± 2 x 2.5
Number of tapping positions no. 5
Type of tap changer Off-voltage
Maximum continuous operation voltage of windings
-Primary Winding kV 12
Consistent with
-Secondary Winding kV
primary side
Connection group Dyn11
Delta connected,
with one terminal
-Primary Winding
permanently
grounded
Star, with neutral
-Secondary Winding
grounded
Number of Windings no. 2
o
Impendance voltage on principal tapping at 70 C % 4
No-load losses W
No-load current % ≤1.5
o
Load losses at 70 C W
Sound level [power] dB(A) <48
Insulation Class A
Cooling Method ONAN
Insulation Levels, primary winding
-Highest system voltage kVrms 12
-Power frequency withstand voltage kVrms
-Lightning impulse witstand voltage (1.2/50µs) kVpeak
Insulation Levels, secondary winding
-Highest system voltage kVrms
-Power frequency withstand voltage kVrms
-Lightning impulse witstand voltage (1.2/50µs) kVpeak
Induced withstand voltage of HV winding with tap-changer in
kVrms
intermediate position (34.5kV)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 2 of 3 Rev. Final
11-0.4kV 10kVA Transformer.xlsx Guarantees Date: June 2020

Employer's Contractor's
11/0.4 kV Power Transformer Unit
Requirements Guarantees
Temperature rises
-Windings average o
C ≤60
-Top oil o
C ≤55
-Winding hot spot o
C ≤70
-Core surface o
C ≤75
The transformer must withstand the short circuit special test as
per IEC 60076 part 5, on units seleceted at random by the Yes
Client's inspector from each lot submitted to acceptance test
At the Client's
discretion, after
Execution of Short Circuit Tests transformer
manufacturing per
lot
Short circuit test reports on similar transformers in an Shall be enclosed
independent test laboratory to the offer
Short circuit power of 34.5kV supply network for short circuit test Infinite
Construction
-Primary Copper
Copper or
-Secondary
Aluminium
-Cross section Uniform
-Current density in Copper A/mm2 HV: ≤3; LV ≤ 3
Magnetic Core
-Type 3 legged
Cold rolled grain
-Material oriented silicon
steel
-Flux density at rated voltage & frequency, with mean tap Tesla ≤1.65
-Bushing Characteristics IEC 137
-Type Porcelain
Primary Bushings
-Rated Voltage as per IEC 60694 kV 12
-Rated Current A
Withstand test voltage
-50Hz - 1 minute wet kVrms
-Lightning impulse (1.2/50µs) kVcrest
Creepage Distance mm
Secondary bushings
-Insulation level kV
-Rated Current A
Withstand test voltage
-50Hz - 1 minute wet kVrms
-Lightning impulse (1.2/50µs) kVcrest
Bushings Number
-Primary kVrms
-Secondary kVcrest

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 3 of 3 Rev. Final
11-0.4kV 10kVA Transformer.xlsx Guarantees Date: June 2020

Employer's Contractor's
11/0.4 kV Power Transformer Unit
Requirements Guarantees
Tank Rib type Rib Type

Made of Corrosion
Valves and bolts
resistant material

5,000 cycles, with

the oil volume
-Endurance test
variation between
0oC and 110oC

gas; over
temperature
-Functions of the integrated protection relay
(alarm and trip);
over pressure

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 1 Rev. Final
11-0.4kV 10kVA Transformer.xlsx Deviations Date: June 2020

Ref. Consequence/advantage for

Description Attachment
Clause
time schedule cost

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 1 Rev. Final
11-0.4kV 10kVA Transformer.xlsx Manufacturers Date: June 2020

SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS AND SUB-SUPPLIERS

State identity of equipment manufacturer and sub-suppliers including the parts manufactured below.

Item Name of Manufacturer Country

Conservator for transformer
Off-load tap changer
Current transformer (if applicable)
Dial type thermometer (if fitted)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

4 INSULATORS TECHNICAL SCHEDULES

4.1 33KV PIN & SHACKLE INSULATORS
4.2 33KV COMPOSITE INSULATORS
4.3 11KV PIN & SHACKLE INSULATORS
4.4 11KV COMPOSITE INSULATORS
4.5 11KV DISC INSULATORS
4.6 0.4KV REEL INSULATORS
4.7 STAY INSULATORS

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)7_Technical Schedules.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 12 of 15

Norconsult AS
Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 2 Rev. Final
MV Pin Insulator (Porcelain).xlsx Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - MV Pin and Shackle Porcelain Insulators

Description Unit Employer's Requirements Contractor's Guarantee

11kV Pin 33kV Pin 11kV Pin 33kV Pin
Technical Properties of Porcelain Pin Insulator
Type of Insulator Porcelain Porcelain
Reference Standard IEC 60383-1 IEC 60383-1
Maker's Name and Country
Type of Glaze Glazed Brown Glazed Brown
Minimum Failing Load/Cantilever Strength kN 10-12 10-12
Overall Height mm 135-160 203-250
Diameter of Insulator mm 120-125 240
Groove Diameter - Top mm 98-105 125
Groove Diameter - Neck mm 73 ± 3 100
Creepage Distance (min) mm 230 720
Pollution Class Medium to Heavy Medium to Heavy
Rated Voltage kV 11 33
Highest Voltage kV 12 36
One Minute Dry Power Frequency Withstand Voltage kVp 70-80 110-130
One Minute Wet Power Frequency Withstand Voltage kVp 40-55 85-95
Dry Power Frequency Flashover Voltage kV 105-115 130
Wet Power Frequency Flashover Voltage kV 45 90
Power Frequency Puncture Voltage kV 105-120 200-210
Impulse Flashover Voltage (Positive) kVp 105-115 205-210
Impulse Flashover Voltage (Negative) kVp 110-140 225-250
Impulse Withstand Voltage (Positive) kVp 95-105 180-200
Impulse Withstand Voltage(Negative) kVp 105-120 190-220
RIV at 1 MHz when energised at 10kV / 30kV (RMS) under dry micro
< 50 < 70
condition Volt
Visible Discharge Voltage (PF) kV ≥9 ≥29
Number of Threads per millimeter Specify Specify
Thimble Type Specify Specify
Thimble Material Type Specify Specify
Net Weight of Insulator kg 1.8 -2.5 7.5 - 9.5
Tolerance as per Specification Specify Specify
Number of Porcelain Sheds no. 2 3
Furnished Drawing No. / Other Relevant Information Yes Yes

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 2 of 2 Rev. Final
MV Pin Insulator (Porcelain).xlsx Date: June 2020

Description Unit Employer's Requirements Contractor's Guarantee

11kV Pin 33kV Pin 11kV Pin 33kV Pin
Insulator Packing Details
Type of Packing Seasoned Wood Seasoned Wood
Number of Insulators in each pack no. Specify Specify

Insulator Guarantees
12 months from 12 months from
commissioning or commissioning
Guarantee Period months 18 months from or 18 months
date of last from date of last
despatch despatch
Tests and Experience Requirements
Test Requirements
Design Test and Report Required (Yes, No.)* Yes Yes
Factory Acceptance Tests Test and Reports Required (Yes, No) Yes Yes
Quality Conformance Test and Report Required (Yes, No) Yes Yes

Certified Design Test Reports (less than 5 years) on the Insulator

Yes Yes
Identical to the Specified Insulator are Acceptable (Yes/No)

Factory Acceptance Tests to be witnessed by Employer’s

Yes Yes
personnel (Yes, No)
Required no. of Employer’s personnel to witness test no. 2 2
NOTE:* Contractor shall place in the filled-in data “Submitted” or
“Will Submit” or “Will Perform” or “Had Been Performed” as
appropriate.
Additional Tests
If additional tests are required, these shall be as follows:
Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

The manufacturer should have been in the business of

years 10 10
manufacturing insulators for transmission lines for not less than

The material offered should have been in the actual service for
years 15 15
not less than

Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 2 Rev. Final
MV Pin Insulators (Polymeric).xlsx Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - MV Pin and Shackle Polymeric Insulators

Description Unit Employer's Requirements Contractor's Guarantee

11kV Pin 33kV Pin 11kV Pin 33kV Pin
Technical Properties of Polymeric Pin Insulator
Type of Insulator Polymeric Polymeric
Reference Standard IEC 61109 IEC 61109
Material of FRP Rod Boron Free ECR Boron Free ECR
Material of Sheds Silicon Rubber Silicon Rubber
SGCI/MCI/ Forged SGCI/MCI/
Material of Bottom End Fittings
Steel Forged Steel
Material of Top End Fittings Forged Steel Forged Steel
Material of Sealing Compound RTV Silicon RTV Silicon
Colour of Insulators Grey Grey
Rated Voltage kV 11 33
Highest Voltage kV 12 36
Dry Power Frequency Withstand Voltage kV 60 95
Wet Power Frequency Withstand Voltage kV 35 75
Dry Power Frequency Flashover Voltage kV 75 130
Wet Power Frequency Flashover Voltage kV 45 90
Dry Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage (Positive) kV 75 170
Dry Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage (Negative) kV 80 180
Dry Lightning Impulse Flashover Voltage (Positive) kV 95 210
Dry Lightning Impulse Flashover Voltage (Negative) kV 100 230
RIV at 1 MHz when energised at 10kV / 30kV (RMS) under dry micro
< 50 < 70
condition Volt
Creepage Distance (min) mm 320 900
Pollution Class Medium to Heavy Medium to Heavy
Minimum Failing Load kN 10 10
Diameter of FRP Rod (Minimum) mm 20 24
Length of Pin mm 165 300
Largest Diameter of Weather Sheds mm 100 110
Thickness of Housing mm 3 3
Dry Arc Distance mm 150 300
Method of Fixing Sheds to Housing Injection Moulding Injection Moulding
Visible Discharge Voltage (PF) kV ≥9 ≥ 29
Number of Weather Sheds no. 3 8
Type of Sheds Aerodynamic Aerodynamic
Diameter of Bottom End Fitting mm 20 24
Thread Length of Bottom End Fitting (Minimum) mm 110 130
Date: ________________ Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______________________
Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 2 of 2 Rev. Final
MV Pin Insulators (Polymeric).xlsx Date: June 2020

Description Unit Employer's Requirements Contractor's Guarantee

11kV Pin 33kV Pin 11kV Pin 33kV Pin
Insulator Packing Details
Type of Packing Seasoned Wood Seasoned Wood
Number of Insulators in each pack no. 30 20

Certified Design Test Reports (less than 5 years) on the Insulator

Yes Yes
Identical to the Specified Insulator are Acceptable (Yes/No)

Factory Acceptance Tests to be witnessed by Employer’s

Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

The manufacturer should have been in the business of

years 10 10
manufacturing insulators for transmission lines for not less than

The material offered should have been in the actual service for
years 15 15
not less than

Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 2 Rev. Final
MV Tension Insulators (Porcelain or Glass).xlsx Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - MV Porcelain or Glass Tension Insulators

Description Unit Employer's Requirements Contractor's Guarantee

11kV 33kV 11kV 33kV
Technical Properties of Tension Insulators
Type of Insulator Porcelain or Glass Porcelain or Glass
Reference Standard IEC 60383-1 IEC 60383-1
Maker's Name and Country
Type of Glaze (if Porcelain) Glazed Brown Glazed Brown
Minimum Failing Load kN 70-120 70-120
Overall Height (Single disc) mm 145-170 145-170
Diameter of Insulator mm 255-280 255-280
Creepage Distance (min), single disc mm 290-350 290-350
Total Creepage Distance for the Insulator String mm 580-700 870 - 1200
Rated Voltage (Tension String) kV 11 33
Highest Voltage (Tension String) kV 12 36
One Minute Dry Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (single disc) kVp 75-80 75-80
One Minute Wet Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (single disc) kVp 40-55 40-55
Dry Power Frequency Flashover Voltage (single disc) kV 105-115 105-115
Wet Power Frequency Flashover Voltage (single disc) kV 45 45
Power Frequency Puncture Voltage (Single disc) kV 105-120 105-120
Impulse Flashover Voltage (Positive), single disc kVp 105-115 105-115
Impulse Flashover Voltage (Negative), single disc kVp 110-140 110-140
Impulse Withstand Voltage (Positive), single disc kVp 95-105 95-105
Impulse Withstand Voltage(Negative), single disc kVp 105-120 105-120
RIV at 1 MHz when energised at 10kV / 30kV (RMS) under dry micro
< 50 < 70
condition Volt
Visible Discharge Voltage (PF) kV ≥9 ≥29
Insulator String
Frequenzy Hz 50 50
Number of Insulator Units in a string no. 2 3-4
Number of Strings no. 1 1
Use of Arcing Horns Yes/No Yes Yes
Maximum Line to ground fault current duration kA/Cycle
Mechanical & Electrical Strength of Strings Including Hardware kN 70-120 70-120
Weight of String Including Hardware kg Specify Specify
Length of String Including Hardware mm Specify Specify
Type of Structure Installed On Wood Pole Wood Pole
Furnished Drawing No. / Other Relevant Information Yes Yes

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 2 of 2 Rev. Final
MV Tension Insulators (Porcelain or Glass).xlsx Date: June 2020

Description Unit Employer's Requirements Contractor's Guarantee

11kV 33kV 11kV 33kV
Insulator Packing Details
Type of Packing Seasoned Wood Seasoned Wood
Number of Insulators in each pack no. Specify Specify
Insulator Guarantees
12 months from 12 months from
commissioning or commissioning
Guarantee Period months 18 months from or 18 months
date of last from date of last
despatch despatch

Tests and Experience Requirements

Test Requirements
Design Test and Report Required (Yes, No.)* Yes Yes
Factory Acceptance Tests Test and Reports Required (Yes, No) Yes Yes
Quality Conformance Test and Report Required (Yes, No) Yes Yes

Certified Design Test Reports (less than 5 years) on the Insulator

Yes Yes
Identical to the Specified Insulator are Acceptable (Yes/No)

Factory Acceptance Tests to be witnessed by Employer’s

Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

The manufacturer should have been in the business of
years 10 10
manufacturing insulators for transmission lines for not less than
The material offered should have been in the actual service for not
years 15 15
less than
Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 2 Rev. Final
MV Tension Insulators (Polymeric).xlsx Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - MV Tension Polymeric Insulators

Description Unit Employer's Requirements Contractor's Guarantee

11kV Long Rod 33kV Long Rod 11kV Long Rod 33kV Long Rod
Technical Properties of Polymeric Long Rod Insulator
Type of Insulator Polymeric Polymeric
Reference Standard IEC 60305 IEC 60305
Material of FRP Rod Boron Free ECR Boron Free ECR
Material of Sheds Silicon Rubber Silicon Rubber
Type of Live End Fittings Tongue Tongue
Type of Earth End Fittings Clevis Clevis
Material of Sealing Compound RTV Silicon RTV Silicon
Colour of Insulators Grey Grey
Rated Voltage kV 11 33
Highest Voltage kV 12 36
Dry Power Frequency Withstand Voltage kV 60 190
Wet Power Frequency Withstand Voltage kV 35 150
Dry Power Frequency Flashover Voltage kV 75 100
Wet Power Frequency Flashover Voltage kV 45 90
Dry Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage (Positive) kV 75 300
Dry Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage (Negative) kV 80 >200
Dry Lightning Impulse Flashover Voltage (Positive) kV 95 210
Dry Lightning Impulse Flashover Voltage (Negative) kV 100 230
RIV at 1 MHz when energised at 10kV / 30kV (RMS) under dry micro
< 50 < 70
condition Volt
Creepage Distance (min) mm >350 >1100
Minimum Failing Load kN 70 70-120
Routine Test Load kN >45 >60
Diameter of FRP Rod (Minimum) mm 20 24
Connecting Length mm 300 ± 30 450 ± 50
Largest Diameter of Weather Sheds mm 100 110
Dry Arc Distance mm 150 465
Method of Fixing Sheds to Housing Injection Moulding Injection Moulding
Visible Discharge Voltage (PF) kV ≥9 ≥ 29
Number of Weather Sheds no. 3 8
Type of Sheds Aerodynamic Aerodynamic

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 2 of 2 Rev. Final
MV Tension Insulators (Polymeric).xlsx Date: June 2020

Description Unit Employer's Requirements Contractor's Guarantee

11kV Long Rod 33kV Long Rod 11kV Long Rod 33kV Long Rod
Insulator Packing Details
Type of Packing Seasoned Wood Seasoned Wood
Number of Insulators in each pack no. 30 20
Insulator Guarantees
12 months from 12 months from
commissioning or commissioning
Guarantee Period months 18 months from or 18 months
date of last from date of last
despatch despatch
Tests and Experience Requirements
Test Requirements
Design Test and Report Required (Yes, No.)* Yes Yes
Factory Acceptance Tests Test and Reports Required (Yes, No) Yes Yes
Quality Conformance Test and Report Required (Yes, No) Yes Yes

Certified Design Test Reports (less than 5 years) on the Insulator

Yes Yes
Identical to the Specified Insulator are Acceptable (Yes/No)

Factory Acceptance Tests to be witnessed by Employer’s

Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

The manufacturer should have been in the business of

years 10 10
manufacturing insulators for transmission lines for not less than

The material offered should have been in the actual service for
years 15 15
not less than

Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 2 Rev. Final
LV Insulator (Porcelain).xlsx Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - LV Reel and Stay Porcelain Insulators

Description Unit Employer's Requirements Contractor's Guarantee

0.4kV Reel 0.4kV Reel
Stay Insulator Stay Insulator
Insulator Insulator
Technical Properties of Porcelain Pin Insulator
Type of Insulator Porcelain Porcelain
Reference Standard IEC 60383-1 IEC 60383-1
Maker's Name and Country
Type of Glaze Glazed Brown Glazed Brown
Minimum Failing Load/Transverse Strength/Tensile Strength kN 15 60
Overall Height mm 80
Groove Diameter - Top and Bottom mm 75
Groove Diameter - Centre mm 45
Pin Diameter mm 15-17.5 22
Diameter of Groove for Pin mm 17.5
Creepage Distance (min) mm
Rated Voltage kV 0.4 11
Highest Voltage kV 0.6 12
One Minute Dry Power Frequency Withstand Voltage kVp
One Minute Wet Power Frequency Withstand Voltage kVp
Dry Power Frequency Flashover Voltage kV 17 25
Wet Power Frequency Flashover Voltage kV 9 12
Power Frequency Puncture Voltage kV
Impulse Flashover Voltage (Positive) kVp
Impulse Flashover Voltage (Negative) kVp
Impulse Withstand Voltage (Positive) kVp
Impulse Withstand Voltage(Negative) kVp
micro
RIV at 1 MHz when energised at 10kV / 30kV (RMS) under dry condition
Volt
Visible Discharge Voltage (PF) kV
Net Weight of Insulator kg Specify Specify
Tolerance as per Specification Specify Specify
Furnished Drawing No. / Other Relevant Information Yes Yes

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 2 of 2 Rev. Final
LV Insulator (Porcelain).xlsx Date: June 2020

Description Unit Employer's Requirements Contractor's Guarantee

0.4kV Reel 0.4kV Reel
Stay Insulator Stay Insulator
Insulator Insulator
Insulator Packing Details
Type of Packing Seasoned Wood Seasoned Wood
Number of Insulators in each pack no. Specify Specify
Insulator Guarantees
12 months from 12 months from
commissioning or commissioning
Guarantee Period months 18 months from or 18 months
date of last from date of last
despatch despatch
Tests and Experience Requirements
Test Requirements
Design Test and Report Required (Yes, No.)* Yes Yes
Factory Acceptance Tests Test and Reports Required (Yes, No) Yes Yes
Quality Conformance Test and Report Required (Yes, No) Yes Yes
Certified Design Test Reports (less than 5 years) on the Insulator Identical
Yes Yes
to the Specified Insulator are Acceptable (Yes/No)
Factory Acceptance Tests to be witnessed by Employer’s personnel (Yes,
Yes Yes
No)
Required no. of Employer’s personnel to witness test no. 2 2
NOTE:* Contractor shall place in the filled-in data “Submitted” or “Will
Submit” or “Will Perform” or “Had Been Performed” as appropriate.
Additional Tests
If additional tests are required, these shall be as follows:

Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

The manufacturer should have been in the business of manufacturing
years 10 10
insulators for distribution lines for not less than

The material offered should have been in the actual service for not less than years 15 15
Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

5 CONDUCTORS TECHNICAL SCHEDULES

5.1 SCA/ACSR CONDUCTORS
5.1.1 SCA Gopher
5.1.2 SCA Rabbit
5.1.3 SCA Raccoon
5.1.4 SCA Dog
5.1.5 ACSR Wolf
5.2 HDA/AAC CONDUCTORS
5.2.1 AAC Wasp
5.2.2 AAC Ant
5.3 ABC CONDUCTORS

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)7_Technical Schedules.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 13 of 15

Norconsult AS
Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 2 Rev. Final
SCA Gopher.xlsx Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - SCA/ACSR Conductors

Employer's Contractor's
Description Unit
Requirements Guarantee
Conductor Type SCA Gopher
Manufacturing International Standard IEC/ASTM
Country of Origin
Composition of Conductor:
Outer Layer
Material Aluminium
Source of Aluminium Rod
Stranding and Wire Diameter No. / mm 6/2.36
Layers no.
Cross Section mm2 25
Weight kg/km
Coefficient of Elongation
Core
Material Steel
Stranding and Wire Diameter No. / mm 1/2.36
Layers no.
Cross Section mm2
Weight kg/km
Coefficient of Elongation
Total
Overall diameter mm 7.08
Weight without grease kg/km 106
Weight with grease kg/km
Overall cross section mm2 30.62
Ultimate tensile strength kN 9.61
2
Modulus of Elasticity Ei (Initial) N/mm
Modulus of Elasticity Ep (Permanent) N/mm2
Coefficient of Elongation per oC
Permanent elongation factor due to creep m/m
DC resistance of conductors per km at 20oC Ohm/km
Conductor Ampacity (At 45oC) A 150
Conductor Lay (Right, Left)
Length of Lay
Name of Grease Used
Greasing System
Wiping System
o
Drop Point of Grease C
o
Maximum Temperature for 30min. Operation without Migration C
o
Maximum Temperature without Irreversible Property Changes C

Cable Reel/Drum
Drum/Reel Manufacturer
Length of Conductor Per Drum m
Drum Overall Diameter mm

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 2 of 2 Rev. Final
SCA Gopher.xlsx Date: June 2020

Employer's Contractor's
Description Unit
Requirements Guarantee
Drum Battens Fitted (Yes/No) Specify
Diameter of Core mm
Axle Hole Diameter mm
Gross Weight of Loaded Drum kg
Material of Drum
Returnable (Yes/No)
Accessories for Conductor
Compression Splice Manufacturer
Compound Prefilled
Compression Repair Assembly Manufacturer
Filler Compounds

Tests and Experience Requirements

Test Requirements
Stress-Strain Test and Report Required (Yes, No.)*
Breaking Strength Test and Reports Required (Yes, No)
Certified Stress-Strain Test Reports on a cable identical to
the specified conductor are acceptable (Yes, No)
Factory Acceptance Tests to be witnessed by Employer’s
Yes
personnel (Yes, No)
Required no. of Employer’s personnel to witness test no. 2
NOTE:* Contractor shall place in the filled-in data “Submitted”
or “Will Submit” or “Will Perform” or “Had Been Performed”
as appropriate.
Additional Tests
If additional tests are required, these shall be as follows:

Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

The manufacturer should have been in the business of
manufacturing conductors for transmission lines for not less years 10
than
The material offered should have been in the actual service
years 15
for not less than

Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 2 Rev. Final
SCA Rabbit.xlsx
Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - SCA/ACSR Conductors

Employer's Contractor's
Description Unit
Requirements Guarantee
Conductor Type SCA Rabbit
Manufacturing International Standard IEC/ASTM
Country of Origin
Composition of Conductor:
Outer Layer
Material Aluminium
Source of Aluminium Rod
Stranding and Wire Diameter No. / mm 6/3.35
Layers no.
Cross Section mm2 50
Weight kg/km
Coefficient of Elongation
Core
Material Steel
Stranding and Wire Diameter No. / mm 1/3.35
Layers no.
Cross Section mm2
Weight kg/km
Coefficient of Elongation
Total
Overall diameter mm 10.05
Weight without grease kg/km 214
Weight with grease kg/km
Overall cross section mm2 61.72
Ultimate tensile strength kN 18.35
2
Modulus of Elasticity Ei (Initial) N/mm
Modulus of Elasticity Ep (Permanent) N/mm2
Coefficient of Elongation per oC
Permanent elongation factor due to creep m/m
DC resistance of conductors per km at 20oC Ohm/km
Conductor Ampacity (At 45oC) A 240
Conductor Lay (Right, Left)
Length of Lay
Name of Grease Used
Greasing System
Wiping System
o
Drop Point of Grease C
o
Maximum Temperature for 30min. Operation without Migration C
o
Maximum Temperature without Irreversible Property Changes C

Cable Reel/Drum
Drum/Reel Manufacturer
Length of Conductor Per Drum m
Drum Overall Diameter mm

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 2 of 2 Rev. Final
SCA Rabbit.xlsx
Date: June 2020

Tests and Experience Requirements

Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 2 Rev. Final
SCA Raccoon.xlsx
Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - SCA/ACSR Conductors

Employer's Contractor's
Description Unit
Requirements Guarantee
Conductor Type SCA Raccoon
Manufacturing International Standard IEC/ASTM
Country of Origin
Composition of Conductor:
Outer Layer
Material Aluminium
Source of Aluminium Rod
Stranding and Wire Diameter No. / mm 6/4.10
Layers no.
Cross Section mm2 75
Weight kg/km
Coefficient of Elongation
Core
Material Steel
Stranding and Wire Diameter No. / mm 1/4.10
Layers no.
Cross Section mm2
Weight kg/km
Coefficient of Elongation
Total
Overall diameter mm 12.3
Weight without grease kg/km 320
Weight with grease kg/km
Overall cross section mm2 92.4
Ultimate tensile strength kN 27.2
2
Modulus of Elasticity Ei (Initial) N/mm
Modulus of Elasticity Ep (Permanent) N/mm2
Coefficient of Elongation per oC
Permanent elongation factor due to creep m/m
DC resistance of conductors per km at 20oC Ohm/km
Conductor Ampacity (At 45oC) A 300
Conductor Lay (Right, Left)
Length of Lay
Name of Grease Used
Greasing System
Wiping System
o
Drop Point of Grease C
o
Maximum Temperature for 30min. Operation without Migration C
o
Maximum Temperature without Irreversible Property Changes C

Cable Reel/Drum
Drum/Reel Manufacturer
Length of Conductor Per Drum m
Drum Overall Diameter mm

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 2 of 2 Rev. Final
SCA Raccoon.xlsx
Date: June 2020

Tests and Experience Requirements

Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 2 Rev. Final
SCA Dog.xlsx Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - SCA/ACSR Conductors

Employer's Contractor's
Description Unit
Requirements Guarantee
Conductor Type SCA Dog
Manufacturing International Standard IEC/ASTM
Country of Origin
Composition of Conductor:
Outer Layer
Material Aluminium
Source of Aluminium Rod
Stranding and Wire Diameter No. / mm 6/4.72
Layers no.
Cross Section mm2 100
Weight kg/km
Coefficient of Elongation
Core
Material Steel
Stranding and Wire Diameter No. / mm 7/1.57
Layers no.
Cross Section mm2
Weight kg/km
Coefficient of Elongation
Total
Overall diameter mm 14.15
Weight without grease kg/km 394
Weight with grease kg/km
Overall cross section mm2 118.5
Ultimate tensile strength kN 32.7
2
Modulus of Elasticity Ei (Initial) N/mm
Modulus of Elasticity Ep (Permanent) N/mm2
Coefficient of Elongation per oC
Permanent elongation factor due to creep m/m
DC resistance of conductors per km at 20oC Ohm/km
Conductor Ampacity (At 45oC) A 360
Conductor Lay (Right, Left)
Length of Lay
Name of Grease Used
Greasing System
Wiping System
o
Drop Point of Grease C
o
Maximum Temperature for 30min. Operation without Migration C
o
Maximum Temperature without Irreversible Property Changes C

Cable Reel/Drum
Drum/Reel Manufacturer
Length of Conductor Per Drum m
Drum Overall Diameter mm

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 2 of 2 Rev. Final
SCA Dog.xlsx Date: June 2020

Tests and Experience Requirements

Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 2 Rev. Final
ACSR Wolf.xlsx Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - SCA/ACSR Conductors

Employer's Contractor's
Description Unit
Requirements Guarantee
Conductor Type ACSR Wolf
Manufacturing International Standard IEC/ASTM
Country of Origin
Composition of Conductor:
Outer Layer
Material Aluminium
Source of Aluminium Rod
Stranding and Wire Diameter No. / mm 30/2.59
Layers no.
Cross Section mm2 150
Weight kg/km
Coefficient of Elongation
Core
Material Steel
Stranding and Wire Diameter No. / mm 7/2.59
Layers no.
Cross Section mm2
Weight kg/km
Coefficient of Elongation
Total
Overall diameter mm 18.13
Weight without grease kg/km 726
Weight with grease kg/km
Overall cross section mm2 194.9
Ultimate tensile strength kN 69.2
2
Modulus of Elasticity Ei (Initial) N/mm
Modulus of Elasticity Ep (Permanent) N/mm2
Coefficient of Elongation per oC
Permanent elongation factor due to creep m/m
DC resistance of conductors per km at 20oC Ohm/km
Conductor Ampacity (At 45oC) A 470
Conductor Lay (Right, Left)
Length of Lay
Name of Grease Used
Greasing System
Wiping System
o
Drop Point of Grease C
o
Maximum Temperature for 30min. Operation without Migration C
o
Maximum Temperature without Irreversible Property Changes C

Cable Reel/Drum
Drum/Reel Manufacturer
Length of Conductor Per Drum m
Drum Overall Diameter mm

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 2 of 2 Rev. Final
ACSR Wolf.xlsx Date: June 2020

Tests and Experience Requirements

Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

6 WOODPOLES TECHNICAL SCHEDULES

6.1 FOR MV LINES
6.1.1 13.5m Long Wood Poles
6.1.2 12.6m Long Wood Poles
6.1.3 10.8m Long Wood Poles
6.2 FOR LV LINES
6.2.1 10m Long Wood Poles
6.2.2 9m Long Wood Poles

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)7_Technical Schedules.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 14 of 15

Norconsult AS
Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 1 Rev. Final
MV Wooden Poles 13.5m long.xlsx Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - MV 13.5m Wood Poles

Employer's Contractor's
Description Unit
Requirements Guarantee
Name of Manufacture
Country of Manufacturer
Timber Species
ISO Certification of Manufacturer
Standard BS / SANS
Minimum Age of Poles years
Minimum Ultimate Fibre Stress in Bending N/mm2 55
Taper mm/m 5
Length m 13.5
Minimum pole top diameter mm >200
Minimum Pole Diameter at Ground Level mm
Pole Planting Depth m 1.8
Rated Load (at 60cm from top, planting depth) kN
Minimum Ultimate Load (at 60cm from pole top, planting depth) kN Steel
Method of Seasoning Kiln Dried
Maximum Moisture Content Before Treatment % 25
Type and Method of Treatment
Kind of Preservative Creosote
Standard Used for Preservative
Minimum Depth of Penetration of Preservative mm
Minimum Depth of Sapwood mm
Pole Top Protective Sleeve Yes

Tests and Experience Requirements

Test Requirements
Stress-Strain Test and Report Required (Yes, No.)*
Factory Acceptance Tests to be witnessed by Employer’s
Yes
personnel (Yes, No)
Required no. of Employer’s personnel to witness test no. 2
NOTE:* Contractor shall place in the filled-in data “Submitted”
or “Will Submit” or “Will Perform” or “Had Been Performed”
as appropriate.
Additional Tests
If additional tests are required, these shall be as follows:

Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

The manufacturer should have been in the business of
years 10
manufacturing poles for distribution lines for not less than
The material offered should have been in the actual service
years 15
for not less than

Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 1 Rev. Final
MV Wooden Poles 12.6m long.xlsx Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - MV 12.6m Wood Poles

Employer's Contractor's
Description Unit
Requirements Guarantee
Name of Manufacture
Country of Manufacturer
Timber Species
ISO Certification of Manufacturer
Standard BS / SANS
Minimum Age of Poles years
Minimum Ultimate Fibre Stress in Bending N/mm2 55
Taper mm/m 5
Length m 12.6
Minimum pole top diameter mm 175 - 200
Minimum Pole Diameter at Ground Level mm
Pole Planting Depth m 1.8
Rated Load (at 60cm from top, planting depth) kN
Minimum Ultimate Load (at 60cm from pole top, planting depth) kN Steel
Method of Seasoning Kiln Dried
Maximum Moisture Content Before Treatment % 25
Type and Method of Treatment
Kind of Preservative Creosote
Standard Used for Preservative
Minimum Depth of Penetration of Preservative mm
Minimum Depth of Sapwood mm
Pole Top Protective Sleeve Yes

Tests and Experience Requirements

Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 1 Rev. Final
MV Wooden Poles 10.8m long.xlsx
Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - MV 10.8m Wood Poles

Employer's Contractor's
Description Unit
Requirements Guarantee
Name of Manufacture
Country of Manufacturer
Timber Species
ISO Certification of Manufacturer
Standard BS / SANS
Minimum Age of Poles years
Minimum Ultimate Fibre Stress in Bending N/mm2 55
Taper mm/m 5
Length m 10.8
Minimum pole top diameter mm 150-175
Minimum Pole Diameter at Ground Level mm
Pole Planting Depth m 1.8
Rated Load (at 60cm from top, planting depth) kN
Minimum Ultimate Load (at 60cm from pole top, planting depth) kN Steel
Method of Seasoning Kiln Dried
Maximum Moisture Content Before Treatment % 25
Type and Method of Treatment
Kind of Preservative Creosote
Standard Used for Preservative
Minimum Depth of Penetration of Preservative mm
Minimum Depth of Sapwood mm
Pole Top Protective Sleeve Yes

Tests and Experience Requirements

Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 1 Rev. Final
LV Wooden Poles 10m long.xlsx Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - LV 10.8m Wood Poles

Employer's Contractor's
Description Unit
Requirements Guarantee
Name of Manufacture
Country of Manufacturer
Timber Species
ISO Certification of Manufacturer
Standard BS / SANS
Minimum Age of Poles years
Minimum Ultimate Fibre Stress in Bending N/mm2 55
Taper mm/m 5
Length m 10
Minimum pole top diameter mm 125-150
Minimum Pole Diameter at Ground Level mm
Pole Planting Depth m 1.5
Rated Load (at 60cm from top, planting depth) kN
Minimum Ultimate Load (at 60cm from pole top, planting depth) kN Steel
Method of Seasoning Kiln Dried
Maximum Moisture Content Before Treatment % 25
Type and Method of Treatment
Kind of Preservative Creosote
Standard Used for Preservative
Minimum Depth of Penetration of Preservative mm
Minimum Depth of Sapwood mm
Pole Top Protective Sleeve Yes

Tests and Experience Requirements

Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 1 Rev. Final
LV Wooden Poles 9m long.xlsx Date: June 2020

Technical Data Schedule - LV 9m Wood Poles

Employer's Contractor's
Description Unit
Requirements Guarantee
Name of Manufacture
Country of Manufacturer
Timber Species
ISO Certification of Manufacturer
Standard BS / SANS
Minimum Age of Poles years
Minimum Ultimate Fibre Stress in Bending N/mm2 55
Taper mm/m 5
Length m 9
Minimum pole top diameter mm 125-150
Minimum Pole Diameter at Ground Level mm
Pole Planting Depth m 1.5
Rated Load (at 60cm from top, planting depth) kN
Minimum Ultimate Load (at 60cm from pole top, planting depth) kN Steel
Method of Seasoning Kiln Dried
Maximum Moisture Content Before Treatment % 25
Type and Method of Treatment
Kind of Preservative Creosote
Standard Used for Preservative
Minimum Depth of Penetration of Preservative mm
Minimum Depth of Sapwood mm
Pole Top Protective Sleeve Yes

Tests and Experience Requirements

Material and Manufacturer’s Experience

Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

7 CONSTRUCTION TECHNICAL SCHEDULES

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)7_Technical Schedules.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 15 of 15

Norconsult AS
Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 1 of 3 Rev. Final
Construction (Distribution).xlsx Date: June 2020

Construction Schedule - Distribution

Employer's Contractor's
Description Unit
Requirements Guarantee
33kV Lines
Line length (estimated total for 3 lines) km ~6
Right of Way
Width m 15
Bush Clearing (width) m 15
Clearing of Danger Trees Required Outside Servitude Yes
Construction of Access Track Within the Servitude no. Yes
Line Survey
Details to be shown from either side of centreline
1. Ground Details Within m 10
2. Permanent Buildings Within m 10
Preferred Pole Heights
13.5m long poles Yes
12.6m long poles Yes
Subject to
10.8m long poles
approval
Pole Planting Depth, all pole types (minimum) m 1.8
11kV Lines
Line length (estimated) km 23
Right of Way
Width m 10
Bush Clearing (width) m 10
Clearing of Danger Trees Required Outside Servitude Yes
Construction of Access Track Within the Servitude no. Yes
Line Survey
Details to be shown from either side of centreline
1. Ground Details Within m 7.5
2. Permanent Buildings Within m 7.5
Preferred Pole Heights
12.5m long poles Yes
10.8m long poles Yes
Subject to
9m long poles
approval
Pole Planting Depth (minimum), >10.5m long pole 1.8
Pole Planting Depth (minimum), ≤10.5m long pole 1.5
LV Lines
Line length (estimated) TBA
Right of Way
Width m <5
Bush Clearing (width) m 2
Clearing of Danger Trees Required Yes
Construction of Access Track Within the Servitude no. n/a
Preferred Pole Heights
9m long poles Yes
Subject to
10m long poles
approval
Pole Planting Depth (minimum), ≤10.5m long pole m 1.5

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 2 of 3 Rev. Final
Construction (Distribution).xlsx Date: June 2020

Employer's Contractor's
Description Unit
Requirements Guarantee
Substations
Pole Mounted Substations no. 23
Ground Mounted Substations no. 1
Safety Fence Yes
Soil Classification
Soil Type E
Description Sandy Gravel
Depth to Water Table m < 2.0
Density of Uplift kg/m3 1800
Cone Angle deg. 30
Ultimate Bearing Capacity (at depth 2.0m) kN/m2 400
Soil Type F
Description Silt
Depth to Water Table m 0
Density of Uplift kg/m3 1600
Cone Angle deg. 25
Ultimate Bearing Capacity (at depth 2.0m) kN/m2 200
Soil Type G1
Description Clayey Silt
Depth to Water Table m > 2.5
Density of Uplift kg/m3 1600
Cone Angle deg. 15
Ultimate Bearing Capacity (at depth 2.0m) kN/m2 50
Soil Type G2
Description Clayey Silt
Depth to Water Table m 0
Density of Uplift kg/m3 900
Cone Angle deg. 10
Ultimate Bearing Capacity (at depth 2.0m) kN/m2 20
Soil Type H
Description Rock
Depth to Water Table m -
Density of Uplift kg/m3 > 1800
Cone Angle deg. > 30
Ultimate Bearing Capacity (at depth 2.0m) kN/m2 > 900
Pole Earthing
Continuous or gapped (along the pole) Continuous
Submittals
The following documents are to be submitted by the Contractor
Proposed Time Bar Schedule (for Design, Drawings
Submission, Manufacture, Supply, Construction & Yes
Comissioning)
Reference Lists Yes
Certified Design Test Reports Yes
All Other Data Requested in the Specifications Yes
QA Program & ISO Certification (9001 or 9002) Yes

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Section VI(C)7 Technical Schedules Page 3 of 3 Rev. Final
Construction (Distribution).xlsx Date: June 2020

Employer's Contractor's
Description Unit
Requirements Guarantee
Environmental Considerations

In accorance with the design, the operating equipment for the

installation _______ (will/will not) affect the life expectaccy of
the components used in the equipment. If there be an effect,
the following components will be affected as follows:

Component: Effect:

Contractor's Exceptions and Clarifications (if Any)

Date: Contractor's Signature and Stamp ______

Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission
Project - AKTP

Tender Documents
ZETDC Tender No.______________________

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution

Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)5,
Underground Cables – 33-11kV
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)5
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)5,
Underground Cables – 33-11kV Revision:1

Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project

PART 2 – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS (VOLUMES 2A, 2B and 2C)

Section VI(A) - Employer’s Requirements, Substations (Volume 2A)
• A1: General Technical Specifications
• A2: Particular Technical Specifications (Schedules)
• A3: Drawings (Substations)
Section VI(B) - Employer’s Requirements, 132kV Transmission Line (Volume 2B)
• B1: General Technical Specifications
• B2: Particular Technical Specifications (Schedules)
• B3: 132kV Line Drawings
• B4: Line Route Images
Section VI(C) - Employer’s Requirements, Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C)
• C1: Detailed Scope of Works
• C2: Distribution General Specifications
• C3: Medium Voltage Overhead Lines – 33-11kV
• C4: Low Voltage Overhead Lines – 0.4kV
• C5: Underground Cables – 33-11kV
• C6: Substations 33/11-0.4kV
• C7: Technical Schedules
• C8. Distribution Drawings
PART 3 – CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS
(VOLUME 3)
Section VII: General Conditions of Contract (GC)
Section VIII: Particular Conditions of Contract with Appendices
Section IX: Contract Forms

PART 4 – SPECIFICATIONS FOR WORKSITE ENVIRONMENTAL,

SOCIAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT (ESHS) (VOLUME 4)

2020-08-09 Assignment no.: 6035357 7, GIFP, Gaborone, Botswana

1 09 August 2020 Part 2: Employer’s Requirements, Distribution Lines & TRK OLO OLO
Substations (Volume 2C) - Section VI(C)5,
Underground Cables – 33-1kV
Revision Date: Description Compiled Checked Accepted

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 2 of 54

Norconsult AS
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)5
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)5,
Underground Cables – 33-11kV Revision:1

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations

(Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)5 – Underground Cables – 33-1kV
Contents
C1: Detailed Scope of Works
Index Contents
1.0 D-S-01-001 Scope of Works
C2: Distribution General Specifications
Index Contents
1.0 D-GS-01-001 General
2.0 D-GS-02-001 Mechanical Design of Overhead Lines
3.0 D-GS-03-001 Poles and Crossarms
4.0 D-GS-04-001 Foundations
5.0 D-GS-05-001 Grounding
6.0 D-SS-06-001 Environmental Requirements
C3: Medium Voltage Overhead Lines 33-11kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-MV-01-001 General
2.0 D-MV-02-001 Insulators and Stays
3.0 D-MV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-MV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-MV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-MV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C4: Low Voltage Overhead Lines 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-LV-01-001 General
2.0 D-LV-02-001 Clamps and Stays
3.0 D-LV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-LV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-LV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-LV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C5: Underground Cables 33-11kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-UC-01-001 General
2.0 D-UC-02-001 33kV and 11kV Underground Cables
3.0 D-UC-03-001 LV Underground Cables
4.0 D-UC-04-001 Joints and Terminations
5.0 D-UC-05-001 Cable Lugs
6.0 D-UC-06-001 Warning Tape
7.0 D-UC-07-001 Protection Sheets and Pipes
8.0 D-UC-08-001 Cable Pillars
9.0 D-UC-09-001 Construction Specifications
C6: Substations 33/11 – 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-SS-01-001 General
2.0 D-SS-02-001 Power Transformers
3.0 D-SS-03-001 Pole Mounted Transformers
4.0 D-SS-04-001 Prefabricated Compact Type Substations

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 3 of 54

C7: Technical Schedules

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 4 of 54

Table of Contents

C5 – UNDERGROUND CABLES – 33-11kV 10

1 D-UC-01-001 GENERAL 11
1.1 General Requirements 11
1.2 Grounding 11
1.3 Environmental and Protection Requirements (EPRS) 11

2 D-UC-02-001 33kV AND 11kV UNDERGROUND CABLES 12

2.1 Reference Standards 12
2.2 Design and Materials 13
2.2.1 Conductors ......................................................................................................................................... 13
2.2.2 Conductor Insulation and Semiconducting Screen ............................................................................. 13
2.2.3 Screen ................................................................................................................................................ 13
2.2.4 Sheath ................................................................................................................................................ 13
2.3 Types and Dimensions 13
2.4 Marking 14
2.4.1 Designation of Origin .......................................................................................................................... 14
2.4.2 Marking of Cores ................................................................................................................................ 14
2.4.3 Designation......................................................................................................................................... 14
2.4.4 Marking of Sheath .............................................................................................................................. 14
2.5 Splicing 14
2.6 Current Carrying Capacity 14
2.7 Testing 14
2.7.1 General Test Conditions ..................................................................................................................... 14
2.7.1.1 Ambient Temperature 14
2.7.1.2 AC Test Voltages 14
2.7.1.3 Impulse Test Voltages 15
2.7.2 Routine Tests ..................................................................................................................................... 15
2.7.2.1 General 15
2.7.2.2 Partial Discharge Test 15
2.7.2.3 Voltage Test on Insulation 15
2.7.2.4 Voltage Test on Non-Metallic 15
2.7.3 Special Tests ...................................................................................................................................... 15
2.7.3.1 General 15
2.7.3.2 Conductor Examination 15
2.7.3.3 Electrical Resistance of Conductor and Shield 15
2.7.3.4 Thickness of Insulation 16
2.7.3.5 Thickness of Non-Metallic Sheath 16
2.7.3.6 Hot Set Test on Insulation 16
2.7.3.7 Hot Set Test on XLPE-Sheath 17
2.7.3.8 Capacitance 18
2.7.3.9 Adhesion of the Insulation Screen to the Insulation 18
2.7.4 Type Tests .......................................................................................................................................... 18
2.7.4.1 General 18
2.7.4.2 Check on Insulation Thickness Before the Electrical Type Tests 19
2.7.4.3 Electrical Tests on Complete Cable 19
2.7.4.4 Bending Test 19

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 5 of 54

2.7.4.5 Partial Discharge Test 20

2.7.4.6 Measurement of Loss Factor 20
2.7.4.7 Heating Cycle Voltage Test 20
2.7.4.8 Impulse Voltage Test followed by AC Voltage Test 20
2.7.4.9 Inspection on Completion of the Tests 21
2.7.4.10 Tests for Determining the Mechanical Properties of Insulation and Sheath 21
2.7.4.10.1 Cable Construction 21
2.7.4.10.2 Resistivity of Semiconducting Screens 21
2.7.4.10.3 Mechanical Properties of Insulation before and after Ageing 22
2.7.4.10.4 Mechanical Properties of Non-metallic Sheath before and after Ageing 22
2.7.4.10.5 Ageing Test on Pieces of Complete Cable 22
2.7.4.10.6 Loss of Mass Test on PVC Sheath 22
2.7.4.10.7 Pressure Test at High Temperature on Sheath 22
2.7.4.10.8 Heat Shock Test for PVC Sheath 22
2.7.4.10.9 Hot Set Test for Insulation 23
2.7.4.10.10 Hot Set Test for XLPE Sheath 23
2.7.4.10.11 Carbon Black Content of PE and XLPE Sheaths 23
2.7.4.10.12 Shrinkage Test on Insulation 23
2.8 Technical Information 23

3 D-UC-03-001 LV UNDERGROUND CABLE 24

3.1 Reference Standards 24
3.2 Design and Materials 24
3.2.1 Conductors ......................................................................................................................................... 24
3.2.2 Conductor Insulation ........................................................................................................................... 25
3.2.3 Lay-Up ................................................................................................................................................ 25
3.2.4 Tape or Filling ..................................................................................................................................... 25
3.2.5 Sheath ................................................................................................................................................ 25
3.3 Types and Dimensions 26
3.4 Marking 26
3.4.1 Designation of Origin .......................................................................................................................... 26
3.4.2 Marking of Cores ................................................................................................................................ 26
3.4.3 Designation......................................................................................................................................... 27
3.4.4 Marking of Sheath .............................................................................................................................. 27
3.5 Splicing 27
3.6 Current carrying Capacity 27
3.7 Testing 27
3.7.1 General Test Conditions ..................................................................................................................... 27
3.7.1.1 Ambient Temperature 27
3.7.1.2 AC Test Voltages 27
3.7.2 Routine Tests ..................................................................................................................................... 27
3.7.2.1 Voltage Test on Insulation 27
3.7.3 Special Tests ...................................................................................................................................... 28
3.7.3.1 Measurement of Electrical Resistance of Conductors 28
3.7.3.2 Measurement of Insulation Thickness 28
3.7.3.3 Measurement of Plastic Sheath Thickness 28
3.7.4 Type Tests .......................................................................................................................................... 28
3.7.4.1 Electric Properties 28
3.7.4.1.1 Measurement of Insulation Resistance at a Temperature of 70°C 29
3.7.4.1.2 AC Voltage Test, 4 h, on Insulation 29
3.7.4.2 Type Test of the Mechanical Properties of the Insulation and the Sheath 29

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 6 of 54

3.7.4.2.1 Measurement of Insulation Thickness 29

3.7.4.2.2 Measurement of the Plastic Sheath Thickness 29
3.7.4.2.3 Measurement of Mechanical Properties of the Insulation 29
3.7.4.2.4 Measurements of Mechanical Properties of the Sheath 30
3.7.4.2.5 Ageing Test on Completed Cable 30
3.7.4.2.6 Measurement of Weight Loss of Insulation and Sheath 30
3.7.4.2.7 Pressure Test on Insulation and Sheath at High Temperature 30
3.7.4.2.8 Test of Resistance to Cracking of Insulation and Sheath at High Temperature 30
3.8 Technical Information 30

4 D-UC-04-001 JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS 32

4.1 Reference Standards 32
4.2 General Requirements 32
4.2.1 Designation of Origin .......................................................................................................................... 32
4.2.2 Marking on the Package ..................................................................................................................... 32
4.2.3 Instructions ......................................................................................................................................... 32
4.2.4 Choice of Material ............................................................................................................................... 32
4.2.5 Dimensioning of Components............................................................................................................. 33
4.2.5.1 Mechanical Strength 33
4.2.5.2 Terminals 33
4.3 Testing of 33kV Joints and Terminations 33
4.3.1 Choice of Rated Voltage and Test Voltage ......................................................................................... 33
4.3.2 General Test Conditions ..................................................................................................................... 33
4.3.2.1 AC and DC Voltage Tests 33
4.3.2.2 Impulse Voltage Test 33
4.3.2.3 Ambient Temperature 33
4.3.2.4 Arrangement of the Test Specimen 34
4.3.3 Classification of Tests ......................................................................................................................... 34
4.3.3.1 Type Tests 34
4.3.3.2 Sampling Injection 34
4.3.3.3 Routine Tests 34
4.3.3.4 Testing of the Completed System 34
4.3.4 Testing of a Completed Termination ................................................................................................... 34
4.3.4.1 Voltage Tests 34
4.3.4.1.1 Arrangement of the Test Specimen 34
4.3.4.1.2 Voltage Application 35
4.3.4.1.3 AC Voltage Tests 35
4.3.4.1.4 Impulse Withstand Voltage Test 35
4.3.4.1.5 Current Load Tests and Measurement of Partial Discharges 35
4.3.4.1.6 Arrangement of the Test Specimen 35
4.3.4.1.7 Test Procedure 35
4.3.4.1.8 Testing with Impulse and Short-time Current 35
4.3.4.1.9 Test Procedure 36
4.3.5 Testing of a Complete Cable Joint...................................................................................................... 37
4.3.5.1 Voltage Tests 37
4.3.5.1.1 Arrangement of the Test Specimen 37
4.3.5.1.2 Test Procedure 37
4.3.5.1.3 Current Load Tests and Measurement of Partial Discharges 37
4.3.5.1.4 Test Procedure 37
4.4 Testing of 1kV Joints 37
4.4.1 Ambient Temperature ......................................................................................................................... 37

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 7 of 54

4.4.2 AC Voltage Tests................................................................................................................................ 37

4.4.3 Arrangement of the Test Specimen .................................................................................................... 37
4.4.4 Routine Tests ..................................................................................................................................... 37
4.4.5 Type Tests .......................................................................................................................................... 37
4.4.6 Test Methods and Requirements........................................................................................................ 38
4.4.6.1 Temperature Measurement During Load 39
4.4.6.2 AC Voltage Test 39
4.4.6.3 Cyclic Loading in Air 39
4.4.6.4 Testing with Short-time Current 40
4.4.6.5 Cyclic Loading in Water 40
4.4.6.6 Measurement of Insulation in Water 40
4.4.6.7 Voltage Test in Water 40

5 D-UC-05-001 CABLE LUGS 41

5.1 Reference Standards 41
5.2 Types 41

6 D-UC-06-001 WARNING TAPE 42

6.1 General 42
6.2 Packing 42
6.3 Technical Information 42

7 D-UC-07-001 PROTECTION SHEETS AND PIPES 43

7.1 pROTECTION sHEETS 43
7.1.1 Testing ................................................................................................................................................ 43
7.1.2 Packing ............................................................................................................................................... 43
7.1.3 Technical Information ......................................................................................................................... 44
7.2 Plastic Pipes 44
7.2.1 Technical Information ......................................................................................................................... 44

8 D-UC-08-001 CABLE PILLARS 45

8.1 Reference Standards 45
8.2 General Design 45
8.3 Enclosure and Degree of Protection 46
8.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 46
8.3.2 Degree of Protection ........................................................................................................................... 46
8.3.3 Mechanical Strength ........................................................................................................................... 46
8.4 Foundation 47
8.5 Electrical Equipment 47
8.6 Testing 47
8.6.1 Type Test............................................................................................................................................ 47
8.6.1.1 Verification of the Short-circuit Strength 47
8.6.1.1.1 Testing of the Main Circuits 47
8.6.1.2 Verification of Degree of Protection 48
8.6.1.3 Verification of Mechanical Strength 48
8.6.1.3.1 Verification of Strength against Compressive Force 48
8.6.1.3.2 Verification of Impact Resistance 48
8.6.1.3.3 Verification of Resistance Against Penetration by Pointed Objects 48
8.7 Technical Information 49
8.8 Knife Blade Fuse Switches 49
8.8.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 49
8.8.2 General ............................................................................................................................................... 49

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 8 of 54

8.9 Terminal Clamps 49

8.9.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 49
8.9.2 General ............................................................................................................................................... 50
8.10 Cable Attachments 50
8.10.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 50

9 D-UC-09-001 CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 51

9.1 Cable laying 51
9.2 Excavation and Backfill 53
9.3 Cable Pulling 53

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 9 of 54

C5 – UNDERGROUND CABLES – 33-11kV

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 10 of 54

1 D-UC-01-001 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 1, General.

1.2 GROUNDING
See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 5, Grounding.

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS (EPRS)

See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 6, Environmental Protection Requirements (EPRS).

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 11 of 54

2 D-UC-02-001 33kV AND 11kV UNDERGROUND

CABLES
2.1 Reference Standards
The following publications shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60060-1 High-voltage test techniques. Part 1: General definitions and test requirements.
60060-2 High voltage test techniques - Part 2: Measuring systems.

60183 Guide to the selection of high voltage cables

60228 Conductors of insulated cables.

60230 Impulse tests on cables and their accessories

60287-1-1 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - Part 1-1: Current rating
equations (100 % load factor) and calculation of losses - General.
60287-1-2 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - Part 1: Current rating
equations (100 % load factor) and calculations of losses - Section 2: Sheath
eddy current loss factors for two circuits in flat formation.
60287-1-3 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - Part 1-3: Current rating
equations (100 % load factor) and calculation of losses - Current sharing
between parallel single-core cables and calculation of circulating current
losses.
60287-2-1 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - Part 2-1: Thermal resistance
- Calculation of thermal resistance.

60287-2-2 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - Part 2: Thermal resistance -
Section 2: A method for calculating reduction factors for groups of cables in
free air, protected from solar radiation.
60331-11 Tests for electric cables under fire conditions - Circuit integrity - Part 11:
Apparatus - Fire alone at a flame temperature of at least 750 °C

60331-12 Tests for electric cables under fire conditions - Circuit integrity - Part 12:
Apparatus - Fire with shock at a temperature of at least 830 °C..

60502 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages
from 1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV).

60811-1-2 Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of electric cables

60840 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages
from 1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV). Test methods and
requirements
60853 Calculation of the cyclic and emergency current rating of cables.

61443 Short-circuit temperature limits of electrical cables with rated voltages above
30 kV (Um =36 kV)

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 12 of 54

2.2 DESIGN AND MATERIALS

2.2.1 Conductors
The conductors shall be of aluminium with a resistance and design of class 2 according to IEC 60228.

2.2.2 Conductor Insulation and Semiconducting Screen

Conductor insulation shall be of XLPE (cross-linked polyethylene) with a nominal thickness of 8 mm
for 21/36 kV cables and 3.4 mm for 7/12 kV ones.
The insulation and the semiconducting screens should be extruded in one operation.
The inner semiconducting screen shall be closely bonded to the insulation but should be able to
remove from the conductor without problems.

The resistance of the outer semiconducting screen shall not exceed 5 MΩ per meter cable core.

2.2.3 Screen
The screen is laid outside the core and in such a way that it is in electrical contact with the
semiconducting screens of the core.
The screen should consist of one layer annealed, round copper wires with a nominal cross-sectional
area according to Table 1.
The screen wires should be mainly evenly distributed around the circumference of the cable and the
number of wires should be chosen so that the medium distance between the wires does not exceed
4 mm.
The screen wires could be laid in one of the following ways:
a) Wires laid spirally around the cable.
b) The same as in a), but with the wires embedded in conducting material.
c) Wires laid in waveform on the cable. The wires should be embedded in conductive material in
order to remain in its places.
d) Wave formed bent wires laid in parallel with the longitudinal axis of the cable. The wires should
be embedded in conductive material in order to remain in its places.

2.2.4 Sheath
The outer sheath shall be made of black PVC or PE.

2.3 TYPES AND DIMENSIONS

The following cables may be used:
Table 1. Design and dimensions of 21/36 kV and 7/12 kV cables.

Number of cores Cross section of Max. d.c. Calculated Max. short-circuit

and rated cross screen resistance at Current carrying current on the
sectional area 20°C capacity 1) conductor 1 s
mm2 mm2 Ohm/km (A) (kA)
3 x 70 16 0.443 165 6.6
1 x 95 25 0.320 215 9.0
1 x 150 35 0.206 275 14.2
1 x 240 35 0.125 360 22.7
1 x 300 35 0.100 400 28.3

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 13 of 54

1) Conditions for Continuous Ratings

 trefoil formation with closed screen
 maximum conductor temperature +90°C
 ground temperature +35°C
 installation depth 0.9 m
 thermal resistivity 1.2

2.4 MARKING
2.4.1 Designation of Origin
The cable shall in its entire length carry a designation of origin, e.g. a thread, a tape or a durable
marking on the outer side of the sheath. The spacing between adjacent markings shall not exceed
1m.

2.4.2 Marking of Cores

Marking of cores is not required.

2.4.3 Designation
Cable shall be designated according to CENELEC HD 361 S2.
Example:
Type, number of conductors x cross sectional area
 N12XC7V-AR1x150

2.4.4 Marking of Sheath

The sheath shall be marked with:
 Type
 Rated voltage
 Name of manufacturer.
 Year of manufacture, the two last digits.
 Number of cores and nominal area.

2.5 SPLICING
Splicing during manufacture shall, unless otherwise agreed, be done in such a way as to fulfil all
requirements stated in this specification.
Conductors may be spliced by welding or other equivalent method.

2.6 CURRENT CARRYING CAPACITY

Cable shall have current carrying capacity according to IEC 60287.

2.7 TESTING
2.7.1 General Test Conditions
2.7.1.1 Ambient Temperature
The ambient temperature shall be 20 ± 15 °C unless otherwise specified in the details for the
particular test.

2.7.1.2 AC Test Voltages

The values quoted are r.m.s values. The waveform of the AC test voltages shall be substantially
sinusoidal and the frequency shall be in the range 49 Hz to 61 Hz.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 14 of 54

2.7.1.3 Impulse Test Voltages

The impulse wave shall have a virtual front time between 1 µs and 5 µs and a nominal time to half
the peak value between 40 µs and 60 µs. In all other respects the impulse test shall be carried out
according to IEC 60230.

2.7.2 Routine Tests

2.7.2.1 General
The tests according to clauses 2.7.2.2 - 2.7.2.4 shall be carried out on all delivery lengths.
If the cable is manufactured in longer lengths than the delivery lengths, routine tests are allowed on
the production lengths before being divided into delivery lengths, on the condition that the cable after
the tests has not been subject to stress, which may have influenced the quality.

2.7.2.2 Partial Discharge Test

The test shall be carried out according to IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC 60811-1-2
The sensitivity of the test equipment, as defined in IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC 60811-1-2, shall be such
that the minimum detectable discharge pulse is 10 % or less.
The magnitude of discharge shall not exceed 10 %.

2.7.2.3 Voltage Test on Insulation

The test is carried out at ambient temperature. No breakdown of the insulation shall occur.

2.7.2.4 Voltage Test on Non-Metallic

Control of the sheath having no faults shall be carried out by a voltage test ("spark test" or other
method) according to IEC Publication 60811.
The cable shall pass this test without breakdown of the sheath. Occasional points of breakdown can
however be accepted on the condition that they are repaired by a professional method, so that all
requirements for the cable are fulfilled after the repair.

2.7.3 Special Tests

2.7.3.1 General
The tests according to clause 2.7.3.2 - 2.7.3.9 shall be carried out on at least one delivery length in
each manufactured batch of cable but limited to not more than 10 % of the total number of delivery
lengths.
If the tested cable should fail in one or more of the tests specified, these tests are repeated on two
new samples taken from the same manufactured batch of cable. If both samples meet the
requirements in the repeated tests, the cable shall be considered approved.

2.7.3.2 Conductor Examination

Compliance with the requirements for conductor construction of IEC 60228 shall be checked by
inspection and measurement when applicable.

2.7.3.3 Electrical Resistance of Conductor and Shield

The measurement is carried out on the conductor or conductors and on the shield of the cable. When
the resistance of the shield is measured, all its components are connected in both ends of the sample.
The length of the sample shall be at least 1m.
Before the measurement the sample or the cable length, from which the sample is taken, shall have
been kept in the test room for at least 12h. The temperature in the test room shall be kept mainly
constant. If the sample should not have, with certainty, assumed the ambient temperature, the

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 15 of 54

measurement shall not be performed before the sample has been kept in the test room for at least
24h. The ambient temperature shall be measured in the immediate vicinity of the sample.
The resistance is determined with direct current. The measured resistance value of the conductor,
recalculated to 20°C using the factors given in IEC 60228 shall not exceed the resistance values
indicated in IEC 60228. The resistance of the shield shall not exceed the value stated in the relevant
cable standard or agreed upon between purchaser and manufacturer.

2.7.3.4 Thickness of Insulation

The insulation thickness is measured according to IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC 60811-1-2, on two
samples taken from different ends of each core of the cable, which is to be measured.
The average value of the measured thickness rounded to 0.1mm shall not be less than the specified
nominal value. The thickness, measured at single points may be less than this value, provided that
it is not more than 0.1 mm below 90% of the nominal value.

2.7.3.5 Thickness of Non-Metallic Sheath

The thickness of the sheath is measured according to IEC60811, on two samples taken from different
ends of the cable, which is to be measured, and after damaged parts of the cable ends have been
removed.
When the sheath is applied on an irregular surface, such as a shield of copper-wires, the average
value is not measured.
The thickness shall not in any point fall below 80% of the specified nominal thickness by more than
0.2mm.

2.7.3.6 Hot Set Test on Insulation

The test is carried out according to IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC 60811-1-2. The test pieces shall be taken
from the part of the insulation (inner, middle or outer) where, with regard to the cross-linking process
used, the lowest degree of cross-linking can be expected. All other test conditions and the
requirements are given in Table 2.
Table 2. Test conditions and requirements for non-electrical tests for XLPE-insulation

Clause in this XLPE-

Tests Unit
specification insulation
2.7.3.6 and Hot set test
2.7.4.10.9
Test conditions:
- temperature (± 3°C) °C 200
- time under load min 15
- mechanical stress N/mm2 0.2

Requirements:
- elongation under
load, max. % 175
- elongation after
unloading, max. % 15
2.7.4.10.3 Ageing test on insulation

Requirements before ageing:

- tensile strength, min. N/mm2 12.5
- elongation, min. % 200

Ageing conditions:
- temperature (± 3°C) °C 135
- duration h 7 x 24

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 16 of 54

Clause in this XLPE-

Tests Unit
specification insulation

Requirements after ageing:

- variation in tensile strength, max. % ± 25
- variation in elongation, max. % ± 25
2.7.4.10.12 Shrinkage test

Test conditions:
- length of test piece m 0.3
- temperature (± 3°C) °C 130
- duration h 6

Requirements:
- max. permissible shrinkage % 4

2.7.3.7 Hot Set Test on XLPE-Sheath

The test is carried out according to IEC 60811-1-1, IEC 60811-1-2-1-1, IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC
60811-1-2-1-2.
All other test conditions and the requirements are given in Table 3 below:
Table 3. Test conditions and requirements for non-electrical tests for sheathing material

Clause in this Material according to IEC 60840

Tests Unit
specification ST 1 ST 2 ST 3 ST 4 XLPE
2.7.3.7 and Hot set test on XLPE
2.7.4.10.10 sheath
Test conditions: °C
- temperature (± 3°C) min 200
- time under load N/mm2 15
- mechanical stress 0.2

Requirements:
- elongation under %
load, max. 175
- elongation after %
unloading, max. 15
2.7.4.10.4 Ageing test on sheath

Requirements before
ageing:
- tensile strength, min. N/mm2 12.5 12.5 10.0 12.5 12.5
- elongation, min. % 150 150 300 300 200

Ageing conditions:
- temperature (± 2°C) °C 100 100 100 110 135
- duration h 7x24 7x24 10x24 14x24 7x24

Requirements after
ageing:
- tensile strength, min. N/mm2 12.5 12.5 - - -
- variation in tensile
strength, max. % ± 25 ± 25 - - ± 25
- elongation, min. % 150 150 300 300 -
- variation in
elongation, max. % ± 25 ± 25 - - ± 25

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 17 of 54

Clause in this Material according to IEC 60840

Tests Unit
specification ST 1 ST 2 ST 3 ST 4 XLPE
2.7.4.10.6 Loss of mass for
PVC sheath

Ageing conditions:
- temperature (± 2°C) °C 100
- duration h 7x24
Requirements after
ageing:
- loss of mass, max. mg/cm2 1.5
2.7.4.10.7 Pressure test at
high temperature

Test conditions:
- temperature (± 2°C) °C 80 90 90 115 90
- duration h 6 6 6 6 6
2.7.4.10.8 Heat shock test

Test conditions:
- temperature for
elongation test (± 2°C) °C 150 150
- duration h 1 1
2.7.4.10.11 Carbon black content
in PE or XLPE sheath

Requirements:
- nominal value % 2.5 2.5 2.5
- tolerance % ± 0.5 ± 0.5 ± 0.5

2.7.3.8 Capacitance
The capacitance shall be measured between conductor and shield.
The measured value shall not exceed the nominal value declared by the manufacturer by more than
8%.

2.7.3.9 Adhesion of the Insulation Screen to the Insulation

The test is performed only on cables with conductor screen extruded in such a way that it can be
removed without special tools (strippable conductor screen).
The test is performed on a core with a length of 0.5 m and with conductor screen. The screen is cut
through with two parallel slits in the longitudinal direction of the core. The distance between the slits
shall be 10 mm. It shall be possible to remove this strip in the screen from the insulation by pulling it
with a force not less than 8 N and not more than 40 N in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal
direction of the core. The insulation shall not be damaged and no traces of the screen shall be left
on the insulation.

2.7.4 Type Tests

2.7.4.1 General
Type test according to clause 2.7.4 shall be carried out on each cable type to be tested to this
specification. The type test can be carried out on one conductor cross-section or at least two different
conductor cross-sections, whereby the type approval shall be accepted as valid also for other
conductor cross-sections, rated voltages, etc. as specified below.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 18 of 54

a) If the type test is made only on one conductor cross-section, the test is valid also for cables with
different materials in the outer non-metallic sheath if the cables have the same rated voltage,
conductor cross-section and construction. A condition is, however, that the sheath cannot be
expected to influence the result of the type test and that the material in the sheath is already type
tested according to d) below.
b) If the type test is made on two different conductor cross-sections, the test is valid also for
conductor cross-sections in-between, on the condition that the calculated electrical field stress in
the cables with the intermediate conductor cross-sections is not greater than in the cable with the
smallest conductor-cross section and that the insulation thickness in any cable is not less than in
the cable with the biggest conductor cross-section.
c) A type test on a cable with a given rated voltage and conductor-cross section/sections is also
valid for cables with lower rated voltage and with the same conductor cross-section/sections and
construction on the condition that the same manufacturing process has been used and that the
calculated electrical field stress is not greater than in the cable subjected to the type test.
d) A type test on insulation and non-metallic sheathing materials according to clause 2.7.4.4 must
not be repeated on cables with different conductor cross-sections or rated voltages if the same
materials and manufacturing processes have been used. The ageing test on complete cable
according to clause 2.7.4.10.5 shall, however, be repeated if combinations of materials, which are
in contact with each other, differs from the combination already tested.
The electrical tests according to clause 2.7.4.10 shall be carried out on the same sample of cable
and in the sequence specified in the specification. The loss angle measurement according to clause
2.7.4.6 may, however, be carried out on a different sample.
The tests on insulation and sheathing materials according to clause 2.7.4.10 may be carried out in
an optimal sequence. Test conditions, test methods and requirements are given in the appropriate
clauses and in Table 2 for the XLPE-insulation and in Table 3 for different sheathing materials.
A test report with all test results and signed by either:
 a representative of a competent witnessing body, or
 a technically responsible representative of the manufacturer
shall be accepted as an evidence of a type test.

2.7.4.2 Check on Insulation Thickness Before the Electrical Type Tests

Before the tests according to clause 2.7.4.3, the average value of the insulation thickness shall be
measured in both ends of the sample with the method specified in IEC 60811-1-1, IEC 60811-1-2-1-
1, IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC 60811-1-2-1-2.

2.7.4.3 Electrical Tests on Complete Cable

The tests according to this clause shall be carried out on the same sample with a length of at least
10 m, terminations not included. The tests shall be carried out in the sequence specified in the
specification and be finished with the inspection according to clause 2.7.4.9.
The measurement of the loss factor according to clause 2.7.4.6 may, however, be carried out on
separate sample from the same cable.

2.7.4.4 Bending Test

The sample shall be bent around a cylinder, for example the hub of a drum, at room temperature for
at least one complete turn. The sample shall then be unwound, be turned 180 degrees around its
longitudinal axis and then be bent again for at least one complete turn on the same cylinder.
This process shall be repeated three times in total so that all together six bendings, three in each
direction, are carried out.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 19 of 54

The diameter of the test cylinder shall not be greater than

15 (d + D) + 5 % for single-core cables without metallic sheath
D = outer diameter of the sample in mm
d = conductor diameter in mm.
For conductors with non-circular cross section, d is calculated by the following formula:
d = 1.13 S mm
S = nominal cross section of the conductor, mm2
On completion of this test a partial discharge test shall be carried out according to clause 2.7.4.5.

2.7.4.5 Partial Discharge Test

This test shall be carried out according to clause 2.7.2.2 but with the following deviations:
a) The sensitivity of the equipment shall be 5 %.
b) The magnitude of discharge may not exceed 5 %.

2.7.4.6 Measurement of Loss Factor

The sample shall be heated by a suitable method and the temperature of the conductor determined
either by measuring its resistance or by thermocouples on the surface of the insulation screen or in
a cable of the same design, which is heated in the same way.
The sample shall be heated until the conductor reaches a temperature not below 100 °C and not
over 105 °C.
Tan δ shall be measured at the temperature given above.
The measured value shall not exceed 10-3.

2.7.4.7 Heating Cycle Voltage Test

The sample shall be in a U-bend having the diameter specified in clause 2.7.4.4.
The sample shall be heated by a suitable method until the conductor reaches a temperature not
below 100°C and not over 105°C. The heating shall be applied for at least 8 h and shall be followed
by at least 16 h of natural cooling.
The conductor temperature shall be maintained within the limits 100 - 105°C during the last 2 h of
the heating period.
During the whole cycle of heating and cooling a test voltage, shall be applied to the sample. The
complete cycle shall be carried out 20 times totally.
Note: Interruptions between the cycles are allowed.
On completion of the last cycle the sample shall be subject to a partial discharge test at room
temperature according to clause 2.7.4.5.

2.7.4.8 Impulse Voltage Test followed by AC Voltage Test

The sample shall be heated by a suitable method so that the conductor is kept at a temperature not
below 95°C and not over 100°C during the test.
The impulse voltage test is carried out as specified in IEC Publication 60230.
The sample shall withstand 10 positive and 10 negative voltage impulses, without failure.
On completion of the impulse voltage test the sample shall be subject to an AC voltage test during
15 min at ambient temperature without breakdown of the insulation.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 20 of 54

2.7.4.9 Inspection on Completion of the Tests

On completion of the tests according to clauses 2.7.4.4- 2.7.4.8, the sheath and any armouring or
tapes are removed from the sample to allow the shield and the insulation screen to be inspected.
During the test no wires in the shield shall have broken and no damages shall have occurred on the
insulation screen.

2.7.4.10 Tests for Determining the Mechanical Properties of Insulation and Sheath
The tests according to the following clauses may be carried out in an optional sequence. Test
methods, test conditions and requirements are given in the appropriate clauses and in Table 2 for
XLPE-insulation and in Table 3 for sheathing materials. The extent of the tests for different sheathing
materials is evident from Table 3.

2.7.4.10.1 Cable Construction

Conductor examination and measurement of the thickness of insulation and sheath shall be carried
out according to clauses 2.7.3.2, 2.7.3.4 and 2.7.3.5. The requirements specified in these clauses
shall be fulfilled.

2.7.4.10.2 Resistivity of Semiconducting Screens

The resistivity of extruded semiconducting screens, applied on the conductor and over the insulation,
shall be determined by measurements on test pieces taken from a sample of cable before ageing
and from a sample of cable, which has been aged according to clause 2.7.4.10.5.
The test pieces shall be prepared from 150 mm long samples of completed cable.
The conductor screen test piece shall be prepared by cutting a sample of core in half longitudinally
and removing the conductor and separator if any.
The procedure for determining the volume resistivity of the screens shall be as follows:
Four silver painted electrodes A, B, C and D shall be applied to the semiconducting surfaces. The
two potential electrodes, B and C, shall be 50 mm apart and the two current electrodes, A and D,
shall be each placed at least 25 mm beyond the potential electrodes.
Connections shall be made to the electrodes by means of suitable clips. In making connections to
the conductor screen electrodes it shall be ensured that the clips are insulated from the insulation
screen on the outer surface of the test sample.
The assembly shall be placed in an oven pre-heated to the specified temperature and, after an
interval of 30 minutes, the resistance between the electrodes shall be measured by means of a
circuit, the power of which shall not exceed 100 mW.
After the electrical measurements, the diameter over the conductor screen and insulation and the
thickness of the conductor screen and insulation screen shall be measured at ambient temperature,
each being the average of six measurements.
The volume resistivity ρ in ohm-metres shall then be calculated as follows:
Conductor screen

R × π × (D − T ) × T
ρ=
2L
where:
R = Measured resistance in ohms
L = Distance between potential electrodes in metres
D = Diameter over the conductor screen in metres

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 21 of 54

T = Average thickness of screen in metres

The factor 2 in the denominator depends on the measurement being made on half a cylinder.
Insulation screen

R × π × (D − T ) × T
ρ=
L
where:
R = Measured resistance in ohms
L = Distance between potential electrodes in metres
D = Diameter over the insulation in metres
T = Average thickness of screen in metres
The measurements shall be carried out at a sample temperature of 90 ± 2 °C.
The resistivity both before and after ageing shall not exceed
1000 Ωm for the conductor screen

500 Ωm for the insulation screen

2.7.4.10.3 Mechanical Properties of Insulation before and after Ageing

The test is carried out according to IEC 60811-1-1, IEC 60811-1-2-1-1, IEC 60811-1-1, and IEC
60811-1-2-1-2. Ageing of the test pieces is carried out according to IEC 60811-1-1, IEC 60811-1-2-
1-1, IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC 60811-1-2-1-2. All other test conditions and requirements before and
after ageing are given in Table 2 above.

2.7.4.10.4 Mechanical Properties of Non-metallic Sheath before and after Ageing

The test is carried out according to IEC 60811-1-1, IEC 60811-1-2-1-1, IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC
60811-1-2-1-2. Ageing of the test pieces is carried out according to IEC 60811-1-1, IEC 60811-1-2-
1-1, IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC 60811-1-2-1-2. All other test conditions and requirements before and
after ageing for different sheathing materials are given in Table 3 above.

2.7.4.10.5 Ageing Test on Pieces of Complete Cable

This test shall be carried out to check that the materials in insulation, screens and sheath do not
deteriorate in operation due to contact with other components in the cable. The test is carried out
according to IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC 60811-1-2.
The ageing is carried out at a temperature of 100 ± 2°C during 7 x 24 h. Insulation and sheath shall
thereafter fulfil the requirements after ageing according to Tables 2 and 3 above.
For test of the resistivity of semiconducting screens, see clause 2.7.4.10.2.

2.7.4.10.6 Loss of Mass Test on PVC Sheath

The test is carried out according to IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC 60811-1-2. All other test conditions and
requirements are given in Table 3 above.

2.7.4.10.7 Pressure Test at High Temperature on Sheath

The test is carried out according to IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC 60811-1-2. All other test conditions and
requirements are given in Table 3 above.

2.7.4.10.8 Heat Shock Test for PVC Sheath

The test is carried out with the test method and requirements as specified in IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC
60811-1-2. All other test conditions are given in Table 3 above.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 22 of 54

2.7.4.10.9 Hot Set Test for Insulation

The test is carried out according to clause 2.7.3.7 in this specification.

2.7.4.10.10 Hot Set Test for XLPE Sheath

The test is carried out according to clause 2.7.3.7 in this specification.

2.7.4.10.11 Carbon Black Content of PE and XLPE Sheaths

The test is carried out according to IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC 60811-1-2. The requirements are given
in Table 3 above.

2.7.4.10.12 Shrinkage Test on Insulation

The test is carried out according to IEC 60811-1-1 and IEC 60811-1-2. All other test conditions and
requirements are given in Table 2 above.

2.8 TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The following information should be given for each conductor cross-sectional area and type of cable.
 Diameter of conductor
 Insulation thickness
 Diameter over insulation
 Cross-section of screen
 Outer diameter of cable
 Cable weight
 Conductor resistance in ohms/km.
 Screen resistance in ohms/km
 Inductance in mH/km at flat and trefoil formation, respectively.
 Capacitance in nF/km.
 The value of the insulation resistance.
 Charging current per phase at 50 Hz
 Surge impedance

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 23 of 54

3 D-UC-03-001 LV UNDERGROUND CABLE

3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The following publications shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60060-1 High-voltage test techniques. Part 1: General definitions and test requirements.

60060-2 High voltage test techniques - Part 2: Measuring systems.

60228 Conductors of insulated cables.

60230 Impulse tests on cables and their accessories

60287-1-1 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - Part 1-1: Current rating
equations (100 % load factor) and calculation of losses - General.

60287-1-2 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - Part 1: Current rating
equations (100 % load factor) and calculations of losses - Section 2: Sheath
eddy current loss factors for two circuits in flat formation.

60287-1-3 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - Part 1-3: Current rating
equations (100 % load factor) and calculation of losses - Current sharing
between parallel single-core cables and calculation of circulating current
losses.

60287-2-1 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - Part 2-1: Thermal resistance
- Calculation of thermal resistance.

60331-11 Tests for electric cables under fire conditions - Circuit integrity - Part 11:
Apparatus - Fire alone at a flame temperature of at least 750 °C

60331-12 Tests for electric cables under fire conditions - Circuit integrity - Part 12:
Apparatus - Fire with shock at a temperature of at least 830 °C.

60811-1-2 Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of electric cables

60853 Calculation of the cyclic and emergency current rating of cables.

3.2 DESIGN AND MATERIALS

3.2.1 Conductors
The conductors shall be of aluminium or copper with a resistance and design of class 2 according to
IEC 60228.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 24 of 54

3.2.2 Conductor Insulation

The conductor insulation shall be of XLPE with a nominal thickness according to Table 4.

Table 4. XLPE Conductor Thicknesses

Nominal area Nominal thickness

(mm2) (mm)

6 0.7

16 0.7

50 1.0

95 1.1

150 1.4

240 1.7
3.2.3 Lay-Up
The mean value of the length of lay for the cores shall be not more than 50 times the diameter across
the laid up cores.

3.2.4 Tape or Filling

The laid up cores shall be covered by tape or filling of suitable material and of thickness according
to Table 5.
The space between the laid up cores may be filled by strips of suitable material in taped cables.

Table 5. Thickness of Laid Up Cores

Diameter across laid up Thickness of extruded filling

conductors layer
(mm) (mm)

<25 1.0

(25)-35 1.2

(35)-45 1.4

(45)-60 1.6

(60)-80 1.8

>80 2.0

The thickness of the tape filling layer should be 0.4 mm for diameters  40 mm under the layer. For
greater diameters the thickness should be increased to 0.6 mm.
The stated values are approximate.

3.2.5 Sheath
The sheath shall be black and of PVC with a nominal thickness according to Table 6 below:

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 25 of 54

Table 6. Thickness of Sheath

Number of cores and Conductor shape Sheath thickness

nominal area
(mm2) (mm)
2x6 Round 1.8

4 x 16 Round 1.8

4 x 50 Round 1.9

4 x 95 Sector 2.1

4 x 150 Sector 2.4

4 x 240 Sector 2.8

3.3 TYPES AND DIMENSIONS

The following cables may be used, as shown in Table 7 below:
Table 7. Cable Types and Dimensions

Material and Max. d.c. Calculated Max. short-circuit

number of cores resistance at 20°C Current current on the
and rated cross carrying conductor 1 s
sectional area capacity1)
(mm2) (Ohm/km) (A) (kA)
Cu 2 x 6 3.080 55 0.9

Cu 4 x 16 1.150 100 2.4

Al 4 x 50 0.641 140 4.8

Al 4 x 95 0.320 200 9.0

Al 4 x 150 0.206 260 14.2

Al 4 x 240 0.125 240 22.6

1) Conditions for Continuous Rating

 maximum conductor temperature +90°C
 ground temperature +35°C
 installation depth 0.55 m
 thermal resistivity 1.2

3.4 MARKING
3.4.1 Designation of Origin
The cable shall in its entire length carry a designation of origin, e.g. a thread, a tape or a durable
marking on the outer side of the sheath. The spacing between adjacent markings shall not exceed
1m.

3.4.2 Marking of Cores

The cores shall be marked with different colours, red, green, yellow and blue or otherwise marked in
a durable way, e.g. with numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 26 of 54

3.4.3 Designation
Cables shall be designated according to CENELEC HD 361 S2.
Example:
Type, number of conductors x cross sectional area
 N1XV-AS4x150

3.4.4 Marking of Sheath

The sheath shall be marked with:
 Type
 Rated voltage
 Name of manufacturer.
 Year of manufacture, the two last digits.
 Number of cores and nominal area.

3.5 SPLICING
Splicing during manufacture shall, unless otherwise agreed, be done in such a way as to fulfil all
requirements stated in this specification.
Conductors may be spliced by welding or other equivalent method.

3.6 CURRENT CARRYING CAPACITY

Cables shall have current carrying capacity according to IEC 60287.

3.7 TESTING
3.7.1 General Test Conditions
3.7.1.1 Ambient Temperature
The ambient temperature shall be 20 ± 15 °C unless otherwise specified in the details for the
particular test.

3.7.1.2 AC Test Voltages

The values quoted are r.m.s values. The wave form of the AC test voltages shall be substantially
sinusoidal and the frequency shall be in the range 49 Hz to 61 Hz.

3.7.2 Routine Tests

The test according to clause 3.7.2.1 below shall be carried out on all delivery lengths.
If the cable is manufactured in longer lengths than the delivery lengths, routine tests are allowed on
the production lengths before being divided into delivery lengths, on the condition that the cable after
the tests has not been subject to stress, which may have influenced the quality.

3.7.2.1 Voltage Test on Insulation

The test is performed at ambient temperature and with 3.5 kV AC voltage. The voltage is applied
between every conductor. The test voltage shall be gradually increased to the prescribed value. The
testing time shall be 5 min from the moment when full voltage is reached.
As an alternative the test can be made with 15 kV DC voltage during 1 min.
The cable shall withstand the test without breakdown of the insulation.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 27 of 54

3.7.3 Special Tests

Special test comprise tests according to clauses 3.7.3.1 – 3.7.3.3 below, and are performed on a
maximum of 10 % of the delivery lengths, at least one length.

3.7.3.1 Measurement of Electrical Resistance of Conductors

The test piece shall have a length of at least 1 m.
Before the measurement the test piece or the cable length from which the test piece is taken, shall
have been kept in the test room for at least 12 h. The temperature in the test room shall be kept
mainly constant. If the test piece should not have, with certainty, reached the ambient temperature,
the measurement shall not be performed before the test piece has been kept in the test room for at
least 24 h. The ambient temperature shall be measured in the immediate vicinity of the test piece. If
there is some hesitation as to the temperature of the test piece, the test may alternatively be
performed on a test piece, which has been kept for at least 1 h in a temperature controlled liquid bath
or during controlled conditions. If there is some hesitation concerning the measuring result, the
results that are obtained with the last mentioned method shall be valid.
The resistance is determined with direct current. The measured resistance value of the inner
conductor, recalculated to 20°C using the factors given in IEC 60228 shall not exceed the resistance
values indicated in IEC 60228.

3.7.3.2 Measurement of Insulation Thickness

The insulation thickness is measured according to IEC Publication 60811, on two test pieces taken
from different ends of each core of the cable, which is to be measured.
The average value of the measured thickness rounded off to 0.1 mm shall not be less than the
specified nominal value.
The thickness, measured at single points may be less than this value, provided that it is not more
than 0.1 mm below 90% of the nominal value.

3.7.3.3 Measurement of Plastic Sheath Thickness

The thickness of the sheath is measured according to IEC Publication 60811, on two test pieces
taken from different ends of the cable, which is to be measured, after that damaged parts of the cable
ends have been removed.
The average value of the measured thickness rounded off to 0.1 mm shall not be less than the
specified nominal value. The smallest value of the measured thickness shall not be more than 0.1
mm below 85 % of the nominal value.

3.7.4 Type Tests

Type tests comprise tests according to clauses 3.7.4.1 – 3.7.4.2 below. The tests are valid for all
variants of the cable type if it is performed on at least two variants of the cable type, comprising areas
in the upper and the lower part of the area series.
If construction, materials and manufacturing methods have not been changed in such a way that the
tested properties have been unfavourably affected, the type tests do not have to be renewed.

3.7.4.1 Electric Properties

Electric type tests are carried out on a test piece of at least 10 m of a completed cable, the
termination's not included. When testing multiword cables every test should be performed on all cores
of the cable. The individual tests shall be performed on the same test piece and in the following order:
Measurement of insulation resistance at a temperature of 70°C according to clause 3.7.4.1.1 below.
AC voltage test, 4 h, on insulation is done in accordance with clause 3.7.4.1.2 below.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 28 of 54

3.7.4.1.1 Measurement of Insulation Resistance at a Temperature of 70°C

Sheath, filler and armouring, if any, are removed from the cable and the cores are kept in a water
bath with a temperature of 70 ± 2°C for at least 1 h before measuring. This is performed with a DC
voltage of 300 - 500 V applied between the cable conductors and the water bath. The measuring
shall not, after the voltage has been applied, be performed until stabilised conditions almost have
been obtained, however not earlier than after a minute.
The volume resistivity is calculated from the measured insulation resistance with the help of the
following formula:
2π • l • R
δ= D
ln
d
Where:

δ = volume resistivity, Ωcm (σ )

R = measured insulation resistance, Ω
l = test cable length, cm
D = diameter over insulation, mm
d = diameter over the conductor, mm
Note: For the cores of shaped conductors the ratio D/d is the ratio of the perimeter over the insulation
to the perimeter over the conductor.
10
The volume resistivity must not be less than 10 Ωcm at 70°C.
When testing several cables of the same construction but with different cross-sectional areas, it is
sufficient to measure the insulation resistance of one of these cables.
The insulation resistance constant Ki is calculated according to the following formula:

l • R • 10 −11
Ki = =10 −11 × 0. 367 × σMΩkm
D
lg
d
The calculated value of Ki must not be less than 0.037 MΩkm.

3.7.4.1.2 AC Voltage Test, 4 h, on Insulation

A test piece of at least 10 m of a complete cable, from which sheath and fillings have been removed,
is immersed into a water bath at ambient temperature for at least 1 h. The interconnected conductors
in all cores are tested with 4 kV AC voltage during 4 h between the interconnected conductors and
the water bath. Breakdown shall not occur in the insulation.

3.7.4.2 Type Test of the Mechanical Properties of the Insulation and the Sheath
3.7.4.2.1 Measurement of Insulation Thickness
The insulation thickness is measured on every core of the cable according to clause 3.7.3.2 above.

3.7.4.2.2 Measurement of the Plastic Sheath Thickness

The plastic sheath thickness is measured according to clause 3.7.3.3 above.

3.7.4.2.3 Measurement of Mechanical Properties of the Insulation

The measurement is carried out according to IEC Publication 60811. The test piece is aged in an
oven at a temperature of 80 ± 2°C during 7 x 24 h. The ageing is done according to IEC Publication
60811.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 29 of 54

Requirements before ageing:

2
 Tensile strength min 12.5 N/mm (MPa)
 Elongation at break min 150 %
Requirements after ageing:
The median value after ageing shall, for tensile strength and for elongation at break, not be less than
the value before ageing given above and not deviate more than ± 20 % from the value measured
before ageing.

3.7.4.2.4 Measurements of Mechanical Properties of the Sheath

The measurement is performed according to IEC Publication 60811. The test piece is aged in an
oven according to IEC Publication 60811, at a temperature of 80 ± 2°C during 7 x 24 h.
Requirements before ageing:
2
 Tensile strength min 12.5 N/mm (MPa)
 Elongation at break min 150 %
Requirements after ageing:
The median value after ageing shall, for tensile strength and for elongation at break, not be less than
the value before ageing given above and not deviate more than ± 20 % from the value measured
before ageing.

3.7.4.2.5 Ageing Test on Completed Cable

The purpose of this test is to verify that the material of the insulation or of the sheath does not
deteriorate under the influence of other components in the cable. The selection of test piece and
ageing is made according to IEC Publication 60811.
The ageing is carried out at a temperature of 80 ± 2°C during 7 x 24 h.
Test pieces, taken from the insulation of the cable before and after ageing, shall be tested according
to clause 3.7.4.2.3 above and thereby fulfil the indicated requirements.
Test pieces, taken from the sheath before and after ageing, shall be tested according to clause
3.7.4.2.4 above and thereby fulfil the indicated requirements.

3.7.4.2.6 Measurement of Weight Loss of Insulation and Sheath

The measurement shall be carried out according to IEC Publication 60811.
The test piece shall be aged at a temperature of 80 ± 2°C during 7 x 24 h.
The weight loss shall not exceed 2 mg/cm2.

3.7.4.2.7 Pressure Test on Insulation and Sheath at High Temperature

The test is performed according to IEC Publication 60811, at a temperature of 80 ± 2°C during 4 h.

3.7.4.2.8 Test of Resistance to Cracking of Insulation and Sheath at High Temperature

The test is performed according to IEC Publication 60811, at a temperature of 150 ± 2°C during 1 h.

3.8 TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The following information should be given for each conductor cross-sectional area and type of cable.
 Diameter of conductor
 Insulation thickness
 • Outer diameter of cable

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 30 of 54

 Cable weight
 Conductor resistance in ohms/km.
 Inductance in mH/km.
 Capacitance in nF/km.
 The value of the insulation resistance.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 31 of 54

4 D-UC-04-001 JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS

4.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The following publications shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60060 High-voltage test techniques.
60287 Calculation of the continuous current rating of cables.

60230 Impulse tests on cables and their accessories

61442 Electric cables - Test methods for accessories for power cables with rated
voltages from 6 kV (Um = 7.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)

4.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

4.2.1 Designation of Origin
The joint or termination shall be durable marked on the outside, or if this is not practically feasible,
on the package with the name of the manufacturer or trademark.

4.2.2 Marking on the Package

The joint or termination shall be marked on the package so that the user can read for which type of
cables and cross-sectional areas the joint or termination is intended.
If limitations for storing (maximum time, temperature, etc.) or for installation temperature are at hand,
such limitations should be indicated on the package. If necessary complemented with reference to
included instruction.

4.2.3 Instructions
Instructions in Portuguese shall be included in all joints and terminations and consist of detailed
instructions for all steps that are important for the quality of supply.
During type tests this instruction should be followed.

4.2.4 Choice of Material

Particular attention shall be paid to the following points when choosing materials:
a) Corrosion resistance, particularly if there is a risk of electrolytic corrosion as a result of contact
between different metals.
b) Mechanical strength against pressure, bending, pulling, fatigue and blows.
c) Ability to withstand environmental effects, such as UV radiation, ozone and air pollution.
d) Tracking resistance.
e) Ability to withstand temperature variations. It shall be possible to use the material at the following
ambient temperatures:
Indoors: + 5 °C to + 50 °C
Outdoors: + 5 °C to + 45 °C

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 32 of 54

At the rated load, and with the ambient temperatures given above, there shall be no abnormal ageing
of the included material.
Furthermore consideration shall be paid to the fact that material in direct contact with the conductor
shall be able to withstand the overload and short-time temperatures that the conductor is allowed to
assume according to the applicable standards.

4.2.5 Dimensioning of Components

4.2.5.1 Mechanical Strength
The terminal device and mounting bracket shall be so dimensioned that they are able to withstand
the wind and connection forces that are encountered.
The resultant stress from all these forces can be represented by one single force acting on the
terminal perpendicular to the length axis of the termination and in the most unfavourable direction,
for example vertically downwards when installed horizontally. When dimensioning, the following
minimum values shall apply. In addition a safety factor against fracture of 1.5 shall be applied.

Rated voltage Rated current Static force

(kV) (A) (N)
12-84 1-phase ≤ 1,250 750

4.2.5.2 Terminals
The current outlet can consist of a cable lug, plate or smooth bolt of copper or aluminium with or
without surface coating.
Connectors for the earth conductor shall be provided for terminations with metallic covering. This
connector can, depending on the design of the termination, also serve as an earth connection for the
cable screen, metal sheath and armouring.
Earthing of the latter can also be done using a special earthing device. Special attention should be
paid to the method of earthing the armouring of single-phase cables when the armouring can carry
current.
In certain cases a connector for the earth conductor, according to the above, can also be specified
for a cable joint.

4.3 TESTING OF 33KV JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS

4.3.1 Choice of Rated Voltage and Test Voltage
The selected rated voltage U shall be not less than the value of the nominal voltage Um applicable to
the system.

4.3.2 General Test Conditions

4.3.2.1 AC and DC Voltage Tests
These tests shall be carried out as withstand tests according to IEC 60060, High- voltage test
techniques.

4.3.2.2 Impulse Voltage Test

The test shall be carried out as a withstand test according to IEC 60060, High-voltage test
techniques, but the wave front of the voltage impulse may have a duration of 1.2 - 5 µs.

4.3.2.3 Ambient Temperature

The ambient temperature shall be between 10 °C and 30 °C.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 33 of 54

Unless otherwise stated, the test specimen shall be at ambient temperature during the test.

4.3.2.4 Arrangement of the Test Specimen

For testing a completed joint or termination the test specimen shall be mounted on the cable for
which it is intended and according to the manufacturer's instructions. Regard shall also be paid to
any special method of mounting included in the instructions, for example regarding the crossing of
phase conductors. Parts and accessories included in the design that can affect the test result shall
be installed. This applies to, e.g. connection clamps, ferrules and expansion vessels.

4.3.3 Classification of Tests

4.3.3.1 Type Tests
In order that they shall apply generally, type tests shall be carried out with the largest size of cable
conductor and associated connector for which the test specimen is designed.
As long as the design and materials remain unchanged, or are not changed in such a way as to
impair the properties investigated in the type tests, these tests need not be repeated.
Normal type tests comprise:
Voltage tests As per Clauses 4.3.4.1 and 4.3.5.1 below.
Current load tests and measurement
of partial discharges As per Clauses 4.3.4.1.5 and 4.3.5.1.3
Testing with impulse and short-time current
of three-phase terminations As per Clause 4.3.4.1.8 below.

4.3.3.2 Sampling Injection

Sampling inspection is carried out according to agreement between the manufacturer and the
purchaser and can comprise one or more of the tests included in the type tests.

4.3.3.3 Routine Tests

For practical reasons routine tests cannot be carried out on a complete installed joint or termination.
However, at the request of the customer the manufacturer shall be able to give an account of the
extent of his production inspection, and by means of sampling inspection verify that the product is in
accordance with the specified requirements.

4.3.3.4 Testing of the Completed System

Testing of the completed system shall be carried out to the extent and according to the methods that
apply to the cable in the applicable cable standard.

4.3.4 Testing of a Completed Termination

4.3.4.1 Voltage Tests
Voltage tests shall be carried out with a.c. voltage and impulse voltage.

4.3.4.1.1 Arrangement of the Test Specimen

For the testing the termination shall be installed in the normal position according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If the termination is provided with a device for mounting at different angles to the vertical plane, it
shall undergo the wet test in its extreme positions.
If the terminals of the termination do not have fixed phase and earth distances, the minimum distance
specified by the manufacturer shall be used for the tests.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 34 of 54

4.3.4.1.2 Voltage Application

Each terminal shall be voltage tested in turn against the other terminals and against the conducting
covering or, if there is no covering or it consists of insulating material, against the metal sheath or
screen of the cable.

4.3.4.1.3 AC Voltage Tests

AC voltage tests shall be carried out as dry tests, and for outdoor terminations also as wet tests.

4.3.4.1.4 Impulse Withstand Voltage Test

The test specimen shall be tested with 5 impulses of each polarity. If in connection with such a series
of five impulses only one causes breakdown, 10 further impulses of the same polarity shall be
applied. If none of these cause breakdowns, the test specimen is approved.

4.3.4.1.5 Current Load Tests and Measurement of Partial Discharges

When the termination is subjected to a current load, the parts included in it must not assume a harmful
temperature, for example through electromagnetic induction. Damaging partial discharges must not
occur as a result of temperature variations.

4.3.4.1.6 Arrangement of the Test Specimen

The test specimen shall be arranged according to Clause 4.3.2.4 above. The resistance/length value
of the lead-in wires shall be approximately the same as that of the cable conductors.

4.3.4.1.7 Test Procedure

Temperature tests
The test specimen shall be loaded with the highest permissible current for the type of cable in
question, and for sufficiently long time to reach temperature equilibrium. The rise in temperature in
the steady state shall be measured according to the following, and must not exceed:
a) 60°C at the external terminals
b) tc - 25 °C at the conductor and jointing device in contact with the insulation, where tc is the highest
continuous working temperature in °C for the insulating material.
The rise in temperature caused by induction must not assume values that can damage the materials
used, or endanger the environment (fire risk).
The emergency loads applicable to certain types of cables can for limited periods result in higher
temperatures than those stipulated above. It is assumed that this is not normally harmful for the
termination. In case of doubt the supplier should be consulted.
Cyclic load tests and subsequent measurement of partial discharges
Cyclic load tests and subsequent measurement of partial discharges shall be carried out on
terminations for those types of cables where this is specified in the applicable standards.
The testing specifications and criteria in the cable standard shall then apply.
Each separate terminal on the termination shall be checked. The test voltage shall be applied
according to Clause 4.3.4.1.2 above. The high voltage is then normally applied on the high voltage
terminal of the termination. Discharges that can be shown to originate from external metal parts are
ignored.

4.3.4.1.8 Testing with Impulse and Short-time Current

The termination shall satisfy the applicable requirements for the cable concerning ability to withstand
mechanical and thermal stresses when subjected to impulse and short-time currents. This shall be
checked by testing the complete termination.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 35 of 54

The test specimen shall be arranged according to Clause 4.3.2.4 above. The cable used for the
setting up shall have a length of at last 3 m outside the test specimen and shall have about the same
resistance/length value as the cable conductor.
The test specimen, connection points and cable shall be mounted securely on to a stable base.
Single-phase termination
A single-phase termination can be set up according to one of the following alternatives:
a) Three (or with two-phase testing two) similar test specimens are installed in parallel to each other
at the same height and with a mutual net distance.
b) Two (or in the case of two-phase testing one) of the test specimens in accordance with a) are
replaced by a busbar, the centre line of which coincides with that of the replaced test specimen.
The busbar shall be at least as long as the test specimen and securely fixed along its whole
length.
Note: If special accessories are supplied with single-phase terminations so that they can be
combined to form a three-phase device, these accessories shall be used for the test set-up. Three
single-phase terminations shall be set up and considered as one three-phase termination according
to three-phase termination with fixed terminals.

4.3.4.1.9 Test Procedure

The tests shall preferably be carried out with three-phase current.
A single-phase termination can be tested in a two-phase current circuit according to single phase
termination.
However, it must be observed in this connection that the latter testing procedure results in greater
stresses.
The test specimen shall be subjected to the tests below three times with intermediate cooling periods.
The test current shall be a combination of impulse and short-time current.
The 1 s values at an initial temperature of 35 °C, that apply to the impulse current is and the short-
time current It, are selected according to the values stated for the cable in question.

The testing should be carried out using the It, t and is values thus obtained. If the test equipment
does not allow all of these values to be met, the value of is must, however, always be met. Deviation
from the short-time current value It given above is permissible, in which case the short-circuit time tx
shall be converted using the formula
2
I
t =
x
t
2 ×t
I x

Where: Ix is the actual value of the short-time current

tx = 0.2 . . . 5 s

Current and time values are determined from an oscillogram.

After the tests the test specimen shall not show any changes that can have a detrimental effect on
its operating ability. After the tests the following checks shall therefore be carried out:
1) Electrical tests in accordance with the standardised routine test procedure that applies to the
cable for which the termination is intended:
a) AC voltage tests
b) Measurement of partial discharges

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 36 of 54

2) Visual inspection
After the electrical tests according to 1) above, the different components of the termination
shall be visually inspected in connection with dismantling. A check is then made that no
essential changes or damages have occurred during the tests.

4.3.5 Testing of a Complete Cable Joint

In principle a cable joint shall have the same electrical and thermal strength as the cable for which it
is intended. Consequently and where applicable the tests shall be carried out according to the
applicable cable standards.

4.3.5.1 Voltage Tests

Voltage test shall be carried out with a.c. voltage, impulse voltage and d.c. voltage.

4.3.5.1.1 Arrangement of the Test Specimen

The test specimen shall be arranged as described in Clause 4.3.2.4 above.

4.3.5.1.2 Test Procedure

Regarding the application and value of the voltage and the test time, reference is made to the
specifications for corresponding tests in applicable cable standards. However, the impulse withstand
voltage test shall be carried out without the preceding bending test, and at an ambient temperature
according to Clause 4.3.2.3 above.

4.3.5.1.3 Current Load Tests and Measurement of Partial Discharges

The tests shall be carried out according to the applicable parts of Clause 4.3.4.1.5 above.

4.3.5.1.4 Test Procedure

The tests shall be carried out according to the specifications for type tests of the cable in question.

4.4 TESTING OF 1kV JOINTS

4.4.1 Ambient Temperature
The ambient temperature shall be between + 10°C and + 30°C, unless otherwise stated for the
relevant test.

4.4.2 AC Voltage Tests

The AC test voltage shall be substantially sinusoidal and the frequency be between 49 Hz and 61
Hz.

4.4.3 Arrangement of the Test Specimen

For testing a competed joint the test specimen shall be mounted on the cable for which it is intended
and according to the manufacturer's instructions. Regard shall also be paid to any special method of
mounting included in the instructions, e.g. regarding the crossing of phase conductors. Parts and
accessories included in the design that can affect the test result shall be installed.

4.4.4 Routine Tests

For practical reasons routine tests cannot be carried out on a complete installed joint. However, at
the request of the customer the manufacturer shall be able to give an account of the extent of his
production inspection.

4.4.5 Type Tests

The extent of the type test is as given in Table 8 below:

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 37 of 54

Table 8. Type tests

Test method and

Number of
requirements
Sequence Test test
according to
specimens
clause
1 Temperature Measurement during 1 4.4.6.1
Load

2 AC Voltage Test 4 4.4.6.2

3 Cyclic Loading in Air. 4 4.4.6.3

4 Testing with Short-time Current 4 4.4.6.4

5 Cyclic Loading in Water. 4 4.4.6.5

6 Measurement of Insulation in Water 4 4.4.6.6

7 Voltage Test in Water 4 4.4.6.7

A couple of complete type tests according to Table 8 should be carried out on each type of joint. The
number of type tests is determined according to the following principles:
a) At least two conductor areas should be tested for each type of joint. If the joint can be used for
jointing of different cross-sectional areas, at least one joint should be tested in this arrangement.
The type of cable materials, cross-sectional areas, etc., that can be assumed to be the most
difficult to joint, should be tested.
b) The test shall be carried out on XLPE-insulated cable.
Concerning number of test specimens in each type test and the arrangement of the test circuit see
clause 4.4.5 above.
If, during the type test according to Table 8, any of the test specimens does not withstand one of the
tests, the whole type test should be carried out on a new set of test specimens.
However, the test according to clause 4.4.6.1 above does not have to be repeated if it was approved
during the first test.
As long as the design and material remain unchanged, or are not changed in such a way as to impair
the properties investigated in the type tests, these tests need not to be repeated.

4.4.6 Test Methods and Requirements

The test according to clause 4.4.5 above is carried out on a test specimen in a for this test arranged
test circuit.
The tests according to clauses 4.4.6.1 – 4.4.6.7 above are carried out in the stated sequence on four
equal test specimens that are not allowed to be exchanged during or between the tests. The four test
specimens may be connected in series with a distance between the test specimens not less than 0.5
m. The free cable length from the end of the cable to the nearest test specimen shall not be below 1
m.
The tests according to clauses 4.4.6.3 – 4.4.6.5 above are evaluated by the tests according to
clauses 4.4.6.6 and 4.4.6.7 above.
The conductors should be spliced during the test of a joint.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 38 of 54

4.4.6.1 Temperature Measurement During Load

The test circuit should be arranged so that the air is free to circulate around the joint.
The test is carried out on a joint in which a thermo element is put in. The thermo element shall be in
contact with one of the conductors that carries the load current and from a distance of 10 mm from
the connector. The wires of the thermo element shall not have a larger diameter than 0.4 mm. They
should be twisted together and run at least 50 mm in parallel with the conductor on which the
measurement is done.
The heating of the test specimen shall be done by a load current according to IEC 60287 for the
relevant type of cable in free air. A joint in a single-core cable may be tested on a single cable with a
current that is valid at horizontal configuration with open screen circuit.
The test is carried out at an ambient temperature between + 10°C and + 30°C. The load current shall
be recalculated regarding to the actual ambient temperature by using the correction factors given in
IEC 60287. The calculated load current shall be kept with an accuracy of ± 2% during the whole test.
The heating period shall be 15 h.
The measurement equipment should have an accuracy of ± 2 K.
The measured temperature in the joint shall not exceed the maximum permitted temperature of the
cable with more than 15 K.

4.4.6.2 AC Voltage Test

The test is carried out as a dry test at ambient temperature and with 4 kV ac voltage. The voltage is
applied between each conductor and the other conductors connected together with each other and
with eventual screen or concentric conductor. The test voltage is increased gradually to the stated
value. The test period shall be 1 min from the time the voltage reaches the full value.
Breakdowns are not allowed during the testing.

4.4.6.3 Cyclic Loading in Air

The test circuit should be arranged so that the air is free to circulate around the joint.
The heating of the test specimen shall be done by a load current according to IEC 60287 for the
relevant type of cable in free air. A joint in a single-core cable shall be tested with a current that is
valid at horizontal configuration with open screen circuit. The load current values should be multiplied
with the following factors:
PVC-insulation 1.13
XLPE-insulation 1.09
These factors are taken from VDE 0278 and are chosen so that the conductor temperature at the
end of the heating period reaches a temperature, which with 5 K exceeds the maximum permitted
continuous conductor temperature of the cable.
The test is carried out at an ambient temperature between + 10°C and + 30°C. The load current shall
not be recalculated regarding to the actual ambient temperature.
Each load cycle shall consist of five hours heating and three hours cooling at no load. In total 63
complete cycles should be carried out. Breaks between the cycles are allowed.
The load current is set at the beginning of the first cycle and is adjusted at the end of the first cycle.
After that, no adjustments are allowed.
The test circuit may be heated by three-phase or single-phase. In the latter case all conductors in a
three-phase cable are connected in series. Additional losses in armoured cables must then be

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 39 of 54

considered. If, at single-phase connection, all four conductors in a four-core cable are loaded in order
to get a symmetrical current in the cable, the current should be reduced by the factor 0.87.

4.4.6.4 Testing with Short-time Current

The test circuit shall be loaded with a short-time current with a value calculated from the 1 sec. current
value for the relevant cable. The test period should not be shorter than 1 s but the current may be
recalculated to longer time, yet not to a lower value than 10 kA or longer time than 10 s.
The test is carried out two times with an interval between the tests when the cable shall cool down
to the ambient temperature.
The test may be carried out with three-phase or single-phase current. At a multi-core joint at single-
phase testing the current can be led forth in one conductor and back in another. The number of tests
and combinations of conductors should be chosen so that each conductor carries the short-circuit
current twice.

4.4.6.5 Cyclic Loading in Water

The test procedure shall be the same as in clause 4.4.6.3 but all joints included in the test should be
in a water tank and so arranged that the distance from the water surface to the upper side of the
cable is at least 250 mm. The whole joint shall be covered by water. The water temperature shall not
exceed + 40°C.
The outer sheath and eventual inner sheath and filling should be removed at a distance of at least
50 mm beginning at 50 mm from the joint and on all cables. The test circuit shall remain in this
condition also during the following tests according to clause 4.4.6.6 and 4.4.6.7 below.
The total number of test cycles should be 63.

4.4.6.6 Measurement of Insulation in Water

With the test circuit immersed in water according to clause 4.4.6.5 above, the insulation resistance
is measured both between each conductor and the other conductors and between all conductors
connected together and the water. The test voltage shall be at least 100 V dc. No measured value
should be below 10 MΩ.

4.4.6.7 Voltage Test in Water

With the test circuit immersed in water according to clause 4.4.6.5 above, the voltage test according
to clause 4.4.6.2 above is repeated.
No breakdowns are allowed.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 40 of 54

5 D-UC-05-001 CABLE LUGS

5.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The following IEC publication shall be applicable:
IEC/TR2 61238 Compression and mechanical connectors for power cables with copper or
aluminium conductors

5.2 TYPES
Cable lugs should be supplied for the following types of conductor:
Al-conductor 50, 70, 95, 150, 240 and 300 mm2.
Cu-conductor 6, 16, 25, and 35 mm2.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 41 of 54

6 D-UC-06-001 WARNING TAPE

6.1 GENERAL
The warning tapes to be placed under the street or ground surface above and all along underground
cables shall fulfil the following requirements.
The warning tapes shall be made of durable plastic material (Polyethylene) with high tearing strength.
The colour of the warning tape should be bright yellow and repeated along the tape in intervals of
maximum 1 m be printed in black and readable up to a distance of 10 m "DANGER – HIGH VOLTAGE
ELECTRICITY". The width of the warning tape shall be 0.125 m minimum and the thickness 0.1 mm
minimum.

6.2 PACKING
The warning tapes shall be delivered in rolls in 250 m lengths.

6.3 TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The following information should be given for warning tape:
 Detailed drawings showing all dimensions.
 The tearing strength and impact resistance

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 42 of 54

7 D-UC-07-001 PROTECTION SHEETS AND PIPES

7.1 PROTECTION SHEETS
The protection sheets to be placed close above and along underground cables as a mechanical
protection for those shall fulfil the following requirements:
The protection sheets shall be made of hard durable plastic material with high impact resistance
(Polyethylene).
The colour of the protection sheets shall be bright yellow and repeated along the sheet in intervals
of maximum 1 m be printed in black and readable up to a distance of 10 m "DANGER – HIGH
VOLTAGE ELECTRICITY". The width of the warning tape shall be 0.15 m minimum and the thickness
1.0 mm minimum.

7.1.1 Testing
Verification of impact resistance is performed by a drop weight with a mass of 10 kg and with a point
according to Fig. 1. The test is performed at an ambient temperature of ±0 ± 2°C and at +45 ±2 °C.

Fig. 1: Verification of Impact Resistance

The tested object shall be placed on a layer of dry, well-crushed aggregate, so called stone powder,
with a thickness of at least 50 mm.
The test is performed with the point of the drop weight placed in line with and across the tested
object. The drop should be minimum 500 mm. 20 objects shall be tested.
The point of the drop weight should not penetrate the underside of the protection sheet more than
50 mm or deform the protection in a similar way.

7.1.2 Packing
The protection sheets can be delivered either in short lengths down to 0.80 m or in large lengths of
several metres as rolls. When delivered in short lengths the ends of the sheets shall be formed as
notch and studs to lock the one to the other.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 43 of 54

7.1.3 Technical Information

The following information should be given for each type of protection sheet:
 Detailed drawings showing all dimensions.
 The tearing strength and impact resistance

7.2 PLASTIC PIPES

The plastic pipes shall be made of hard durable plastic material with high impact resistance
(Polyethylene).
The colour of the plastic pipe shall be bright yellow. The inner diameter of the plastic pipe shall be
about 100 mm and the length 6 000 mm.
The pipes should be easy to join to each other.

7.2.1 Technical Information

The following information should be given for plastic pipes:
 Detailed drawings showing all dimensions.
 The tearing strength and impact resistance.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 44 of 54

8 D-UC-08-001 CABLE PILLARS

8.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
In particular the following IEC publications shall be applicable:
IEC 60439 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies.
IEC 60529 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures.

8.2 GENERAL DESIGN

The pillars shall consist of a cabinet with electrical equipment for connection of cables, mounted on
a foundation and suitable to be placed on the sidewalks along the walls of houses and plots as shown
in Figure 1 below:

400 A Knife Fuse Switch

160 A Knife Fuse Switch

Fig 1.General Design of Cabinets for Pillars

The foundation, fasteners and enclosure of the cable pillars shall be of a mechanical strength
sufficient to withstand the stresses they may be subjected to by man or a manually driven tool or
vehicle that unintentionally comes into contact with the cable pillar.
Parts of steel in the foundation and enclosure should be protected against corrosion by hot-dip
galvanisation or other similar treatment.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 45 of 54

At the bottom of the pillars there shall be a bar equipped to support each cable.
The cable pillars shall be of the following size:
a. Pillars for the connection of 6 three-phase cables minimum, four (4) fused 6 to 95 mm2 and two
(2) direct connected 95 to 300 mm2. When used as junction pillars only, they shall be able to be
equipped for connection of six (6) cables of 95 to 300 mm2.
b. Pillars for the connection of six (6) three-phase cables minimum, four (4) fused 95 to 300 mm2
and two (2) direct connected 95 to 300 mm2. When used as junction pillars only, they shall be
able to be equipped for connection of six (6) cables of 95 to 300 mm2.

8.3 ENCLOSURE AND DEGREE OF PROTECTION

8.3.1 General
The door(s) for access to the inside of the cabinet shall open towards the street side and shall have
a lock to be operated with a special key of triangular shaped head.
The small openings for entrance of emergency feeder cables shall be placed on each of the short
sides of the cabinet, approximately 0.10 m above the ground surface. Each of the openings shall
2
allow entrance of two 4 x 95 mm cables of normal underground type as shown in Figure 2 below.

Opening for
emergency
cables

min. 90 mm

0.1 m
Ground surface

Fig. 2: Doors for Cabinet Access

It should be possible to lock, unlock and operate the doors for these openings from the inside of the
cabinet only.

8.3.2 Degree of Protection

Under normal operation condition, i.e. with doors and openings closed, the enclosure shall fulfil class
IP 44 of IEC 60529.
The enclosure shall have an earthing connection to the neutral busbar. The equipment needed for
such earthing should, if the design so requires, be delivered as an integrated part of the enclosure.

8.3.3 Mechanical Strength

An outer pressure force of 1 500 N applied against any part of the enclosure should not result in
permanent deformations so that the degree of protection is not fulfilled or such intermediate or
permanent deformations that lead to flash-over at test voltage according to clause 8.6.1.3.1. below.
Cable pillars shall withstand impacts or shocks with an impact energy of 200 Nm without affecting
the degree of protection.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 46 of 54

Cable pillars shall have sufficient strength against pointed objects penetrating the enclosure

8.4 FOUNDATION
The foundation shall be made of steel to be buried into the ground and equipped with bolts or other
arrangements for mounting the pillar to its top. It shall be high enough to be buried to a depth of 0.80
m underground minimum with the cabinet in correct position.
The foundation itself and its connection to the cabinet shall be strong enough to withstand all possible
forces that can be transferred from the cabinet.
The foundation shall be designed to protect the cables connected to the pillar from mechanical
damage down to a depth of 0.30 m underground minimum. Below this level it shall allow the cables
to enter from cable trenches both in front and behind the pillar. This means that the bottom of the
foundation ought to be "frame shaped". The base of the foundation shall have a bottom plate with a
size of 0.30 x 0.80 m minimum.
If the foundation is made of steel and includes parts, exposed to persons from the outside of the
pillar, or to persons doing work inside the cabinet, it shall have an earthing connection to the neutral
busbar. The equipment needed for such earthing should, if the design so requires, be delivered as
an integrated part of the foundation.

8.5 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

The electrical equipment shall consist of three phase busbars for connection of the phase-conductors
of the cables and one busbar for connection of the neutral conductors and eventual earthing
electrodes that should be connected to the last pillar in each feeder to reduce over voltages on
consumer installations in case of a broken neutral conductor in the feeder cable. The busbars shall
include equipment or be equipped for connection of 6 to 300 mm2 Al-conductors. The phase busbars
and all components on these shall be semi protected by plastic insulation with an insulation level of
0.6/1.0 kV, to at least IP20 according to IEC 60529. The design shall be made for connection and
disconnection of cables under live conditions.
The current-carrying capacity of the busbars shall be a minimum 400 A.
For the connection of the total number of cables, the necessary equipment shall be included as
integrated parts of the busbars or as dismountable connectors fixed to the busbars.
The connection and disconnection of cables shall be possible to do under live conditions with special
insulated tools (spanners). No pressing shall be needed. The connection equipment shall be
designed for both Aluminium and Cu-conductors.
To support of the cables entering the cabinet from the ground, a bar shall be placed at the bottom of
the cabinet or at the top of the foundation. The equipment needed to fix the possible number of cables
to this supporting bar shall be included in the delivery.
It shall be possible to install knife fuses in order to protect the outgoing cables.
All knife blade switches should comply with switching capacity of 6 x In at cosᴪ = 0.35.

8.6 TESTING
8.6.1 Type Test
8.6.1.1 Verification of the Short-circuit Strength
8.6.1.1.1 Testing of the Main Circuits
It is assumed that half the maximum numbers of feeding groups in the pillar in a parallel connection
co-operate during the feeding of the short-circuit current (e.g. if the maximum number of feeder
cables possibly to connect is 6, then 3 of these are assumed to feed the short-circuit current) and

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 47 of 54

that the rated current of the equipment for the connection of the feeder cables as well as the rated
current of the fuses is limited (e.g. to maximum 400 A).

8.6.1.2 Verification of Degree of Protection

It should be checked that the cable pillar with open door(s) fulfils the requirements for IP20 according
to IEC 60529.

8.6.1.3 Verification of Mechanical Strength

8.6.1.3.1 Verification of Strength against Compressive Force
An earthed test device of metal with a spherical or semi-spherical shape with a radius of 100 ± 3 mm
at the mating surface and a surface hardness of at least HB 160 should be put against the enclosure
with a force of 1 500 N at 10 points, where the result of the test can be assumed to be lowest. The
force should be applied during at least 10 seconds at each test point.
The cable pillar should be mounted on a standard foundation and two series of test should be
performed (not necessarily on the same cable pillar).
The enclosure should be empty during the first test series and in order to be approved the degree of
protection should be intact during the test.
During the second test series the cable pillar should be equipped with the standard components with
fuses that gives the smallest air distance to earth. The enclosure should be earthed. An AC test
voltage, according to the rated insulation voltage of the cable pillar is applied between all normally
live parts of the cable pillar and earth. In order to be approved no flash-over is permitted.

8.6.1.3.2 Verification of Impact Resistance

A pendulum device with an impact device of spherical or semi-spherical shape with a radius of 100
± 3 mm at the mating surface, a surface hardness of at least HB 160 and a weight of 20 - 40 kg is
used to check the impact resistance of 200 Nm stated in clause 8.3.3.
An empty cable pillar is placed in such a way that the impact device hits transversely to the surface
and at a point which is probably the weakest. Each type of cable pillar should be subjected to three
impacts, one at the front, one at the backside and one at the (weakest) end. It is not necessary to
perform all tests on the same cable pillar.
The cable pillar should be mounted on the foundation and firmly fastened at normal ground level.
The cable pillar should have a degree of protection of at least IP34 according to IEC 60529 after the
tests in order to be approved.

8.6.1.3.3 Verification of Resistance Against Penetration by Pointed Objects

A steel ball with a diameter of 5 mm (see Fig. 3) is pressed with a force of 20N against a
representative point of the surface of the cable pillar, placed horizontally. The test should be
performed at a temperature of the cable pillar of 85°±2 °C. The depth of indentation caused by the
steel ball after 1 hour should not have a larger diameter than 2 mm.

Fig. 3: Steel Ball for Verification of Resistance Against Penetration by Pointed Objects

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 48 of 54

8.7 TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The following information should be given for each type of cable pillar:
 Rated operational current and rated short-circuit current.
 Detailed drawings showing all dimensions of the cable pillar.
 Detailed drawings of all equipment needed for the connection of cables, fuses, etc.
 Specifications and instructions for the installation, operation and maintenance of the cable
pillar.

8.8 KNIFE BLADE FUSE SWITCHES

8.8.1 Reference Standards
The following standard are applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60629 Low-voltage fuses.
60529 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures.

60947-3 Low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 3: Switches, disconnectors,
switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units.

8.8.2 General
The knife blade fuse switches should be intended for cable pillars.
The knife blade switches should include switch covers.
The knife blade fuse switches shall fulfil the requirements for IP20 according to IEC 60529.
The knife blade fuse switches should comply with switching capacity AC23 according to IEC 60947-
3.
The connection and disconnection of cables shall be possible to do under live conditions with special
insulated tools (spanners). No pressing shall be needed.
The knife blade fuse switches should be designed in such a way that fuses can be changed in a safe
and simple manner without use of special tools.
The knife blade fuse switches should be of the following two sizes:
a) Size 00 according to DIN 43 620, i.e. rated current 160 A and intended for gl fuses according to
IEC 60269-2A and include connection terminals for Cu/Al-conductors 6 - 95 mm2.
b) Size 02 according to DIN 43 620, i.e. rated current 400 A and intended for gl fuses according to
IEC 60269-2A and include connection terminals for Cu/Al-conductors 50 - 300 mm2.

8.9 TERMINAL CLAMPS

8.9.1 Reference Standards
The following standard are applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60529 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures.

60238 Compression and mechanical connectors for power cables with copper or
aluminium conductors.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 49 of 54

8.9.2 General
The terminal clamps should be intended for direct connection of copper or aluminium conductors to
the busbars in the cable pillar.
The terminal clamps shall fulfil the requirements for IP20 according to IEC 60529.
The connection and disconnection of cables shall be possible to do under live conditions with special
insulated tools (spanners). No pressing shall be needed. The connection equipment shall be
designed for both Aluminium and Cu-conductors.
The terminal clamps should be of the following three types:
a) Direct connection of Cu/Al conductor 50 - 300 mm2.
b) Direct connection of PEN-conductor Cu/Al 6 - 95 mm2.
c) Direct connection of PEN-conductor Cu/Al 50 - 300 mm2.

8.10 CABLE ATTACHMENTS

8.10.1 General
The cable attachments should be intended for fixing cables to the supporting bar in cable pillars. The
cable attachments should be of the following six (6) types:
a) 2 x 6 mm2 cable.
b) 4 x 16 mm2 cable.
c) 4 x 50 mm2 cable.
d) 4 x 95 mm2 cable.
e) 4 x 150 mm2 cable.
f) 4 x 240 mm2 cable.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 50 of 54

9 D-UC-09-001 CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

9.1 CABLE LAYING
To ensure a good environment for underground cables buried directly in the ground, the refilling mass
nearest to the cables - the "protection filling" - shall mainly consists of sand of a maximum grain size
of 8 mm. When using protection pipes, the protection filling shall have a maximum grain size of 20
mm.
Warning tapes shall be placed under the street or ground surface above and along all underground
cables.
Protection sheets shall be placed close above and along underground cables as a mechanical
protection and a second warning.
All road crossings should be done in pipes according to Figure 4 below. One empty pipe with a
minimum diameter of 100 mm should be installed at each crossing for future use.
The cables should be installed in accordance with Figures 1 – 5 below.

Fig. 1 Cable Trench – 33/11 kV cable.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 51 of 54

Fig. 2 Cable Trench – 33/11 kV. LV and signal cables in the same trench.

Fig. 3 Cable Trench – LV and signal cables

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 52 of 54

Fig. 4 Road crossing – Cable in pipe

1.2
0.55

Pipe

Fig. 5 Railway crossing – Cable in pipe

9.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

No additional payment will be made for water pumping. Excavated soil may be used as backfill if it is
suitable for compaction. Rock and soil not suitable for compaction shall, at the Contractors own cost,
be removed and replaced with a suitable backfill to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
All filling material shall be free from cinders, ashes, refuse vegetation or organic material, boulders
and other material, which in the opinion of the Engineer is unsuitable.

9.3 CABLE PULLING

Cables shall be pulled out by an approved pulling method.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the cable pulling shall be in strict conformity with the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the cable. Only specially trained personnel must be
employed who are well acquainted with the handling and running of the particular equipment to be
used.
At all times during the pulling, the cables shall be handled and protected so as not to be scratched,
nicked, abraded, or damaged in any way.
The following pulling forces should not be exceeded:
 Al-conductors: 40 N/mm2
 Cu-conductors 70 N/mm2

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 53 of 54

The minimum bending radius are:

Cable Type Single-Core Three-Core

At laying 15 x De 12 x De

When Installed 10 x De 8 x De

Where De = External diameter of the cable.

Damages to the cables shall be immediately reported to the Engineer who will instruct the Contractor
on how to proceed.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)5_Underground Cables-33-11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 54 of 54

Norconsult AS
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission
Project - AKTP

Tender Documents
ZETDC Tender No.______________________

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution

Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)8,
Distribution Drawings
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)8
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)8,
Distribution Drawings Revision: 1

Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project

PART 2 – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS (VOLUMES 2A, 2B and 2C)

PART 4 – SPECIFICATIONS FOR WORKSITE ENVIRONMENTAL,

SOCIAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT (ESHS) (VOLUME 4)

2020-08-09 Assignment no.: 6035357 7, GIFP, Gaborone, Botswana

1 09 August 2020 Part 2: Employer’s Requirements, Distribution Lines & TRK OLO OLO
Substations (Volume 2C) - Section VI(C)8, Distribution
Drawings
Revision Date: Description Compiled Checked Accepted

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)8_Distribution Drawings.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 2 of 9

Norconsult AS
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)8
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)8,
Distribution Drawings Revision: 1

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations

(Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)8 – Distribution Drawings
Contents
C1: Detailed Scope of Works
Index Contents
1.0 D-S-01-001 Scope of Works
C2: Distribution General Specifications
Index Contents
1.0 D-GS-01-001 General
2.0 D-GS-02-001 Mechanical Design of Overhead Lines
3.0 D-GS-03-001 Poles and Crossarms
4.0 D-GS-04-001 Foundations
5.0 D-GS-05-001 Grounding
6.0 D-SS-06-001 Environmental Requirements
C3: Medium Voltage Overhead Lines 33-11kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-MV-01-001 General
2.0 D-MV-02-001 Insulators and Stays
3.0 D-MV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-MV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-MV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-MV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C4: Low Voltage Overhead Lines 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-LV-01-001 General
2.0 D-LV-02-001 Clamps and Stays
3.0 D-LV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-LV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-LV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-LV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C5: Underground Cables 33-1kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-UC-01-001 General
2.0 D-UC-02-001 33kV and 11kV Underground Cables
3.0 D-UC-03-001 LV Underground Cables
4.0 D-UC-04-001 Joints and Terminations
5.0 D-UC-05-001 Cable Lugs
6.0 D-UC-06-001 Warning Tape
7.0 D-UC-07-001 Protection Sheets and Pipes
8.0 D-UC-08-001 Cable Pillars
9.0 D-UC-09-001 Construction Specifications
C6: Substations 33/11 – 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-SS-01-001 General
2.0 D-SS-02-001 Power Transformers
3.0 D-SS-03-001 Pole Mounted Transformers
4.0 D-SS-04-001 Prefabricated Compact Type Substations

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)8_Distribution Drawings.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 3 of 9

C7: Technical Schedules

Index Contents
1.0 Technical Schedules - Preamble
2.0 33kV Transformers
3.0 11kV Transformers
4.0 33kV Insulators
5.0 11kV Insulators
6.0 0.4kV Insulators
7.0 ACSR Conductors
8.0 HDA (AAC) Conductors
9.0 Aerial Bundled Conductors
10.0 Wood Poles
11.0 Construction
C8: Distribution Drawings – To be Provided by the Contractor
Item No. Description
Distribution Line Drawings – To be Provided by the Contractor
33/18 Design 33kV Poles, Crossarms, Stays, Hardware & Fittings
11/30 Design 11kV Pole, Crossarms, Stays, Hardware & Fittings
0.4kV HDA 0.4kV Poles, Stays, Hardware & Fittings (For HDA/AAC Conductors)
0.4kV ABC 0.4kV Poles, Stays, Hardware & Fittings (For Aerial Bundled Conductors)
Sag and Tension Charts – To be Provided by the Contractor
Substation Drawings – To be Provided by the Contractor

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)8_Distribution Drawings.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 4 of 9

Table of Contents

C8 – DISTRIBUTION DRAWINGS 6

1 DISTRIBUTION DRAWINGS 7
1.1 Preamble 7
1.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................. 7
1.2 Distribution Line drawings 7
1.2.1 33kV Poles, Crossarms, Stays, Hardware and Fittings ........................................................................ 7
1.2.2 11kV Poles, Crossarms, Stays, Hardware and Fittings ........................................................................ 8
1.2.3 LV Line Drawings ................................................................................................................................. 9
1.2.3.1 For Aerial Bundled Conductors (ABC) 9
1.2.3.2 For All Aluminium (AAC) or Hard Drawn (HDA) Condours 9
1.2.4 Sag and Tension Charts ....................................................................................................................... 9
1.2.5 Substation Drawings ............................................................................................................................. 9

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)8_Distribution Drawings.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 5 of 9

C8 – DISTRIBUTION DRAWINGS

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)8_Distribution Drawings.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 6 of 9

1 DISTRIBUTION DRAWINGS
1.1 PREAMBLE
1.1.1 General
For an evaluation of tenders to be made, Tenderers (Contractors) shall supply drawings marked
“Issued for Tender Purposes Only”. Detailed drawings will need to be provided by the successful
Tenderer at detailed design stage.
Tenders supplied without drawings will cause the Technical Proposal to be regarded as incomplete.
The drawings supplied by the Employer/Engineer with this tender are only conceptual, and tenderers
shall refer to the drawings in coming up with their drawings to be issued with their tender submittals.
Where any of the Employer/Engineer’s conceptual drawings have dimensions, these shall be verified
by the Tenderer/Contractor, in accordance with the requirements set out in Section VI(C)7 - Technical
Schedules.
Particular requirements shall also be obtained from the Employer before commencement of detailed
manufacturing or placement of orders with Suppliers.
The design assumes that the 11kV and 33kV lines shall be constructed with a continuous earthwire
down the pole (without gaps) to prevent shattering of the pole.

1.2 DISTRIBUTION LINE DRAWINGS

The Contractor shall produce drawings for the following:

1.2.1 33kV Poles, Crossarms, Stays, Hardware and Fittings

The following drawings are suggested:
33kV Pole Types
 33kV Rural Intermediate Mast
 33kV Rural Intermediate 5 – 20o Angle Mast
 33kV Rural Swinging 20 – 75o Angle Mast
 33kV Rural Vertical Strain Mast 30 – 90o Angle
 33kV Rural H-Pole Strain Section Mast 0-5o Angle
 33kV Rural H-Pole Strain Terminal Mast
 33kV Rural H-Pole Mast 5 – 45o Angle
 33kV Rural H-Pole Mast – Strut Assembly
33kV Pole Staying Details
 33kV Intermediate Poles Wind Stays
 33kV Intermediate 5 – 30o Angle Structure
 33kV Swinging Angle Mast
 33kV Vertical Strain
 33kV H-Pole Strain
 33kV H-Pole Terminal
 33kV H-Pole Angle
 Method of Excavation for Stays
 Method of Bisecting Line Angle

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)8_Distribution Drawings.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 7 of 9

 33kV Stays for Single Pole Strain Mast

Cross Arm and Pole Hardware
 H-Strain Cross Arm
 Cross-Arm for Intermediate Pole
 Cross-Arm for H-Pole Angle up to 45o
 Pole Top Insulator Bracket
 Diagonal Cradle Guard
 H-Pole Cradle Guard
1.2.2 11kV Poles, Crossarms, Stays, Hardware and Fittings
11kV Pole Types
 11kV Rural Intermediate Mast
 11kV Rural Intermediate Mast up to 15o Angle
 11kV Rural Swinging Angle Mast 15-90o Angle
 11kV Rural Single Pole up to 30o Angle
 11kV H-Pole Strain Section Mast 0-5o Angle
 11kV Rural H-Pole Strain Mast 5 – 90o Angle
 11kV Rural H-Pole Tee-Off Mast
 11kV Rural Single Pole Tee-Off
 11kV Rural Vertical (3-Way) Mast 90o Angle
 11kV Rural Vertical (4-Way) Mast 90o Angle
 11kV Rural Vertical Mast 90o Angle
 11kV Rural Single Pole – Strut Assembly
 11kV Rural Single Pole – Outrigger Assembly
11kV Staying Details
 11kV Intermediate Pole Stay Mast
 11kV Intermediate Structure - 30o Angle
 Swinging Angle
 Vertical Strain
 H-Pole Strain
 H-Pole Terminal
 H-Pole Angle
 Method of Excavation for Stays
 Method of Bisecting Line Angle
 Stays for Single Pole Strain Mast
 Jumper Connection Details
11kV Crossarm and Pole Hardware
 H-Strain Cross-Arm
 Intermediate Pole Cross Arm
 H-Pole Angle up to 45o Crossarm
 Pole Top Intermediate Bracket
 Diagonal Cradle Guard
 H-Pole Cradle Guard
 11kV Wood Cross-Arm for Intermediate Pole
 100x50 Channel Pole for Strain Cross-Arm
 Strain Steel Cross-Arms (2600 x 100 x 5)
 Cross-Arm for H-Pole Mounting of 11kV “D” fuses Transformers and Arresters
 Steel Cross Arm Brace for Rural Line
 16mm Eye Bolts (11kV and 33kV Lines)
 Spacer Bolt For Double Wood Cross-Arm

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)8_Distribution Drawings.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 8 of 9

 Wood Pole Washers

 Wood Pole Cap
 Pole Top Insulator Bracket
1.2.3 LV Line Drawings
1.2.3.1 For Aerial Bundled Conductors (ABC)
 Dead-End Assembly (ABC)
 Large Angle Assembly Over 45o Angle (ABC)
 Suspension Assembly ABC)

1.2.3.2 For All Aluminium (AAC) or Hard Drawn (HDA) Conductors

 Suspension Assembly (HDA Conductors)
 Angle Assembly (HDA Conductors – 0 to 45o)
 Angle Assembly (HDA Conductors - 45 to 90o)
 Dead End Assembly (HDA Conductors)
 LV Lines Strut Assembly
 LV Lines Outrigger Assembly
1.2.4 Sag and Tension Charts
The Contractor shall produce sag and tension charts for the following conductors:
 Type ACSR (SCA) 25mm2 (Gopher)
 Type ACSR (SCA) 50mm2 (Rabbit)
 Type ACSR (SCA) 75mm2 (Raccoon)
 Type ACSR (SCA) 100mm2 (Dog)
 Type ACSR (SCA) 150mm2 (Wolf)
 Type HDA (ACC) 100mm2 (Wasp)
 Type HDA (ACC) 50mm2 (Ant)
 Aerial Bundled Conductors
1.2.5 Substation Drawings
 Minimum Clearance Required for 11kV and 33kV Pole Mounted Substations
 33kV H-Pole, Pole Mounted Transformer (Up to 350kVA)
 11kV H-Pole, Pole Mounted Transformer (Up to 350kVA)
 H-Pole Substation with Transformer Mounted on Platform
 Cross-Arm for H-Pole Mounted 11kV “D” Fuses, Transformers and Arresters
 Terminations Using PVC SWA PVC Cable
 Arrangement of Rural Substation Approved Meter Cubicle for Consumers Installation
 Base for Pad Mounted Transformer (>350kVA Rated Poles, Layout)
 Transformer Foundation, 5MVA
 Fence for Double Pole Mounted Transformer
 Fence for Pad Mounted Transformer

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)8_Distribution Drawings.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 9 of 9

Norconsult AS
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission
Project - AKTP

Tender Documents
ZETDC Tender No.______________________

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution

Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)1,
Detailed Scope of Works
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)1
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)1,
Detailed Scope of Works Revision: 1

Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project

Documents Structure
PART 1 – BIDDING PROCEDURES (VOLUME 1)
Section I: Instructions to Bidders (ITB)
Section II: Bid Data Sheets
Section III: Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
Section IV: Bidding Forms
Section IVA: Price Schedules with Preamble
Section V: Eligible Countries
PART 2 – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS (VOLUMES 2A, 2B and 2C)
Section VI(A) - Employer’s Requirements, Substations (Volume 2A)
• A1: General Technical Specifications
• A2: Particular Technical Specifications (Schedules)
• A3: Drawings (Substations)
Section VI(B) - Employer’s Requirements, 132kV Transmission Line (Volume 2B)
• B1: General Technical Specifications
• B2: Particular Technical Specifications (Schedules)
• B3: 132kV Line Drawings
• B4: Line Route Images
Section VI(C) - Employer’s Requirements, Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C)
• C1: Detailed Scope of Works
• C2: Distribution General Specifications
• C3: Medium Voltage Overhead Lines – 33-11kV
• C4: Low Voltage Overhead Lines – 0.4kV
• C5: Underground Cables – 33-11kV
• C6: Substations 33/11-0.4kV
• C7: Planning Guidelines
• C8: Technical Schedules
• C9. Distribution Drawings
PART 3 – CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS
(VOLUME 3)
Section VII: General Conditions of Contract (GC)
Section VIII: Particular Conditions of Contract with Appendices
Section IX: Contract Forms

PART 4 – SPECIFICATIONS FOR WORKSITE ENVIRONMENTAL,

SOCIAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT (ESHS) (VOLUME 4)

2020-08-09 Assignment no.: 6035357 7, GIFP, Gaborone, Botswana

1 09 August 2020 Part 2: Employer’s Requirements, Distribution Lines & TRK OLO OLO
Substations (Volume 2C) - Section VI(C)1 – Detailed
Scope of Works
Revision Date: Description Compiled Checked Accepted

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)1_Dist.Scope of Works.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 2 of 12

Norconsult AS
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)1
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)1,
Detailed Scope of Works Revision: 1

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations

(Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)1 – Detailed Scope of Works
Contents
C1: Detailed Scope of Works
Index Contents
1.0 D-S-01-001 Scope of Works
C2: Distribution General Specifications
Index Contents
1.0 D-GS-01-001 General
2.0 D-GS-02-001 Mechanical Design of Overhead Lines
3.0 D-GS-03-001 Poles and Crossarms
4.0 D-GS-04-001 Foundations
5.0 D-GS-05-001 Grounding
6.0 D-SS-06-001 Environmental Requirements
C3: Medium Voltage Overhead Lines 33-11kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-MV-01-001 General
2.0 D-MV-02-001 Insulators and Stays
3.0 D-MV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-MV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-MV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-MV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C4: Low Voltage Overhead Lines 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-LV-01-001 General
2.0 D-LV-02-001 Clamps and Stays
3.0 D-LV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-LV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-LV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-LV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C5: Underground Cables 33-11kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-UC-01-001 General
2.0 D-UC-02-001 33kV and 11kV Underground Cables
3.0 D-UC-03-001 LV Underground Cables
4.0 D-UC-04-001 Joints and Terminations
5.0 D-UC-05-001 Cable Lugs
6.0 D-UC-06-001 Warning Tape
7.0 D-UC-07-001 Protection Sheets and Pipes
8.0 D-UC-08-001 Cable Pillars
9.0 D-UC-09-001 Construction Specifications
C6: Substations 33/11 – 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-SS-01-001 General
2.0 D-SS-02-001 Power Transformers
3.0 D-SS-03-001 Pole Mounted Transformers
4.0 D-SS-04-001 Prefabricated Compact Type Substations

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)1_Dist.Scope of Works.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 3 of 12

C7: Planning Guidelines

Index Contents
1.0 D-PG-01-001 Network Planning - Introduction
2.0 D-PG-02-001 Network Design Criteria
3.0 D-PG-03-001 Quality of Supply
4.0 D-PG-04-001 Rural and Urban Planning
5.0 D-PG-05-001 Planning Procedure
C8: Technical Schedules
Index Contents
1.0 Technical Schedules - Preamble
2.0 33kV Transformers
3.0 11kV Transformers
4.0 33kV Insulators
5.0 11kV Insulators
6.0 ACSR Conductors
7.0 Aerial Bundled Conductors
8.0 Wood Poles
9.0 Construction
10.0 Environmental Protection Requirements
C9: Distribution Drawings
Drg No. Description
33kV Pole Types
DL3318-01-01 33kV Rural Intermediate Mast
DL3318-01-02 33kV Rural Intermediate 5 – 20o Angle Mast
DL3318-01-03 33kV Rural Swinging 20 – 75o Angle Mast
DL3318-01-04 33kV Rural Vertical Strain Mast 30 – 90o Angle
DL3318-01-05 33kV Rural H-Pole Strain Section Mast 0-5o Angle
DL3318-01-06 33kV Rural H-Pole Strain Terminal Mast
DL3318-01-07 33kV Rural H-Pole Mast 5 – 45o Angle
33kV Pole Staying Details
DL3318-02-01 33kV Intermediate Poles Wind Stays
DL3318-02-02 33kV Intermediate 5 – 30o Angle Structure
DL3318-02-03 33kV Swinging Angle Mast
DL3318-02-04 33kV Vertical Strain
DL3318-02-05 33kV H-Pole Strain
DL3318-02-06 33kV H-Pole Terminal
DL3318-02-07 33kV H-Pole Angle
DL3318-02-08 Method of Excavation for Stays
DL3318-02-09 Method of Bisecting Line Angle
DL3318-02-10 33kV Stays for Single Pole Strain Mast
Cross Arm and Pole Hardware
DL3318-03-01 H-Strain Cross Arm
DL3318-03-02 Cross-Arm for Intermediate Pole
DL3318-03-03 Cross-Arm for H-Pole Angle up to 45o
DL3318-03-04 Pole Top Insulator Bracket
DL3318-03-05 Diagonal Cradle Guard
DL3318-03-06 H-Pole Cradle Guard

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)1_Dist.Scope of Works.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 4 of 12

Drg No. Description

11kV Pole Types
DL1130-01-01 11kV Rural Intermediate Mast
DL1130-01-02 11kV Rural Intermediate Mast up to 15o Angle
DL1130-01-03 11kV Rural Swinging Angle Mast 15-90o Angle
DL1130-01-04A 11kV Rural Single Pole up to 30o Angle
DL1130-01-05A 11kV H-Pole Strain Section Mast 0-5o Angle
DL1130-01-06A 11kV Rural H-Pole Strain Mast 5 – 90o Angle
DL1130-01-07 11kV Rural H-Pole Tee-Off Mast
DL1130-01-08 11kV Rural Single Pole Tee-Off
DL1130-01-09 11kV Rural Vertical (3-Way) Mast 90o Angle
DL1130-01-10 11kV Rural Vertical (4-Way) Mast 90o Angle
DL1130-01-11 11kV Rural Vertical Mast 90o Angle

11kV Staying Details

DL1130-02-01 11kV Intermediate Pole Stay Mast
DL1130-02-02 11kV Intermediate Structure - 30o Angle
DL1130-02-03 Swinging Angle
DL1130-02-04 Vertical Strain
DL1130-02-05 H-Pole Strain
DL1130-02-06 H-Pole Terminal
DL1130-02-07 H-Pole Angle
DL1130-02-08 Method of Excavation for Stays
DL1130-02-09 Method of Bisecting Line Angle
DL1130-02-10 Stays for Single Pole Strain Mast
DL1130-02-11 Jumper Connection Details
11kV Crossarm and Pole Hardware
DL1130-03-01 H-Strain Cross-Arm
DL1130-03-02 Intermediate Pole Cross Arm
DL1130-03-03 H-Pole Angle up to 45o Crossarm
DL1130-03-04 Pole Top Intermediate Bracket
D2118-2 Diagonal Cradle Guard
D2118-3 H-Pole Cradle Guard
DL04-01-01 11kV Wood Cross-Arm for Intermediate Pole
DL04-02-01 100x50 Channel Pole for Strain Cross-Arm
DL04-02-02 Strain Steel Cross-Arms (2600 x 100 x 5)
DL04-02-03 Cross-Arm for H-Pole Mounting of 11kV “D” fuses Transformers and Arresters
DL04-03-01 Steel Cross Arm Brace for Rural Line
DL05-01-01 16mm Eye Bolts (11kV and 33kV Lines)
DL05-01-02 Spacer Bolt For Double Wood Cross-Arm
DL05-02-01 Wood Pole Washers
DL05-02-02 Wood Pole Cap
DL05-03-01 Pole Top Insulator Bracket

SWER Pole Types

SW01-01-01 Poles
SW01-02-01 Pole Top Bracket

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)1_Dist.Scope of Works.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 5 of 12

Drg No. Description

LV Pole Types
D1.2 Reticulation Map
LT-01-01 Dead-End Assembly
LT-02-01 Large Angle Assembly Over 45o Angle
LT-03-01 Suspension Assembly
Sag and Tension Charts
ST-01-01 Type ACSR 25mm2 (Gopher)
ST-02-01 Type ACSR 50mm2 (Rabbit)
ST-03-01 Type ACSR 75mm2 (Raccoon)
ST-04-01 Type ACSR 100mm2 (Dog)
ST-05-01 Type ACSR 150mm2 (Wolf)
ST-06-01 Type ACSR 175mm2 (Lynx)
ST-07-01 Type ACSR 200mm2 (Panther)
ST-08-01 Type HDA 100mm2 (Wasp)
ST-09-01 Type HDA 50mm2 (Ant)
ST-10-01 Aerial Bundled Conductors
Substation Drawings
D2014-1 Minimum Clearance Required for 11kV and 33kV Pole Mounted Substations
D2014-2 Four Pole Substation for Transformers up to 750kVA, which cannot be
accommodated on H-Poles
D2014-3 H-Pole Substation with Transformer Mounted on Hanger Brackets
D2014-4 H-Pole Substation with Transformer Mounted on Platform
D2014-5 Standard Wood Pole Mounted Substation (Single Pole Strain – Mounted on
Hanger)
D2014-6 Standard Wood Pole Mounted Substation (Single Pole Strain – Mounted on
Hanger)
D2014-7 Standard Wood Pole Mounted Substation (Single Pole Strain – Mounted on
Hanger)
D2014-8 Standard Wood Pole Mounted Substation (Single Pole Strain – Mounted on
Hanger)
D612-8 Cross-Arm for H-Pole Mounted 11kV “D” Fuses, Transformers and Arresters
D577-22, Rev 1 Terminations Using PVC SWA PVC Cable
Arrangement of Rural Substation Approved Meter Cubicle for Consumers
D2008-6, Rev 1
Installation
DS-01-01 Base for Pad Mounted Transformer, Layout
DS-02-01 Fence for Single Pole Mounted Transformer
DS-03-01 Fence for Double Pole and Pad Mounted Transformer

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)1_Dist.Scope of Works.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 6 of 12

Table of Contents

C1 – DISTRIBUTION SCOPE OF WORKS 8

1 T-S-01-001 SCOPE OF WORKS 9

1.1 Introduction 9
1.1.1 The Country .......................................................................................................................................... 9
1.1.2 Zimbabwe Electricity Transmission & Distribution Company (ZETDC) ............................................... 10
1.1.3 Background ........................................................................................................................................ 10
1.1.4 Overall Project Scope - Overview ....................................................................................................... 10
1.1.5 Project Objective ................................................................................................................................ 10
1.2 Distribution Scope of Works 11
1.2.1 3 x 33kV Lines from Existing Karoi 33/11kV – Proposed Karoi 132/33kV Substation ........................ 11
1.2.2 11kV Lines .......................................................................................................................................... 11
1.2.3 LV Lines from Existing Karoi 33/11kV – Proposed Karoi 132/33kV Substation ................................. 12
1.2.4 Distribution Materials Supply .............................................................................................................. 12

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)1_Dist.Scope of Works.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 7 of 12

C1 – DISTRIBUTION SCOPE OF WORKS

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)1_Dist.Scope of Works.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 8 of 12

1 T-S-01-001 SCOPE OF WORKS

1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 The Country
Zimbabwe, officially the Republic of Zimbabwe (formerly Rhodesia), is a landlocked country located
in Southern Africa, between the Zambezi and Limpopo Rivers, bordered by South Africa, Botswana,
Zambia and Mozambique. The capital and largest city is Harare. The second largest city is Bulawayo.
The country has over 14 million people and 16 official languages, with English, Shona, and Ndebele
the most common.
Since the 11th century, the country has been the site of several organised states and kingdoms as
well as a major route for migration and trade. The country became a sovereign state after gaining
independence from Britain, after a fairly protracted war of liberation, which culminated in a peace
agreement that established universal enfranchisement and de jure sovereignty as Zimbabwe on 18th
April 1980.
The sovereign state is a member of the United Nations, the Southern African Development
Community (SADC), the African Union (AU), and the Common Market for Eastern and Southern
Africa (COMESA). Minerals, gold, platinum (some of the world’s largest reserves) and agriculture are
the main foreign exports of Zimbabwe. Tourism also plays a key role in its economy. Diamonds were
discovered in the country in 2006 (Marange diamond fields) and these, with other minerals, make
the mining sector very lucrative.
Zimbabwe has several major tourist attractions namely: Victoria Falls on the Zambezi, which are
shared with Zambia; the Victoria Falls National Park (one of the eight main national parks in the
country), the largest of which is Hwange National Park; the Eastern Highlands (a series of
mountainous areas near the border with Mozambique) including Mount Nyangani (the highest peak
in Zimbabwe, at 2,593 m (8,507 ft), as well as the Vumba Mountains and the Nyanga National Park
(where World's View is also located). The country also has a number of ancient ruined cities built in
a unique dry stone style. Among the most famous of these are the Great Zimbabwe ruins
in Masvingo. Other ruins include Khami Ruins, Dhlo-Dhlo and Naletale. Further there are the Matobo
Hills (an area of granite kopjes and wooded valleys commencing some 35 km (22 mi) south
of Bulawayo. Zimbabwe has relatively well-developed national infrastructure and a long-standing
tradition of promoting research and development (R&D), and also has a well-developed education
system, with one in 11 adults holding a tertiary degree. Due to large investments in education since
independence, Zimbabwe has the highest adult literacy rate in Africa which in 2013 was 90.70%.
The energy supply options have a mixture of hydroelectricity, coal and renewable sources. The grid
is well developed and has been extended to rural business and government administrative areas.
Much of the country’s electricity is produced at the Kariba Dam Hydroelectric Power Station (about
750 MW), at Hwange Thermal Power Station which has an installed capacity of 920 MW, and at
three other minor coal fired stations. The country also still has quite a lot of hydropower potential
especially along the Zambezi River. Solar power has enormous potential both in small and large
scale. Wind and biogas energy are other possibilities. To augment power supplies, the country
currently imports power from the Southern African Power Pool (SAPP), in which Zimbabwe is also a
member, through regional interconnected transmission networks.
The transportation infrastructure (mainly, roads, railways, aviation, and pipelines), is well developed.
The roads network is over 76,000km long, with a rail network of over 3,000km (Cape gauge
1,067mm), ten airports (three of them international, namely Harare, Bulawayo and Victoria Falls).
With respect to pipeline transport, there is a 287km long oil pipeline running from the Beira port in

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)1_Dist.Scope of Works.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 9 of 12

Mozambique to the Feruka Oil Refinery and ultimately to Harare, where fuel is then distributed
nationally. Water transport is dominated by waterborne tourism, leisure activities, commercial and
small-scale fishing and sports on the Kariba Dam, the Zambezi River and other inland large dams.
There is however potential for water transport.

1.1.2 Zimbabwe Electricity Transmission & Distribution Company (ZETDC)

The Zimbabwe Electricity Transmission and Distribution Company (ZETDC) is a Government owned
company responsible for the development, operations and maintenance of the transmission and
distribution network in Zimbabwe. In addition, ZETDC is responsible for meter reading, billing, cash
collection, and credit control of the retail business. The transmission system is made up of 420kV,
330kV, 220kV, 132kV, 110kV, 88kV and 66 kV lines and substations. The distribution system is made
up of 33kV, 22kV, 11kV and 380/220V lines, including medium and low voltage substations. The
transmission and distribution lines have a total length of over 130 000km and close to 31 000
substations servicing over 600 000 customers.

1.1.3 Background
The Karoi load is currently being supplied through 3 x 33kV, 54km feeders from Mhangura 88/33kV
substation which is an old substation. The 3 feeders also supply Tengwe, Magunje and Karoi North
loads with a lot of t-offs along the way. The network is characterized by overloaded 11kV and 33kV
lines. As a result of the existing capacity constraints, new customers can no longer be connected.
The line has an existing load of 12MVA with a suppressed demand of about 8MVA. Considering load
projections for areas in and around Karoi, a 33kV network can no longer sustain the load demands,
hence the proposal for a new 132kV Alaska- Karoi line and a substation at Karoi

1.1.4 Overall Project Scope - Overview

The Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Reinforcement Project (AKTP) consists of the design,
supply, installation and commissioning of:

• A new 132 kV line bay at existing Alaska 132/88kV substation, fully equipped;
• A new 132kV line (approximately 85km long) from Alaska Substation to a new 132/33kV
substation at Karoi;
• A new 132/33kV substation at Karoi;
• Connection of 3 existing 33kV lines to the new substation at Karoi, supply and construction;
• Supply and construction of 23km of new 11kV lines and installation of associated distribution
transformers;
• Supply and construction of 13km of new LV lines;
• Supply of distribution materials for refurbishment of existing MV and LV distribution networks
including distribution transformers;
• Supply of LV materials for connection of 4800 customers, inclusive of conductors, cables,
fittings, pre-paid meters, poles, fittings and other associated materials necessary for complete
supply.
1.1.5 Project Objective
The objective of the project is to strengthen and increase the country’s sub- transmission network
capacity resulting in increased reliability and quality of electricity supply in and around Karoi area
inclusive of LV reticulation, resuscitation and extension of 11kV lines and downstream 33kV network,
required to improve the quality of electricity supply within Karoi town, Makonde and Hurungwe
districts, thereby enabling increased economic activity for the local populace. Further, the project will
enable ZETDC to connect new consumers to their electricity grid and also improve environmental
quality by the use of cleaner electricity, replacing the current dependency on diesel generators and
firewood.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)1_Dist.Scope of Works.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 10 of 12

1.2 DISTRIBUTION SCOPE OF WORKS

This part of the Tender or Contract Document covers the Technical Specifications for the proposed
Distribution Works. The scope of works shall include materials supply, detail design, manufacture,
transport, installation and commissioning of the components to be furnished, complete in accordance
with the Distribution General Specifications and Technical Schedules and summarised as follows:

• Rerouting of 3 x 33kV lines from existing Karoi 33/11kV substation to be supplied from the
proposed Karoi 132/33kV substation located in Mashonaland West Province, Zimbabwe;
• Supply and construction of 23km of new 11kV lines in Karoi town;
• Supply of materials for 13km of new LV lines in Karoi town (Client will construct);

• Supply of distribution materials for refurbishment of existing MV and LV distribution networks

(Client will construct);
• Supply and installation of 33/11kV, 33/0.4kV and 11/0.4kV distribution transformers and
associated equipment;
• Supply of LV materials for connection of 4800 customers, conductors, cables, fittings, pre-paid
meters, wood poles, fittings and other associated materials necessary for complete supply
(Client will construct).
The Client will be involved in the construction of some of the reticulation works within Karoi town,
Makonde and Hurungwe districts.

1.2.1 3 x 33kV Lines from Existing Karoi 33/11kV – Proposed Karoi 132/33kV
Substation
The 33kV distribution lines will consist of three (3) single circuit line strung with three (3) conductors
per phase of ACSR (SCA) Dog as specified in the Technical Schedules in this document. .
The works to be carried out for the 33kV distribution lines under this Contract will include but not be
limited to; e.g.

• Detailed line survey (approximately 6km for the three lines);

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)1_Dist.Scope of Works.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 11 of 12

• Detailed line survey;

• Wood pole structure plotting, including sagging tables;
• Wood pole structure site pegging and profiling;
• Bush clearing
• All supply, transport and installation of wood poles, conductors, earthwires, crossarms,
insulators and fittings, stay wires, hardware and fittings, and pole earthing materials
• Supply and installation of distribution transformers and associated equipment
• Testing and commissioning together with the Employer
• All other supplies or works as set out in these Tender Documents
• Compliance with the Environmental Protection Requirements
• Any other works deemed necessary to ensure the 11kV distribution lines can be operated and
maintained in a safe and environmentally friendly way.
1.2.3 LV Lines from Existing Karoi 33/11kV – Proposed Karoi 132/33kV Substation
The LV distribution lines will consist of 13km of overhead line strung with AAC or HDA (hard drawn
aluminium) conductors.
The works to be carried out for the LV distribution lines under this Contract will include but not be
limited to; e.g.
• All supply and transport to site of wood poles, conductors, earthwires, crossarms, insulators
and fittings, stay wires, hardware and fittings, and pole earthing materials
• All other supplies or works as set out in these Tender Documents
1.2.4 Distribution Materials Supply
Distribution materials to be supplied include conductors, transformers, cables, fittings, pre-paid
meters and other associated materials quantities of which are as stated in the price schedules for
distribution components.

All works shall be executed as described in the specifications and/or as shown on the drawings.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)1_Dist.Scope of Works.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 12 of 12

Norconsult AS
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission
Project - AKTP

Tender Documents
ZETDC Tender No.______________________

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution

Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)2,
Distribution General Specifications
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)2
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)2,
Distribution General Specifications Revision: 1

Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project

PART 2 – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS (VOLUMES 2A, 2B and 2C)

Section VI(A) - Employer’s Requirements, Substations (Volume 2A)
• A1: General Technical Specifications
• A2: Particular Technical Specifications (Schedules)
• A3: Drawings (Substations)
Section VI(B) - Employer’s Requirements, 132kV Transmission Line (Volume 2B)
• B1: General Technical Specifications
• B2: Particular Technical Specifications (Schedules)
• B3: 132kV Line Drawings
• B4: Line Route Images
Section VI(C) - Employer’s Requirements, Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C)
• C1: Detailed Scope of Works
• C2: Distribution General Specifications
• C3: Medium Voltage Overhead Lines – 33-11kV
• C4: Low Voltage Overhead Lines – 0.4kV
• C5: Underground Cables – 33-11kV
• C6: Substations 33/11-0.4kV
• C7: Technical Schedules
• C8. Distribution Drawings
PART 3 – CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS
(VOLUME 3)
Section VII: General Conditions of Contract (GC)
Section VIII: Particular Conditions of Contract with Appendices
Section IX: Contract Forms

PART 4 – SPECIFICATIONS FOR WORKSITE ENVIRONMENTAL,

SOCIAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT (ESHS) (VOLUME 4)

2020-08-09 Assignment no.: 6035357 7, GIFP, Gaborone, Botswana

1 09 August 2020 Part 2: Employer’s Requirements, Distribution Lines & TRK OLO OLO
Substations (Volume 2C) - Section VI(C)2 – Distribution
General Specifications (revised)
Revision Date: Description Compiled Checked Accepted

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 2 of 62

Norconsult AS
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)2
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)2,
Distribution General Specifications Revision: 1

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations

(Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)2 – Distribution General Specifications
Contents
C1: Detailed Scope of Works
Index Contents
1.0 D-S-01-001 Scope of Works
C2: Distribution General Specifications
Index Contents
1.0 D-GS-01-001 General
2.0 D-GS-02-001 Mechanical Design of Overhead Lines
3.0 D-GS-03-001 Poles and Crossarms
4.0 D-GS-04-001 Foundations
5.0 D-GS-05-001 Grounding
6.0 D-SS-06-001 Environmental Requirements
C3: Medium Voltage Overhead Lines 33-11kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-MV-01-001 General
2.0 D-MV-02-001 Insulators and Stays
3.0 D-MV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-MV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-MV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-MV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C4: Low Voltage Overhead Lines 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-LV-01-001 General
2.0 D-LV-02-001 Clamps and Stays
3.0 D-LV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-LV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-LV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-LV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C5: Underground Cables 33-11kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-UC-01-001 General
2.0 D-UC-02-001 33kV and 11kV Underground Cables
3.0 D-UC-03-001 LV Underground Cables
4.0 D-UC-04-001 Joints and Terminations
5.0 D-UC-05-001 Cable Lugs
6.0 D-UC-06-001 Warning Tape
7.0 D-UC-07-001 Protection Sheets and Pipes
8.0 D-UC-08-001 Cable Pillars
9.0 D-UC-09-001 Construction Specifications
C6: Substations 33/11 – 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-SS-01-001 General
2.0 D-SS-02-001 Power Transformers
3.0 D-SS-03-001 Pole Mounted Transformers
4.0 D-SS-04-001 Prefabricated Compact Type Substations

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 3 of 62

C7: Technical Schedules

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 4 of 62

Table of Contents

C2 – DISTRIBUTION GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 9

1 D-GS-01-001 GENERAL 10
1.1 Standards 10
1.2 Plant and Equipment 10
1.3 Workmanship 10
1.4 Design and Engineering 10
1.5 Climatic Conditions 10
1.6 General Electric Data 11
1.7 Documentation 11
1.7.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 11
1.7.2 Documentation for Design and Manufacture ...................................................................................... 12
1.7.3 Documentation for Installation ............................................................................................................ 12
1.7.4 As-Built Documentation ...................................................................................................................... 13
1.7.4.1 General 13
1.7.4.2 General Manuals 13
1.7.4.3 Network Design Documentation 13
1.7.4.4 Material Documentation 13
1.8 Manufacture 14
1.9 Site Regulations, Safety and Environmental 14
1.10 Quality Control 14
1.11 Site and Commissioning Tests 15
1.12 Packing and Transport Marking 15
1.13 Corrosion Protection and Painting 15
1.13.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 15
1.13.2 Galvanizing ......................................................................................................................................... 15
1.14 Wayleaves 16
1.15 Line Survey 16
1.16 Bush Clearing and Access Road 16
1.17 Commissioning of the Works 17
1.18 Maintenance Period 17

2 MECHANICAL DESIGN OF OVERHEAD LINES 18

2.1 Load Combinations 18
2.2 Wind Load on Poles 18
2.3 Load factors 18
2.3.1 Poles .................................................................................................................................................. 18
2.3.2 Insulators and Fittings ........................................................................................................................ 18
2.3.3 Conductors ......................................................................................................................................... 19
2.4 Loading Diagrams, Application Charts and Sag and Tension Charts 19
2.5 Clearances 19
2.5.1 Conductor Clearance to Ground and Objects on the Ground ............................................................. 19
2.5.2 Distances to Roads and Railways ...................................................................................................... 20
2.5.3 Airports ............................................................................................................................................... 20
2.5.4 Conductor Configuration and Phase Distances for 33 kV and 11 kV Lines with Bare Conductors ..... 20
2.6 Crossing of Obstacles 21
2.7 Pole Location 21

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 5 of 62

3 POLES AND CROSSARMS 22

3.1 General 22
3.2 Materials 22
3.3 Pole Types and Duties 22
3.3.1 Pole Types.......................................................................................................................................... 22
3.3.2 Pole Duties ......................................................................................................................................... 22
3.4 Contents of Drawings 22
3.5 Design Requirements, Poles 22
3.5.1 Wooden Poles .................................................................................................................................... 22
3.5.2 Concrete Poles ................................................................................................................................... 23
3.5.3 Steel Poles ......................................................................................................................................... 23
3.6 Manufacturing Requirements 24
3.6.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 24
3.6.2 Markings ............................................................................................................................................. 24
3.6.3 Pole Signs .......................................................................................................................................... 24
3.6.4 Pole Tests........................................................................................................................................... 24
3.6.5 Routine Tests ..................................................................................................................................... 24
3.7 Bolted Crossarms and Brackets 24
3.7.1 Screws, Nuts and Washers ................................................................................................................ 24
3.8 Crossarm design 25
3.8.1 Un-symmetrical Cross arm (if applicable) ........................................................................................... 25
3.8.2 Symmetrical Cross arm ...................................................................................................................... 26

4 FOUNDATIONS 27
4.1 General 27
4.2 Soil Classification 27
4.3 Ground Excavations 28
4.4 Anchoring of Wooden Poles in Firm Soil Without Wedging 28
28
4.5 Anchoring of Wooden Poles in Firm Soil and on Rock with wedging 28
4.6 Anchoring of Wooden Poles in Soil of Low Bearing Capacity (Concrete or Plastic Pipe) 29
4.7 Anchoring of Wooden Poles in Soil of Low Bearing Capacity (Anchoring Logs) 30
4.8 Anchoring of Wooden Poles in Soil of Low Bearing Capacity (Anchoring Logs Reinforced Design) 31
4.9 Anchoring of Stayed Wooden Poles on rock 32
4.10 Anchoring of Stayed Wooden Poles on Soil Covered Rock 33
4.11 Anchoring of Concrete Poles in Firm Soil 33
4.12 Anchoring of Concete Poles in Soil of Low Bearing Capacity 34
4.13 ANchoring of Concrete Poles in Loose Sand 34
4.14 Anchoring of Steel poles 34
4.15 Stay Anchoring 34
4.15.1 Stay Anchoring in Firm Soil ................................................................................................................ 34
4.15.1.1 Mooring Screw 34
4.15.1.2 Concrete Disc and Railway Sleeper 35
4.15.2 Stay Anchoring in Soil of Low Bearing Capacity ................................................................................. 35
4.15.3 Stay Anchoring on Rock ..................................................................................................................... 36
4.15.4 Strut Pole ............................................................................................................................................ 36

5 GROUNDING 38
5.1 General 38
5.2 Earthing Rods 38
5.3 Earth Conductors 38

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 6 of 62

5.4 Connections 39
5.5 Grounding of 33kV and 11kV OH-Lines 39
5.6 Grounding of SWER OH-Lines (If Applicable) 39
5.7 Grounding of 0.4kV OH-Lines 40
5.8 Grounding of Underground cable Networks 41
5.9 Grounding of Pole Mounted Transformers 41
5.10 Grounding of Substations 43

6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS 44

6.1 Inrtoduction 44
6.2 Scope 44
6.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 44
6.2.2 Services to be provided by the Contractor .......................................................................................... 45
6.2.3 Planning Document ............................................................................................................................ 45
6.2.4 Services to be provided by the Employer ........................................................................................... 45
6.2.5 Sites ................................................................................................................................................... 45
6.2.6 Reporting and Project Documentation ................................................................................................ 45
6.2.6.1 Detailed Monthly Progress Reports (Environmental) 45
6.2.6.2 Detailed Quarterly Progress Reports (Environmental) 46
6.3 Monitoring 46
6.4 The Purpose of the Environmental Protection Requirements 47
6.5 Administrative Institutions 47
6.6 Contractor’s Code of Conduct 49
6.7 Employment and Sub-Contracting 49
6.7.1 Employment........................................................................................................................................ 49
6.7.2 Sub-Contracting.................................................................................................................................. 49
6.8 Environmental Aspects of Design 49
6.9 General guidelines for Construction 50
6.10 Temporary Works 50
6.11 Protection of Vegetation 51
6.11.1 General Woodland Vegetation............................................................................................................ 51
6.11.2 Rare and Endangered Species........................................................................................................... 51
6.11.3 Wetland Areas .................................................................................................................................... 51
6.11.4 Sites of Special Interest ...................................................................................................................... 52
6.12 Protection of Fauna 52
6.13 Protection of Archaelogical and Palentological Sites and Materials 52
6.14 Protection of Infrastructure and Private Property 52
6.14.1 Roads and Road Transport ................................................................................................................ 52
6.14.1.1 General 52
6.14.1.2 Maintenance of Roads 53
6.14.1.3 Third Party Access 53
6.14.1.4 Traffic Safety and Management 53
6.14.1.5 Water Supplies 54
6.14.1.6 Private Property, Schools and Institutions 54
6.14.1.7 Wildlife and Vermin Protection 54
6.14.1.8 Precaution Against Bees 54
6.15 Erosion Protection 54
6.16 Refuse and Waste Control 55
6.17 Water pollution Control 55
6.17.1 General Guidelines ............................................................................................................................. 55
6.17.2 Water Discharge from the Works........................................................................................................ 55

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 7 of 62

6.17.3 Fuel Storage and Workshop Areas..................................................................................................... 56

6.17.4 Ablution and Toilet Facilities ............................................................................................................... 56
6.17.5 Silt Traps ............................................................................................................................................ 56
6.17.6 Sedimentation Ponds ......................................................................................................................... 56
6.17.7 Groundwater ....................................................................................................................................... 57
6.18 Air Pollution Control 57
6.19 Noise Pollution Control 57
6.19.1 Restriction on Working Hours ............................................................................................................. 57
6.19.2 Plant and Equipment .......................................................................................................................... 58
6.20 Explosives 58
6.21 Stockpiles and Spoil Dumps 58
6.22 Borrow Areas and Quarry Sites 58
6.23 Labour Camps 59
6.24 Health 59
6.25 Training of Employees 60
6.26 Respect for Cultural Values, Beliefs and Property Rights 60
6.27 Compensation 60
6.28 Rehabilitation of Works Areas 61
6.28.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 61
6.28.2 Shaping of Areas ................................................................................................................................ 61
6.28.3 Grassing ............................................................................................................................................. 61
6.28.4 Trees and Shrubs ............................................................................................................................... 62

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 8 of 62

C2 – DISTRIBUTION GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 9 of 62

1 D-GS-01-001 GENERAL
1.1 STANDARDS
All material used and equipment supplied and all workmanship and tests shall be in accordance with
the latest editions of IEC and ISO Standards, or where International Standards are not applicable,
with national standards, such as ANSI, ASTM, SANS, BS or VDE + DIN. Where such standards and
codes are national or relate to a particular country or region, other authoritative standards that ensure
substantial equivalence to the standards and codes specified will be acceptable.
Where no standards exist, as in the case of patent or special materials, all such materials and
workmanship shall be of the best quality, and full details of the material and any quality control tests
to which they may be subject shall be submitted to the Purchaser/Employer/Engineer for approval.

1.2 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

All equipment and materials to be incorporated in the equipment should be new, unused, and of the
most recent or current models, and that they incorporate all recent improvements in design and
materials unless provided for otherwise in the Contract. Where applicable, all equipment shall be of
tropical design.
All equipment shall be inspected and tested in full to prove compliance with the requirements of the
Specifications to the satisfaction of the Purchaser/Engineer.

1.3 WORKMANSHIP
All work, methods of work and workmanship, whether fully specified herein or not, shall be of the
highest order. In all respects, the generally accepted requirements and commonly recognised good
practice for first class work of this nature are to be adhered to. All work shall be to the satisfaction
and approval of the Purchaser/Engineer.

1.4 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING

All design carried out shall comply with these Specifications and shall take into account all
requirements of the Facilities. The Supplier/Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all design
carried out by him.
The Supplier/Contractor shall inform himself fully of the actual dimensions, levels, etc., of any other
existing or proposed structure before commencing the manufacture of parts dependent on such data.
The design calculations for each member forming part of the Plant shall be based on the most
unfavourable combination of all the loads which the said member or part is intended to support or
assist in supporting either permanently or temporarily. All design calculations shall be subject to the
review of the Purchaser/Engineer.

1.5 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

The project is located between Mashonaland Central and Midlands Provinces of Zimbabwe with a
climate characterised as moderate to hot.
The following summarised climate data will form the design data for the working conditions of the
equipment.
Climatic Data
Maximum outdoor temperature +40° C
Minimum outdoor temperature -1° C
Maximum daily average temperature +35° C

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 10 of 62

Annual average temperature +35° C

Everyday temperature + 15o C
Design Wind Speed 35 m/s
Design Wind Pressure 765 N/m2
Annual average rainfall 800 -1700 mm
Maximum Solar Radiation 2 000 W/m2
Mean Atmospheric Pressure 860m bar
Average Isokeraunic level 55 days/year
Maximum altitude above sea level 1500 m
Air Humidity - at +35° C 80 %
Seismic Loading 0.3g

1.6 GENERAL ELECTRIC DATA

The electrical characteristics for the medium and low voltage system shall be as listed below:
Nominal system voltage, Un kVr.m.s 33 11kV 0.23
19.1 kV 0.4kV
SWER
Rated voltage, Ur kVr.m.s 36 12 0.5/1
Rated one-minute power-frequency kVr.m.s 70 28 2
withstand voltage, Upf
Rated lightning impulse withstand kVpeak 170 75 6
voltage, BIL
Rated frequency, f Hz 50 50 50
Minimum insulator creepage distance mm/kVr.m.s
Level III (normal) 25 25 25
Level IV (polluted areas)1) 31 31 31
Rated short -time (1 sec.) withstand kA r.m.s 12.5 20 25
current, Ith 163)

System earthing Resistance, Effectively Effectively

reactance or grounded grounded
effectively
grounded2)
1) Pollution levels according to IEC 60815.
2) Depending on the existing system.
3) Transformer rated ≤ 500 kVA

1.7 DOCUMENTATION
1.7.1 General
The sizes of all documents and drawings shall conform to the ISO standard, and be of size A1, A2,
A3 or A4.
Larger sizes than A1 shall be avoided.
Maps, schematic diagrams, and apparatus lists shall have a size of A3 or A4. Scales to be used on
the drawings shall be 1:10, 1:20, 1:25, 1:50 and multiples of this series.
All text in the documentation shall be in the English language, and where the text refers to operational
and warning labels the Portuguese text shall also be indicated.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 11 of 62

All measurements shall be given in mm.

The Contractor/Supplier shall during the total project time maintain a List of Documentation to be
updated by him whenever needed. The List of Documentation shall include the date of original issue
of each document submitted as well as the dates of every revision.

1.7.2 Documentation for Design and Manufacture

During the design period full documentation on all equipment to be supplied shall be submitted to the
Purchase/Engineer for review and approval.
All drawings prepared by the Supplier/Contractor shall be submitted in three sets in the case of paper
copies or in digital form in Adobe Acrobat Reader format to the Purchaser/Engineer for review and
approval. All documentation shall have such information or instructions related to the drawings and
the design as may be necessary.
Within twenty-one (21) days after receiving such drawings, calculations, samples, patterns or
models, one copy of each document will be returned to the Supplier/Contractor, dated, signed and
marked by the Purchaser/Engineer and, where necessary, with proposed corrections indicated.
Drawings marked “RETURNED FOR CORRECTION” shall be corrected by the Supplier/Contractor
and sent to the Engineer for further review.
When a drawing is marked “REVIEWED” or “REVIEWED AS AMENDED”, the Supplier/Contractor
will be allowed to use the drawing for manufacture. The Supplier/Contractor shall, however, make
corrections according to the remarks given by the Purchaser/Engineer.
Manufacturing starting prior to receipt of “REVIEWED” drawing is done at the Supplier/Contractor's
own responsibility.
The Purchaser’s/Engineer’s approval does however not in any way relive the Supplier/Contractor of
his full responsibility for the correctness of his documentation and the proper functioning, quality and
compliance with the Specifications of all plant and equipment supplied by him.
Calculations, samples, patterns, models, etc., submitted to the Purchaser/Engineer for his review,
shall be such as are called for herein or as may be necessary for proving compliance with the
Contract.

1.7.3 Documentation for Installation

Prior to the installation period the Supplier/Contractor shall distribute copies of the REVIEWED
documents and such other particulars as directed by the Engineer, to the Employer in two sets and
to the Engineer in one set.
The Supplier/Contractor shall submit in due time, two copies of preliminary Operation and
Maintenance Instructions to the Purchaser/Engineer for comments.
Prior to the commencement of the Test of Completion, the Contractor shall supply the commented
documentation in three sets to the Purchaser/Employer.
If any descriptive brochures forming part of this documentation cannot be provided in English
versions, complete translations shall be enclosed.
The Contractor shall prepare, and keep up-to-date, a complete set of “as-built” records of the
execution of the Works, showing the exact as-built locations, sizes and detail of the work as executed.
These records shall be kept on Site.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 12 of 62

1.7.4 As-Built Documentation

1.7.4.1 General
Two copies of the as-built documentation shall be supplied to the Engineer prior to the
commencement of the Test on Completion.
The Contractor shall update all final documents in accordance with the modifications made. When a
document contains all modifications, it shall be marked AS BUILT.
Prior to the issue of any Taking-Over Certificate, the Contractor shall supply to the Engineer AS
BUILT documentation in hard copy form in six sets to the Engineer.
The documentation shall also be submitted in digital form in the same amount of sets. All text shall
be in Adobe Acrobat Reader format and all drawings in AutoCAD (.dwg) or Microstation (.dng) format.
The supply of AS BUILT documents shall comprise but not be limited to all drawings for construction
and installation, maps, calculations, instructions for operation, maintenance, repair and adjustment,
apparatus lists, spare parts lists containing information needed for ordering for all equipment supplied
under the Contract.
Digital data (with coordinates) of the network, including conductors, transformers, customer
connections etc. shall be delivered in digital format suitable for import in ZETDC geographical
information system according to separate instructions and specifications.
The Works shall not be completed for the purpose of taking-over until the Engineer has received
these documents.

1.7.4.2 General Manuals

The following general manuals, covering the whole project, shall be delivered.
a. A general description of the equipment in the contract.
b. The manuals shall include spare part lists and description of any special tools needed for service
of the equipment.
c. All other drawings or manuals not mentioned, but are deemed necessary for a safe and proper
handling of the delivered equipment.

1.7.4.3 Network Design Documentation

The following documents shall be delivered.
a. All layouts, construction and installation drawings.
b. All calculations regarding civil, electrical and mechanical design.
c. Apparatus lists including all apparatus installed, subdivided into 33, SWER and 11 kV and
transformer areas, for 33kV, SWER, 11kV and 0.4 kV network, respectively. Lists shall include
technical data, order number and reference to schematic diagrams.
d. For 33 kV, SWER and 11 kV, geographical maps showing the location of the lines, switches and
distribution substations.
e. For 0.4 kV network, geographical maps showing the location of the lines, poles, service
connections and luminaries.
f. Single-line diagrams covering the 11 kV, SWER and 33 kV network. The diagrams shall contain
apparatus designations, cross-sectional areas and type of conductors.
g. Single-line diagrams covering the 0.4 kV network fed from each substation. The diagrams shall
contain apparatus designations, cross-sectional areas and type of conductors.

1.7.4.4 Material Documentation

Documents for approval shall be delivered before the work is started but shall also be included in the
as-built documentation as follows.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 13 of 62

a. Data specifications.
b. Routine test certificates.
c. Data lists with by the Engineer required amendments incorporated. The contents of the lists
shall correspond to the schedules of this document. Data lists will be regarded as binding for
the manufacturer.
d. Dimension drawings. They shall be regarded as binding for the manufacturer and shall contain
measures, weights and features of the apparatus.
e. Detail drawings as required by the Engineer.
f. List of components and details of the apparatus. They may preferably be included in the
dimension sketch.
In case of alterations, new documents shall be issued.

1.8 MANUFACTURE
Before commencing any manufacture of the Plant the Supplier/Contractor shall submit for the
approval of the Purchaser/Engineer, the names of the manufacturers from whom he proposes to
order the material and the names of the subcontractors from whom he proposes to order any parts
of the Plant.
After such approval has been given, the manufacture shall be planned and performed according to
the Specifications and to the satisfaction of the Purchaser/Engineer.
The Purchaser/Engineer shall be afforded every opportunity to control and inspect the manufacture
and testing of materials in the steelworks, rolling mills, foundries etc., and their assembly in the
workshops of the Contractor and his Subcontractors.

1.9 SITE REGULATIONS, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL

All work including erection, commissioning and maintenance shall be executed in accordance with
the safety rules of the country and of the Employer. In applicable cases, Permit to Work shall be
obtained.
Outages needed for the construction of the network must be requested to ZETDC in writing at least
one week before the work is to be performed.
The Contractor shall arrange for all temporary connections and safety, which shall be approved by
the Employer.
On completion of the Contract, all temporary camps, roads, etc. provided by the Contractor shall be
removed and the site reinstated to its original condition, all to the approval of the Engineer.
The Environmental Protection Requirements (EPR) shall be followed by the Contractor.

1.10 QUALITY CONTROL

A programme of the tests in the factory and at Site is to be mutually agreed upon between the
Supplier/Contractor and the Purchaser/Engineer.
All material shall fulfil all requirements specified in the Specifications.
The data shall be verified in reports of type tests performed by an independent authority in
accordance with the IEC Standard or Equivalent National Standard acceptable to the
Purchaser/Engineer.
Such type tests shall have been performed less than 5 years previously. Such reports shall be
submitted for the approval of the Purchaser/Engineer on request and in any event in the case of
order.
The Supplier/Contractor shall submit for approval a detailed program of quality control and inspection
and testing procedures and methods proposed. He shall also retain full responsibility for the quality
control, inspections and tests made by his subcontractors.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 14 of 62

The Supplier/Contractor shall provide all instruments and equipment necessary for testing. The test
reports shall be submitted to the Purchaser/Engineer, in three copies, for review and approval.

1.11 SITE AND COMMISSIONING TESTS

At sites the supplied equipment shall be completely tested by the Contractor. Experienced test
engineers shall carry out all tests. Special requirements for the site tests are specified in the different
clauses of the Specifications.
The Contractor shall record the test results in an approved form in such a manner that the test reports
can be used as the basis for future maintenance tests. No tests in the agreed programme shall be
waived but on the Engineer’s written instruction.
Test methods and equipment shall be noted on the test sheets.
Test equipment shall be of satisfactory quality and condition and if found necessary, be calibrated by
an approved authority at the Contractor’s expense.

1.12 PACKING AND TRANSPORT MARKING

All parts of the Plant and Equipment shall be well packed and protected against loss or damage
during the transport by sea and over land and whilst in storage under tropical conditions.
All packing shall be performed in such a way that the equipment will not be damaged by overturning
of the packages. Dimensions of packages, crates, etc., shall be suitable for road transport. Instruction
for handling shall be clearly marked on all parts, packages and crates.
All parts, packages and crates shall be adequately marked in order to enable identification. Each
item contained in a package shall be clearly identified on the packing list by its description and part
number and assembly drawing reference and each item shall be marked or labelled to correspond
with the packing list.
The marking system to be used shall be as instructed by the Purchaser/Engineer.
The cost of all equipment needed for the temporary fixing and supporting of the various parts of the
Plant and the various packages to crane hooks, etc., during handling, transport and storage and the
cost of load distribution beams, etc., where they form part of the packing or crates, shall be included
in the Contract price.
The Supplier/Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all packing and any loss or damage shall be
made good by the Supplier/Contractor and, except where otherwise provided, at the
Supplier’s/Contractor’s own expense.

1.13 CORROSION PROTECTION AND PAINTING

1.13.1 General
All parts of the Plant shall be protected against corrosion under service conditions. The protection
shall also prevent corrosion during transport, storage and erection.
Because of the high humidity at the Site, the protection shall be carried out at the
Supplier’s/Contractor’s workshop.
Damage to the protection during transport, erection, etc. shall be repaired to the same quality as
specified for the object.

1.13.2 Galvanizing
Except where otherwise specified, all ferrous parts shall be galvanized.
Galvanizing shall be applied by the hot-dip process and shall consist of a continuous coating to
minimum weights as follows:

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 15 of 62

Weights g/m²
Rolled steel exposed to the atmosphere only 600
Rolled steel under the ground surface 1500
Cast iron and malleable iron 600
Bolts, nuts and washers 375
The zinc coating shall meet the requirements according to ISO 1461, ASTM, A123, A153 and A767.
All steel shall be fully fabricated before galvanizing, no machine or shop work, boring, punching, etc.
will be allowed after galvanizing.

1.14 WAYLEAVES
The Contractor will be provided with a full list of Way leaves, in respect of the line route from which
he shall ascertain whether there are any impediments on the route, and if any, it shall be brought to
the attention of the Authority before the work commences.
Should the Contractor wish to make a staff camp on any property he shall first obtain written authority
to do so from the occupant of such property, at the same time he shall keep the Client informed in
writing of any such arrangement. The Contractor shall be responsible for the movements of the
labour force from the camp site, to prevent trespass and to protect the interests of the Occupant or
Owner.
When the contractor is about to commence work on any property he shall be responsible for
ascertaining from the Client that the Wayleaves are in order and for giving the Occupant of such
property adequate notice of his intention to commence work thereon.

1.15 LINE SURVEY

The Contractor will be responsible for detailed survey of the line route and provide the surveyed line
route on maps to a scale to be agreed with the Client. Each straight-line mast position is to be marked
by a steel peg driven into the ground with approximately 25mm showing above ground.
A steel marker peg is to be provided approximately 2.5 meters forward along the line, with back to
source of power.
Each angle position should have four steel pegs, which indicate the pole position, the direction of the
line on each side, and the bisection of the angle. A steel marker peg is also to be provided.
a. A small stone cairn will protect all pegs.
b. The Contractor shall recover all steel survey pegs at the end of the survey.

1.16 BUSH CLEARING AND ACCESS ROAD

The contractor shall provide for the clearing of trees and bush along the way leave strip for a width
of 5 metres and 7.5 metres on both sides of the line centre for 11kV and 33kV lines respectively. For
LT or MV (230/400V) lines, the contractor shall undertake to observe stipulated servitudes stand
boundary, pegs and beacons as appropriate. Where there are trees, a clearance of one metre shall
be allowed on both sides from the centre line of the pole along the route.
An adequate track shall be cleared by the contractor along the route to facilitate material delivery,
pulling out and sagging of conductor and for the erection of structures.
Tree stumping will not normally be necessary, but over the entire strip trees shall be cut so that all
stumps are razed to ground level. Where stumping and or cording is required over any specific
property, the contractor will be advised and he shall quote the charges.
Should the contractor intend to clear the line servitude with mechanical equipment he shall get prior
approval to do so from every property owner or occupant from whom a Wayleave has been obtained.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 16 of 62

In any case, the contractor shall take steps to avoid damage or interference to farm road, ploughed
lands, watercourses, contours and land ridges to avoid soil erosion. The contractor shall pay for any
damage made as a result of his activities outside the wayleave area.
Arrangement will normally have been concluded by the Client with property owners for the removal
of buildings within the wayleaves strip before the contractor commences work. However, the
continued presence of such buildings should be notified to the Client without delay.

1.17 COMMISSIONING OF THE WORKS

Once the Engineer is satisfied that the Contractor have done all that is required to make the project
or section of project ready for commissioning, the Engineer will notify the Client that the project is
ready to mobilise key stakeholders, especially the staff for pre-commissioning tests to commence.
The Consultant will, together with the Contractor, prepare a schedule for the pre-commissioning
activities, with inputs from the Client’s commissioning procedures, and a pre-commissioning
organisation will be proposed to handle the various testing activities and responsibilities.
Inspection will be performed as necessary to comply with the taking over procedures required by the
contract. The Engineer’s, Contractor’s and the Client’s Staff involved in Commissioning will be
involved in the final inspection of the Works.
The Completion Certificates may be issued with a list of snags to be rectified, normally limited to
snags that may not impact on safe operation and can be rectified while the distribution systems are
energised.
Commissioning will typically involve the Client’s authorised Commissioning Staff, the Engineer and
the Contractor.
Key personnel will be assigned responsibility for liaison towards ZETDC and for safety related to the
commissioning activities.
Commissioning will involve Mechanical Completion inspections, dry-tests and simulations, and live
tests.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, remove all rubbish, surplus materials and debris, unused
material, temporary erections and equipment. He shall make sure the site and adjoining ground are
perfectly clean to the satisfaction of the Client and the Engineer

1.18 MAINTENANCE PERIOD

After commissioning, the Works will be operated by the Client, while remaining under the Defects
Liability of the Contractor. During the Defects Liability Period (DLP) of one year the Contractor shall
attend to all defects during this period, and make sure that all defects are addressed in accordance
with the provisions of the Contract. Upon notification from the Client that all defects occurring within
the DLP have been attended to satisfactorily by the Contractor, all contractual certificates will be
released and this will relieve the Contractor’s obligations to the Client.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 17 of 62

2 MECHANICAL DESIGN OF OVERHEAD LINES

2.1 LOAD COMBINATIONS
The poles shall be designed to withstand following load combinations.
1) High wind at 90 degrees angle to the line:
Maximum wind speed at a conductor temperature of + 10°C.
2) High wind at 45 degrees angle to the line:
Maximum wind speed at a conductor temperature of + 10° C.
3) Construction and maintenance loads:
Loading conditions in accordance with IEC 60826 Design criteria of overhead transmission
lines, Sub-clause 6.5 Loads for construction and maintenance (safety loads).

2.2 WIND LOAD ON POLES

The maximum wind velocity is 35 m/s which corresponds to a dynamic wind pressure of 765 N/m2.
The total wind load on poles shall be derived from the following formula:

Q = 0.625×V 2×A×C
where
Q = wind load in N
V = wind speed in m/s
A = effective frontal area in m2
C = drag factor = 1.0

2.3 LOAD FACTORS

2.3.1 Poles
The following minimum load factors/safety factors shall tentatively, apply in the pole design:
Vertical Transverse Longitudinal
Worst normal condition
(load combinations 1 and 2) 1.5 1.5 1.5

33, 11 kV construction and maintenance

conditions (load combination 3) 1.5 1.5 1.5

0.4 kV construction and maintenance

conditions (load combination 3) 1.0 1.0 1.0

2.3.2 Insulators and Fittings

The insulators, insulator assemblies and suspension clamps, except tension clamps, shall be
designed for the same load combinations as poles. The minimum safety factors related to the
mechanical or electromechanical load shall be:

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 18 of 62

Worst normal condition (load combinations 1 and 2) 1.25

33 kV, SWER and 11 kV construction and maintenance conditions (load combination 3) 1.25
0.4 kV construction and maintenance conditions (load combination 3) 1.00
The wind load on insulator sets shall be derived from the following formula:
Q = 0.625×V2×C×A
where:
Q = wind load in N
V = wind speed at the height of the insulator set m/s
A = effective frontal area in m2 using the diameter of the insulator disc
C = drag factor = 1.2

2.3.3 Conductors
The following design limitations shall apply to the conductors:
Conductors:

Temperature +10° C, still air, initial tension not exceeding 25% of the UTS

Temperature +20° C, still air, final tension not exceeding 20% of the UTS

Final sags under maximum temperature to be calculated at +70° C

2.4 LOADING DIAGRAMS, APPLICATION CHARTS AND SAG AND TENSION

CHARTS
Using the loads, safety factors and design limitations for normally a ruling span of 100 m for 33 kV
and 11 kV lines and 200 m for SWER ones, loading diagrams and application charts for each pole
type, as well as sag and tension charts for the conductor, shall be provided by the Contractor for
approval by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall use the drawings, etc., referred to above in the design of the plant as specified
in Clause 1.

2.5 CLEARANCES
2.5.1 Conductor Clearance to Ground and Objects on the Ground
The following minimum clearances shall be maintained at a maximum conductor temperature of
+70oC in still air and final sag, i.e. pole spotting temperature:
Table A: Ground Clearance on road-crossings and elsewhere
Line Voltage To ground elsewhere Above normal roads Above major roads
400V 4.9 5.5 6.5
11 000V 5.2 5.8 7.0
33 000V 5.2 5.8 7.0

Table B: Clearance to other lines

Other Lines
Line Voltage
400V 11 000V 33 000V >33000V
400V - 1.8 1.8 1.8
11 000V 1.8 1.5 1.8 1.8
33 000V 1.8 1.5 1.5 1.5

NOTE: No lines are allowed to cross over buildings or trees.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 19 of 62

2.5.2 Distances to Roads and Railways

The following minimum horizontal distances shall be maintained between 0.4/11/22/33kV/SWER
poles:
National Road 30m
Other Roads 15m
Railway Track 50m
The above horizontal distances are also subject to local by-laws and may be changed from time to
time. Note: The above distances shall apply to lines located outside built-up areas.

2.5.3 Airports
Always take contact with the airport authorities before planning any overhead lines close to airports
since the recommendations are different for different categories of airports. The following is an
extract from ICAO Annex 14 to the Convention on International Civil Aviation, Aerodromes Volume
1, Aerodrome Design and Operations. Chapter 4, Obstacle Restriction and Removal.
As a general rule no fixed object, other than visual aids required for air navigation purposes, shall be
permitted on a runway strip:
a) within 77.5 m of the runway centre line of a precision approach runway category I, II or III where
the code number is 4 and the code letter is F; or
b) within 60 m of the runway centre line of a precision approach runway category I, II or III where
the code number is 3 or 4; or
c) within 45 m of the runway centre line of a precision approach runway category I where the code
number is 1 or 2
The table below gives the surfaces where no obstacles are allowed.
RUNWAYS MEANT FOR TAKE-OFF
Code Number
Surface and Dimensions 1 2 3 or 4
TAKE-OFF CLIMB
Length of inner edge 60 m 80 m 180 m
Distance from runway end 30 m 60 m 60 m
Divergence (each side) 10% 10% 12.5%
Final width 380 m 580 m 1 200 m
Length 1 600 m 2 500 m 15 000 m
Slope 5% 4% 2%

2.5.4 Conductor Configuration and Phase Distances for 33 kV and 11 kV Lines with
Bare Conductors
In all standard configurations horizontal configuration of the conductors shall be used. The insulators
shall be fitted on a cross arm.
The minimum horizontal spacing between fixing points of conductors on the cross arm shall be
derived from the following formula:

𝐷𝐷 = 0.62 ⋅ �𝑓𝑓 + 𝑙𝑙 + 0.007 ⋅ 𝑈𝑈

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 20 of 62

where:
D = horizontal spacing in m
f = final conductor sag at +70° C in m
l = length of insulator set in m (l = 0 for line-post insulators)
U = highest voltage in kV
In exceptional cases vertical configuration of the conductors can be used, i.e. at double circuits in
urban areas or similar. A special design has to be made from case to case and calculations and
drawing shall be submitted for approval by the Client. The minimum vertical spacing between fixing
points of conductors on the poles shall be derived from the following formula:

𝑉𝑉 = 0.75 ⋅ �𝑓𝑓 + 𝑙𝑙 + 0.007 ⋅ 𝑈𝑈

where:
V = vertical spacing in m
f = final conductor sag at +70 °C in m
l = vertical length of insulator set in m
U = highest voltage in kV
The vertical configuration is not recommended for normal standardized line construction.

2.6 CROSSING OF OBSTACLES

The Contractor shall make all necessary temporary provisions and take all necessary precautions,
including the erection of guard structures, as required, where the line crosses roads,
telecommunication lines, power lines or other obstacles, in order to maintain the safety of the public
and to avoid damage. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the owner of any such obstacle
within a reasonable time before he intends to make the crossing. Power lines will normally be taken
out of service and earthed, and so remain during the time required by the Contractor to complete the
crossing.
Prior to making the crossing, the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s and the owner's approval of
the precautionary arrangements and installation methods intended for use and the time required for
the work.
When permanent reconstruction of obstacles, as indicated in the structure list, has to be performed
the Contractor shall act as outlined above.
No additional payment will be made for temporary or permanent provisions as per above.

2.7 POLE LOCATION

The estimated locations of the lines are as shown on the maps. The final survey and pole spotting
shall be performed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The price for survey, pole
spotting and setting-out as well as the cost of necessary maps for the Works shall be included in the
Bid. It is to be noted that in most cases the only available maps are in scale 1:50 000 or 1:250 000.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 21 of 62

3 POLES AND CROSSARMS

3.1 GENERAL
The type of pole to be used shall be as stated in the technical schedules and the also the price
schedules and the drawings. Crossarms should be manufactured from wood or steel, in accordance
with the information supplied on the drawings.

3.2 MATERIALS
Materials for steel members such as crossarms shall comply with the requirements for materials in
the General Requirements.
All ferrous parts shall be galvanized.

3.3 POLE TYPES AND DUTIES

3.3.1 Pole Types
The normal pole types to be supplied for each voltage level are as shown on the drawings provided
with the Tender.

3.3.2 Pole Duties

Pole duties for each voltage level are as shown on the drawings provided with the Tender.
Taller poles will be required at road crossings, dependant on the ground profile.
The minimum clearances as specified in section 2.5 shall always be maintained.

3.4 CONTENTS OF DRAWINGS

Three sets of drawings shall be submitted for the Purchaser’s/Engineer’s review.
These drawings shall show the following data.
a) An outline drawing of the pole showing all basic design dimensions.
b) Specified loading conditions.
c) Wind loads on the pole at each point of application.
d) Stress diagrams or computer data to check the strength of the pole from the loading conditions
specified.
e) A bill of materials shall be prepared in tabulation form, listing all materials required for fabrication
and assembly of the pole. The list shall show the number of items required and the total weight
of each part.
f) Stays shall show the dimensions, referred to centre line of the pole, for locating stay anchors for
the various pole types.
g) A detailed description of the preservative treatment of the wood poles.

3.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS, POLES

3.5.1 Wooden Poles
The wooden poles and their preparation condition, preservative treatment, testing and delivery
conditions shall comply with the latest edition of SANS 754 for Eucalyptus poles.
Minimum fibre stress 55 MPa.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 22 of 62

All wooden poles shall be of the listed types below:

Eucalyptus
Botanical name Standard name
Eucalyptus cloeziana 1) Cloeziana
Eucalyptus grandis Saligna
Eucalyptus grandis/saligna hybrids Saligna
Eucalyptus maculata Maculata
Eucalyptus maideni Maideni
Eucalyptus microcorys Microcorys
Eucalyptus paniculata 1) Paniculata
Eucalyptus saligna Saligna
1) Classified as able to withstand a maximum fibre stress (in bending) of 75 MPa based on the
specified minimum top diameter of the pole and on a taper of 5 mm per metre of length.
A pole cap, made from steel, plastic or aluminium shall be fitted at the top of the pole to cover the
pole butt.

3.5.2 Concrete Poles

The concrete poles and their preparation condition, testing and delivery conditions shall comply with
the latest edition of SANS 470; Concrete poles for telephone, power and lighting purposes.
The poles shall be prestressed/partly prestressed/reinforced cast poles made of watertight concrete
with a strength of minimum 50 MPa, a water cement ratio of maximum 0.45 and an air content of
minimum 0.3%.
The surface of the finished pole shall be smooth. A few cracks with a width of less than 0.1 mm may
be present. Pores in the surface may be present depending on the manufacturing method. The total
area of the pores should be less than 5 cm2 per 100 cm2 pole surface. The mean depth of the pores
should be less than 3 mm.
Poles with larger areas of pores may be accepted if measured top coat at rectilinear binding minus
the depth of the pores is at least 10 mm.
After-pouring of defects may be done if the patching has the same lifetime as the concrete pole.

3.5.3 Steel Poles

The design, materials and fabrication of steel poles shall be in accordance with the following
publications:
EN 10149 Hot-rolled flat products made of high yield strength for cold forming.
EN 10025 Hot-rolled products made of non-alloy structural steels. Technical delivery
conditions.
ASTM A123 Standard specification for zinc (hot galvanized) coating on products fabricated
from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips.
ASCE No.72 Design of steel transmission pole structures.
Pole shafts shall be in one piece to the maximum length possible within shipping and/or fabrications
limitations. Pole shafts exceeding limitations are to be designed in several sections. Adjacent
sections shall be joined by slip joints.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 23 of 62

Poles shall be designed with a minimum number of joints. Slip joints shall be designed for a minimum
overlap 1-1/2 times the inside diameter the female section at the joint, as per ASCE No. 72.
A removable plastic top cap shall be fitted to the pole.
All material shall be in accordance with the relevant standards referred to within this specification.
The poles shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with the General Requirements, Clause 1.13.

3.6 MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS

3.6.1 General
The poles should be manufactured in a factory with continuous quality control.

3.6.2 Markings
The poles should be marked with length and year of manufacture. The marking should be placed 4
m from the base.

3.6.3 Pole Signs

Poles shall be equipped with pole signs as follows:
a) 33 kV, SWER and 11 kV poles shall be fitted with a warning sign with a zigzag flash and the
words “Danger, Chenjelani, Bulwani”.
b) All poles shall be fitted with one combined pole number sign and line identification sign.

3.6.4 Pole Tests

Test certificates from full-scale tests of the strength of different type of poles should be submitted on
request.

3.6.5 Routine Tests

Routine tests shall be performed in accordance with the relevant standards and according to
instructions from the Purchaser/Engineer.
Representative samples of all materials among lots ready for dispatch selected at random by the
Purchaser/Engineer shall be subject to tests in order to verify their conformity with the specification.
The tests shall be performed by the Supplier/Contractor and the costs are deemed to be included in
the relevant schedules.

3.7 BOLTED CROSSARMS AND BRACKETS

Minimum bolt spacing is equal to three times the bolt diameter.
Minimum distance from the centre of the bolt to an edge is equal to one point five (1.5) times the bolt
diameter.
The distance from the centre of a bolt to the face of the edge of a flange of an angle or other members
shall be such as to permit the use of a socket wrench in tightening the nut.
The bolt hole diameter shall be equal to the bolt diameter plus 1.5 mm.
Allowable ultimate bearing stress for bolts, as well as members is equal to 1.15 times the ultimate
stress Fu of the steel.
Allowable ultimate shearing stress for bolts and members is equal to 0.6 times the yield point Fy of
the steel.

3.7.1 Screws, Nuts and Washers

Screws shall be high strength with M-threads.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 24 of 62

Connection screws and nuts shall be corrosion resistant (galvanized).

Screws and nuts shall be of standard design. Washers shall be used under the nuts. When installed,
the screw shall project through the nut, not less than 3 mm and not more than 25 mm. Taper washers
shall be used where required.

3.8 CROSSARM DESIGN

The cross arms shall be designed either “symmetrical” or “un-symmetrical” where the preferred
design is the symmetrical design, see principal sketches below.
Crossarm measurements shall be as stated on the drawings supplied with the Tender.
The lower edge of the un-symmetrical crossarm is mounted 150 mm below the pole top, thus the
insulator has to be mounted at distance of 200 mm at either side of the centre line of the crossarm
to achieve minimum clearance.
The symmetrical crossarm is having a welded mounting bracket for mounting at the pole, where the
upper edge of the crossarm is mounted in level with the pole top and the middle insulator can be
located in the centre of the crossarm, as shown on the drawings supplied with the Tender.

3.8.1 Un-symmetrical Cross arm (if applicable)

A
B B
D

F C C

E
D

Pole top above cross-arm.

Post Insulator to
Insulator has to be placed un-
swap side for
symmetrical to get enough
every other pole
clearance from pole top

NOTE: Reference shall also be made to the Client’s specific requirements in accordance with the
drawings applicable to the project.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 25 of 62

3.8.2 Symmetrical Cross arm

A
B B

E
Mounting bracket welded to cross-
arm.
Cross-arm mounted in line or
above pole top.
Middle insulator can be mounted
symmetrical on cross-arm

NOTE: Reference shall also be made to the Client’s specific requirements in accordance with the
drawings applicable to the project.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 26 of 62

4 FOUNDATIONS
4.1 GENERAL
Foundations shall be designed for all specified pole types for good and poor soils, both in dry and
fully submerged conditions and for rocks.
The foundations shall be designed to resist uplift, overturning and vertical and horizontal pressure.
Foundations shall also be able to withstand the stresses, which may be imposed upon them under
erection and stringing operations.
Poles on rock are normally anchored by rock pegs and bars on earth covered rock, also root pegs
can under certain circumstances be used.
Poles in soil are anchored in a way that ensures complete safety in a pit and to a depth suited to
ground conditions and type of pole.
Ultimate loads derived from the pole design shall be increased by 10% for application in the
foundation design. Where unstable soil conditions exist, as well as lack of sufficient soil data, an
increased load factor can cover uncertainties of the design.
The responsibility for proving the adequacy of the foundation type of each pole site shall rest with
the Contractor. All necessary soil surveys, including field or laboratory tests, shall be undertaken by
the Contractor. The results of these tests shall be recorded by the Contractor and submitted to the
Engineer.
NOTE: Reference shall also be made to the Client’s specific requirements in accordance with the
drawings applicable to the project.

4.2 SOIL CLASSIFICATION

The soil is from bearing capacity point of view divided into five classes, as follows:

Soil Type Description Depth to Density of Cone angle Ultimate

water table uplift (degree) bearing x)
(m) (kg/m3) capacity
kN/m2
E Sandy Gravel <2.0 1800 30 400
F Silt 0 1600 25 200
G1 Clayey Silt >2.5 1600 15 50
G2 Clayey Silt 0 900 10 20
H Rock xx) - >1800 >30 900
x) At the depth of 2.0 m
xx) With maximum 1 m overburden
The soil properties are characterised by the density and the angle of internal friction from which
values of the ultimate bearing capacity at 2 m depth and the cone angle of uplift have been estimated.
E: Sandy gravel - Soil of good bearing capacity. This class comprises most soils derived from
in-situ weathering of rock.
F: Silt - Soil of medium bearing capacity. This class comprises gravel’s, sands, dry silt
and similar

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 27 of 62

G: Clayey silt - Soil of low bearing capacity. This class comprises saturated silts, soft clays
and organic soils.
H: Rock

4.3 GROUND EXCAVATIONS

When excavation is being undertaken, all local council regulations governing excavations, noise level
etc. shall be adhered to.
To provide maximum ground bearing surface, the contractor shall, preferably, excavate all pole holes
with a mechanical auger but where conditions prevent this being used the smallest possible
excavation shall be opened by hand.
All excavations shall be adequately rock-filled in accordance with standard practice and well rammed
as each layer is added. All material excavated shall be replaced and firmly packed, the surplus back
fill shall be used to form a mound round the hole to allow for settlement. The contractor shall provide
rock fill as required.
The contractor shall inspect the terrain over which the line is to be built and he shall make due
allowance for any variations in the ground conditions.
Written approval shall be obtained from the Employer or the Engineer before explosives are used for
excavating foundations with rock. The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with local
regulations concerning the use of explosives and for the safekeeping and handling of explosives.
During operations involving the handling or use of explosives, the Contractor shall be responsible for
the safety of personnel, Site Works and people or properties in the vicinity of the Site. The Contractor
shall make good at his own expense any damage caused by the use or mishandling of explosives.
No claims for extras whatsoever will be entertained should the Contractor be prohibited by order of
the Police, other Public Bodies or the Courts from using explosives.

4.4 ANCHORING OF WOODEN POLES IN FIRM SOIL WITHOUT WEDGING

In soil of good or medium bearing capacity, class E and F, two methods may be used, Auger machine
excavating or Hand excavating. Backfill will be done with the excavated materials and consolidated
by compacting in layers not exceeding 200 mm in depth. PS, Pole Soil.
The minimum depth of the foundations shall be 2.0 m for 33 kV, SWER and 11 kV poles and 1.5 m
for 0.4 kV ones.
PS1:1 PS1:2

4.5 ANCHORING OF WOODEN POLES IN FIRM SOIL AND ON ROCK WITH

WEDGING
This type shows stone wedging. Wedging shall be performed according to the figure ensuring a
sound wedging. Backfilling between the wedging will be done with the excavated materials and
consolidated by compacting in layers.
The minimum depth of the foundations shall be 2.0 m for 33 kV, SWER and 11 kV poles up to 10 m
and 1.5 m for 0.4 kV ones.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 28 of 62

PS2

4.6 ANCHORING OF WOODEN POLES IN SOIL OF LOW BEARING CAPACITY

(CONCRETE OR PLASTIC PIPE)
In soil with low bearing capacity, class G, the pole shall be anchored in a way that ensures complete
safety.
Alternatives like concrete pipe or glass fibre reinforced plastic pipe may be used. Necessary
excavation will be done before the pipe is pressed down.
The length of the pipes down to the base plate is determined by the length of the pole and its
dimensions, according to the table below.
Wedging and backfilling according to PS2, above. If the backfill contains heavy materials, such as
stones gravel or sand, the lower wedging is not required.
Concrete pipe: The concrete pipe is placed in such a way that the joints are well folded together. Length
of each section pipe can freely be chosen between 1.0 m – 2.0 m. At l ≥ 4.0 m the lowest
pipe section shall be 2.0 m.
Plastic pipe: Glass fibre reinforced polyester or equal with at least 15 mm thickness of material shall
be used.
PG1

Upper Wedging *)

Excavated
Depth

n Firm Soil
l
Lower
Wedging

Base Plate

Soil of very low bearing capacity

Ø 1000 mm

*) Upper wedging to be made of crossed standard sleepers cut in order to obtain a good fit
between pole and pipe
Excavation depth and length of pipes**) at different length of poles

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 29 of 62

Pole 8-10m 10-12m 12-14m 14-16m 16-18m 18-19m

Length

Class n l n l n l n l n l n l
BS:1990

Light 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5 - - - - - -

Medium 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.3 2.5 2.3 3.0 2.3 3.0 2.3 2.0

Stout 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 3.0 2.6 2.6 3.0 2.6 4.0 2.6 4.0

**) If glass fibre reinforced plastic pipes are used the length (l) shall be increased by 200 mm.

4.7 ANCHORING OF WOODEN POLES IN SOIL OF LOW BEARING CAPACITY

(ANCHORING LOGS)
The following types of pole anchoring should be used in soil with very low bearing capacity, in peat
soil and muddy ground.
This design may be used on straight line poles maximum Class S 12–14m (BS:1990) or equivalent.
Excavations shall be done in such a way that they will leave the top jointed log lying just under the
ground surface.

3000 mm
min. 200mm
500

min. 1000 mm

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 30 of 62

7500 mm

Direction of line

1000 mm

7500 mm

1000 mm
180 mm

Bollards

The ties should be made of timber with dimensions 75x125 mm or poles with well jointed cross-bars
fixed with nails underneath the ties.
The ties are to be placed on both sides of the line and should cross the line in order that the ends of
the top jointed logs are placed on the ties.
The two logs with a medium diameter of approx. 180 mm are joined together and with the pole-leg
by a through bolt.
The pole-leg is stayed using min. 50mm2 stay wire, both for the transverse and parallel line directions.
The stays are fastened with a stay link at both ends of the log.
Before backfilling of excavated material two bollards shall be nailed to the pole and the transversal
logs.
All timber should be pressure impregnated.

4.8 ANCHORING OF WOODEN POLES IN SOIL OF LOW BEARING CAPACITY

(ANCHORING LOGS REINFORCED DESIGN)
The following type of pole anchoring should be used in soil with very low bearing capacity, in peat
soil and muddy ground. This design may be used on straight line poles maximum Class S 14 –16m
(BS1990) or the equivalent.
Excavation shall be done in such a way that it will leave the top jointed log lying just under the ground
surface.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 31 of 62

3000 mm

min. 200mm 1000 mm

min. 1000 mm

7500 mm

Direction of
line

1000 mm 7500 mm

850 mm

Bollards 180 mm

The ties should be made of timber with the dimensions 75x125 mm or poles well jointed with cross-
bars fixed with nails underneath the ties.
The ties to be placed on both sides of the line and cross the line in order that the ends of the top
jointed logs are placed on the ties.
The two logs with a medium diameter of approx. 180 mm are joined together and with the pole-leg
by a through bolt. The pole-leg is stayed using min. 50 mm2 Fe stay wire both transverse and parallel
to the line direction. The stays are fastened with a stay link at both ends of the log.
Before backfilling of excavated material two bollards shall be nailed to the pole and the transversal
logs.
All timber should be pressure impregnated.

4.9 ANCHORING OF STAYED WOODEN POLES ON ROCK

Anchoring is performed using rock pegs (blade dowels) where the rock reaches the surface or if the
depth of the soil cover is less than 0.5 m. PR, Pole Rock.
Unconsolidated rock shall be eliminated before drilling.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 32 of 62

PR1

4.10 ANCHORING OF STAYED WOODEN POLES ON SOIL COVERED ROCK

If the depth of the soil cover exceeds 0.5 m at a stayed straight-line pole and 0.8 m for remaining
stayed poles no rock pegs are necessary if sufficient anchoring can be achieved according to
methods recommended for anchoring type PS1 and PS2.

PR2:1 PR2:2

≥ 0.5 m

4.11 ANCHORING OF CONCRETE POLES IN FIRM SOIL

In soil of good or medium bearing capacity, class E and F, backfill may be done with the excavated
materials and consolidated by compacting in layers not exceeding 200 mm in depth. Levelling
concrete should be added at the bottom.
The minimum depth of the foundations shall be 2.0 m for 33 kV, SWER and 11 kV poles and 1.5 m
for 0.4 kV ones.

PC:1

Concrete C15

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 33 of 62

4.12 ANCHORING OF CONCETE POLES IN SOIL OF LOW BEARING CAPACITY

In soil with low bearing capacity, class G, the pole shall be anchored in a way that ensures complete
safety. The foundation shall be made of concrete according to PC:2 below.

PC:2

0.5m

8 x Ø 16 mm
Stirrups Ø 8 mm Min. 2.0 m (33/SWER/11 kV)
C/C 200 mm Min. 1.5 m (0.4 kV)

Concrete C20

4.13 ANCHORING OF CONCRETE POLES IN LOOSE SAND

If the foundation work is done in an area of loose sand, the use of stayed poles should be considered,
due to lateral stability. In the type below, PC:3, concrete beams are used to support the pole against
horizontal loads.

PC:3

Backfilling

Concrete Beams

Sand

Concrete Plate

4.14 ANCHORING OF STEEL POLES

The pole shall be anchored in a way that ensures complete safety.
Steel poles are generally anchored on concrete foundations adapted to the pole type used.

4.15 STAY ANCHORING

4.15.1 Stay Anchoring in Firm Soil
In soil of good and medium bearing capacity stay anchoring can be obtained by using a mooring
screw, concrete disc or railway sleepers.
The distance between two anchors shall be at least 2 m.

4.15.1.1 Mooring Screw

The anchor shall be screwed in the stay tilting direction with a revolving tool that protects the anchor
handle while turning.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 34 of 62

The rotation will end when the upper part of the anchor is level with the surface. The handle is then
pulled up and an eye bolt is threaded on to the top end. Max. allowed twisting moment is 650 Nm.
FS0

Approx.
1500mm

4.15.1.2 Concrete Disc and Railway Sleeper

The excavation depth for different anchoring types shall be suited to the current kind of soil and tilting
of the stay according to the table below. The anchorage shall at the leading edge rest against
untouched soil. Excavation shall be done in the direction of the stay and possibly additional rod links.
Backfill will be done with excavated materials.
FS1 FS2

n n

Excavation depth (n) in metres (m)

Stay FS1 (Concrete Disc.) FS2 (Sleeper = 850 mm) FS2 (Sleeper = 1300mm) FS2 (Sleeper = 2600mm)
Dist. Bearing Bearing Bearing Bearing
Good Medium Good Medium Good Medium Good Medium
L Dry Water Dry Water Dry Water Dry Water Dry Water Dry Water Dry Water Dry Water
logged logged logged logged logged logged logged logged
½S 1.5 1.8 1.6 1.9 1.0 1.7 1.4 1.8 1.5 1.9 1.6 2.1 1.4 1.6 1.6 1.8
2/3 S 1.4 1.7 1.5 1.8 1.2 1.5 1.3 1.6 1.4 1.8 1.5 2.0 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.7
S 1.3 1.6 1.4 1.7 1.1 1.4 1.2 1.5 1.2 1.6 1.4 1.8 1.2 1.4 1.4 1.6
Where:
L = distance between the stay and the pole at ground level (in m).
S = distance between the ground and stay attachment on the pole (in m).
The above table to be used if ground water level is below 0.5 m, if not use anchoring type FS3, FS4
or FS5.

4.15.2 Stay Anchoring in Soil of Low Bearing Capacity

In soil of low and very low bearing capacity adequate anchoring can be obtained by using railway
sleepers (ties). The excavation depth for different kinds of anchorages must be suited to soil
conditions and tilting of the stay according to the table below.
The anchorage shall at the leading edge rest against untouched soil and in certain cases in
connection with thrust load support. Excavation shall be done in the direction of the stay for the stay
link and possibly additional rod links. In order to prevent the sleepers from floating, the ends are
loaded with heavy material. Back-fill will be done with excavated materials.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 35 of 62

FS3 FS4 FS5

n n n

Excavation depth (n) in metres (m)

Stay Wire Stay Distance Soil, Shear Strength ~ 4N/cm2 Soil Shear Strength < 4N/cm2
(L) FS3 FS3 FS5 FS4 FS5
L = 1300mm L = 2600mm L = 2600mm L = 2600mm L = 2600mm
25 GSW S 1.5 1.1 1.4
50 GSW S 1.8 1.2 2.0
70 GSW S 1.6 1.6 *)
Where:
L = distance between the stay and the pole at ground level.
S = distance between the ground and stay attachment on the pole.
*) Backfilling with heavy material.

4.15.3 Stay Anchoring on Rock

Stay anchoring on rock is done with an anchor bolt (eye bolt). Unconsolidated rock is removed before
drilling. In order to decide correct drilling depth use a bearing collar or a stop lug on the drill. For a
stay wire with a cross sectional area above 50 mm2 a complementary embedment with sulphur or
similar is necessary. On soil covered rock use the necessary length of stay rods extension-link in
order to reach the surface.

FR1 FR2

Extension link

Eye bolt

4.15.4 Strut Pole

Strut pole may be used when it is impossible to stay a pole in a normal way due to clearance or other
reasons. The strut pole shall be attached to the pole at the same level as a normal stay should and
in such way that it takes up the compression strains. The dimension of the pole could be one class
lower than the stayed pole.
In the case the strut pole is substituting a 25 mm2 stay in soil of very low bearing capacity or a 52mm2
stay in medium or low bearing capacity soil the anchoring should be reinforced by a sleeper (850
mm) under the strut.
The strut pole and the sleeper should be fixed together with nails.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 36 of 62

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 37 of 62

5 GROUNDING
5.1 GENERAL
All equipment cases and tanks shall be grounded. On pole mounted or supported equipment, the
cases or tank ground shall be 25 mm2 Cu-wire minimum and shall be carried between the tank and
the ground down lead.
Metal supports (frames, racks or platforms) supporting equipment shall be grounded in the same
manner as set forth above for equipment case ground.
This ground shall also serve as the tank for all equipment directly attached to the metal frame with a
clean tight connection.
Gang operated switch handles shall be grounded
Lightning arresters shall be connected to a driven ground located at the same pole as the arrestors.
The ground wire shall be kept as short and direct as possible.
The resistance shall be less than 10 ohms. The resistance of a separate driven ground shall not be
higher than 100 ohms if the contact resistance should be considered as a constant value.
The exposed length, 3m above ground and 0.5m underground of an earthing wire should be
protected against vandalism, e.g. by steel pipe. All costs for such arrangements shall be included in
the Contract price.
The maximum permissible current/mm2 during 1 second for different conductor material, and
equivalent electrical cross-sectional area factor is:
Copper 200 A 1 (i.e. 25mm2)
Aluminium 100 A 2 (i.e. 50mm2)
Steel 65 A 3.1 (i.e. 95mm2 standard size)
The minimum cross-sectional area of ground wires according to the Regulations is 16 mm2 Cu above
ground and 35mm2 in ground or equivalent electrical cross-sectional area of other material.
NOTE: Reference shall also be made to the Client’s specific requirements in accordance with the
drawings applicable to the project.

5.2 EARTHING RODS

Earthing rods shall be solid, copper-clad steel rods with a minimum diameter of 16 mm with provision
for coupling together with a suitable clamp for connection of ground wire. The copper coating shall
have a minimum thickness of 0.3mm.
The referred rods to be supplied shall be "Copperweld" or equivalent.
When two or more separate rods are installed on the same pole or structure, the minimum distance
between the earthing rods should be at least two times the driven distance into ground, i.e. if one rod
is driven down about 5m the distance to the next rod should be at least 10m.

5.3 EARTH CONDUCTORS

Conductors for connecting poles to earthing shall be galvanized steel wire with a minimum cross-
sectional area of 95 mm2.
The contractor shall choose appropriate conductor as above according to footing resistance and
short circuit current.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 38 of 62

5.4 CONNECTIONS
The ground wire shall be directly connected to the pole with bolted connectors of an approved
material suitable for use with the ground wire such that galvanic action, i.e. chemical reaction
between copper and galvanised steel, is minimised.

5.5 GROUNDING OF 33KV AND 11KV OH-LINES

Poles with transformers, surge arrestors, disconnectors, auto-reclosers or fuse cut-outs shall be
permanently and effectively grounded in accordance with Clause 5.1 – 5.4.

Down lead

To be installed 180º
opposite the handle

Cu 25 mm2
or equivalent

Protection
3200 mm

500 mm

Ground wire Earthing rod

Fe 95 mm2

Grounding of Disconnector

5.6 GROUNDING OF SWER OH-LINES (IF APPLICABLE)

Poles with transformers, surge arrestors, disconnectors, auto-reclosers or fuse cut-outs shall be
permanently and effectively grounded in accordance with Clause 5.1 – 5.4.
SWER lines inside villages should be constructed with under-strung earthwire with the main low
resistance SWER earth electrodes (ME 1 and ME 2) located outside the village to overcome step
and touch potential problems as shown in the figure below.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 39 of 62

Two main electrodes should be installed per village.

The transformer pole earth (TE) consists of two earthing rods.
A clearance of 2 m to any conductors in the vicinity (e.g. fences) should be maintained around a
transformer pole (earth) to avoid step and touch potential problems.
The maximum earth resistance of the main electrodes should be 10 ohms.

Under-strung Earthwire in a Village

5.7 GROUNDING OF 0.4KV OH-LINES

The LV network shall be grounded at the end poles and at each 300 m in accordance with Clause
5.1 – 5.4.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 40 of 62

1 core 50 mm2
ABC Cable or to
Client’s spec

Min. 50 mm

Protection
3200 mm

500 mm

Ground wire
GSW 95 mm2 Earthing rod

Grounding of HDA Conductor in 0.4kV Network

5.8 GROUNDING OF UNDERGROUND CABLE NETWORKS

Cable screens should be grounded at both ends (closed screens) on all cables outside substation
areas. Inside substation areas only one end of the screen should be grounded (open screens).
Cable pillars should be grounded in accordance with Clause 5.1-5.4.

5.9 GROUNDING OF POLE MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

The general layout of the grounding system shall be as follows and fulfilling the requirements in
Clause 5.1-5.4:
Common grounding, i.e. the MV and the LV grounding connected together is recommended since
the risk of potential differences within the area and in the substation itself is lower than for separate
groundings.
Furthermore, it could be difficult to arrange separate groundings since vegetation, earth layers, etc.
easily short-circuits the insulation distance between the grounding systems.
If separate grounding is needed due to high short-circuit currents or other reasons, the distance
between parts connected to respectively grounding system shall be at least 50 mm in air or wood.
The distance between the MV and LV grounding shall be at least 20 m.
The neutral point of the transformer winding, i.e. the neutral point of the star winding shall have a
ground wire directly connected to the earthing busbar. The cross-sectional area should be as stated
below:

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 41 of 62

Transformer rating Cu-conductor

< 25 kVA 16 mm2
26 - 50 kVA 25 mm2
51 - 100 kVA 70 mm2
101 - 200 kVA 2 x 70 mm2
The transformer tank shall have a ground wire, 25 mm2 Cu-wire, directly connected to the earthing
busbar.
The neutral busbar within the LV switchgear shall be connected directly to the grounding wire
entering there. The connection should be done by a 50 mm2 Cu-conductor.
One separate ground wire, 25 mm2 Cu-wire, shall connect all other exposed metal parts, in contact
with the electrical equipment or the frame of the LV switchgear to the earthing bar.
If a fence is built around the pole mounted transformer, the fence shall be grounded.

Grounding of Pole Mounted Transformer

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 42 of 62

5.10 GROUNDING OF SUBSTATIONS

The general layout of the grounding system shall be as follows and fulfilling the requirements in
Clause 5.1-5.4:
Minimum two earthing rods in the ground with a common earth resistance of 10 (ten) ohms maximum.
The rods shall be connected by two separate earth conductors to the earthing busbar within the
substation building.
The metal frame of the MV switchgear shall be connected to the earthing busbar by a 95 mm2 Cu-
conductor.
The neutral point of the transformer winding, i.e. the neutral point of the star winding shall have a
ground wire directly connected to the earthing busbar. The cross-sectional area should be:
Transformer rating Cu-conductor
> 300 kVA 2 x 150 mm2
301 - 500 kVA 3 x 150 mm2
501 – 1 250 kVA 400 mm2
The transformer tank shall have a ground wire, 95 mm2 Cu-wire, directly connected to the earthing
busbar.
The neutral busbar within the LV switchgear shall be connected directly to the grounding wire
entering there. The connection should be done by a 95 mm2 Cu-conductor.
One separate ground wire, 50 mm2 Cu-wire, shall connect all other exposed metal parts, in contact
with the electrical equipment or the frame of the substation to the earthing bar.
The substation shall be surrounded by an earthing conductor with two separate connections, either
directly to the earthing rods or to the earthing busbar. The earthing conductor shall be buried 0.5 m
under the ground surface and 0.5 m outside the foundation (walls) of the substation building.

Grounding of Substation

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 43 of 62

6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
REQUIREMENTS
6.1 INRTODUCTION
This chapter outlines the Contractor’s duties and responsibilities with respect to environmental
protection during the execution of the project. This Chapter shall be read in conjunction with Part 4
– Specifications for Worksite Environmental, Social, Health and Safety Management (ESHS) -
(Volume 4). Where there are any discrepancies between this Section 14 (T-S-11-001 –
Environmental Protection Requirements) and Part 4 – Specifications for Worksite Environmental,
Social, Health and Safety Management (ESHS) - (Volume 4), the provisions as provided in Part 4 –
Specifications for Worksite Environmental, Social, Health and Safety Management (ESHS) – Volume
4, shall take precedence after first seeking clarity with the Employer/Engineer.
Note: In the specifications, the terms: He/Her; His/Hers; Its, etc are gender neutral.
The Contractor shall carry out the specified environmental protection requirements to the approval
of the Employer.
The Contractor shall also implement additional mitigation measures in accordance with the
Environmental Management Plan (EMP), the Resettlement Plan (RP) and the Resettlement Action
Plan (RAP) as specified elsewhere in the Contract or in Part 4 – Specifications for Worksite
Environmental, Social, Health and Safety Management (ESHS) – Volume 4. Where reference is
made to Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) or Environmental Management Plan (EMP) and/or
general environmental requirements, these shall be taken to also include the social component (e.g.
ESMP or ESIA).
It is not the Employer's intent to specify all environmental requirements or to set forth those
requirements adequately covered by applicable standards. The Contractor shall bear the full
responsibility with all the requirements herein and the costs of compliance are deemed to be included
in the unit rates in the Schedule of Quantities.
No deviations shall be made from this specification unless waived or modified in writing by the
Employer. The Contractor(s) shall obtain from its sub-contractor a statement as to compliance with
this specification without exception and/or if there are any exceptions, these shall be described in
detail and included in the Contractor’s Tender. The Contractor shall add a statement that no other
exceptions are taken to this specification.
The project must conform to environmental standards required by ISO 14001 and also all the
standards as stipulated in Part 4 – Specifications for Worksite Environmental, Social, Health and
Safety Management (ESHS) – Volume 4.

6.2 SCOPE
6.2.1 General
This chapter outlines the Contractor’s duties and responsibilities with respect to environmental
protection during construction of overhead AC distribution lines rated 11 kV and above.
The Contractor shall carry out the specified environmental protection requirements to the approval
of the Employer. It is recommended (but not a must) that the Contractor participates in local
initiatives beneficial to the communities along which the line route passes. Such activities will be to
the Contractor’s own expense. The Contractor shall not partake in any politically related activities
without seeking the approval of the Employer.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 44 of 62

If so instructed by the Employer, the Contractor shall implement additional mitigation measures
payable under the applicable rates in the Daywork Schedule.
It is not the Employer's intent to specify all environmental requirements or to set forth those
requirements adequately covered by applicable standards. The Contractor shall bear the full
responsibility with all the requirements herein and the costs of compliance are deemed to be included
in the unit rates in the Schedule of Quantities.
No deviations shall be made from this specification unless waived or modified in writing by the
Employer. The Contractor(s) shall obtain from its sub-contractor a statement as to compliance with
this specification without exception and/or if there are any exceptions, these shall be described in
detail and included in the Contractor’s Tender. The Contractor shall add a statement that no other
exceptions are taken to this specification.

6.2.2 Services to be provided by the Contractor

The Contractor shall provide the services specified in the Technical Schedules. The Contractor shall
include as part of his bid a clear Environmental and Social policy and all associated
procedures/responsibilities that make up the Environmental and Social Management System
(ESMS) policy as stated in Part 4 – Specifications for Worksite Environmental, Social, Health and
Safety Management (ESHS) – Volume 4.

6.2.3 Planning Document

The Contractor shall submit a Construction ESMP and all required applicable management plans as
per the project Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP), as referenced in Part 4 –
Specifications for Worksite Environmental, Social, Health and Safety Management (ESHS) – Volume
4. The planning document so provided should have a clear indication of the organisation and
technical provisions that are anticipated to satisfy the ESHS Specifications.

6.2.4 Services to be provided by the Employer

The Employer shall provide the services listed in the Technical Schedules.

6.2.5 Sites
The work sites, located in Mashonaland West Province, are as follows:
 Alaska 132kV substation extension, to accommodate a 132kV feeder bay to supply a
proposed 132kV transmission line to a new substation at Karoi substation;
 Alaska – Karoi 132kV transmission line (approximately 85km long);
 Proposed Karoi 132/33kV substation
 3 x 33kV lines linking the proposed Karoi 132/33kV substation and existing Karoi 33/11kV
substation.
 11kV and 33kV lines, located within Karoi town, Makonde and Hurungwe districts.
The Contractor shall provide a Site Environmental Protection Plan (SEPP) for each of the sites
mentioned above.

6.2.6 Reporting and Project Documentation

6.2.6.1 Detailed Monthly Progress Reports (Environmental)
The Contractor will prepare monthly reports (MPR), starting one (1) month after the start of
construction, to form part of the project MPR. The monthly progress reports, to be submitted by
the first day of each calendar month, will include:
(i) Status list of ESHS related local permits and clearances;
(ii) Status of implementation of the ESMP

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 45 of 62

(iii) ESHS non-conformances and action taken to rectify the ESHS con-conformances
(iv)Accidents and incidents (i.e. Occupational health and safety)
(v) Complaints and disputes
(vi)Results / follow-up of inspections by local authorities, if any.

6.2.6.2 Detailed Quarterly Progress Reports (Environmental)

The Contractor will prepare detailed environmental quarterly progress reports (EQPR), to be
included in the project QPR, starting the first calendar quarter after commencement of construction.
The environmental QPR will focus on activities performed concerning environmental and social
mitigation measures.
As part of the reporting, the EQPR will include the same information as the EMPR and also the
following:
(i) Violation of any law or international agreement;
(ii) Fatality or serious (lost time) injury;
(iii) Significant adverse effects or damage to private property (e.g. vehicle accident); or
(iv)Gender based violence (GBV), sexual exploitation or abuse (SEA), sexual harassment or sexual
misbehavior, rape, sexual assault, child abuse or defilement, or other violations involving
children,
(v) Contractors’ notifications on ESHS metrics as shared with the Clients (when they happened).

6.3 MONITORING
The Contractor shall provide all the resources needed for monitoring the project ESHS as stipulated
in Part 4 – Specifications for Worksite Environmental, Social, Health and Safety Management
(ESHS) – Volume 4. Such resources shall be required to be on site on a full time basis to monitor
the works. The Contractor’s ESHS monitoring resources will report to the Employer's Site Manager
and participate in all site meetings and the day-to-day running of the project.
The environmental monitoring will mainly concentrate on the following aspects of preventative or
potential impacts minimisation measures during construction:
• site establishment
• soil erosion
• noise and dust nuisance
• pollution (water, human waste, litter, etc.)
• disruption of the socio-economic fabric
• local employment and other specified benefits to indigenous communities.
• waste management / disposal
• storage of hazardous / inflammable substances
• toilet / wash facilities (etc.);
• local employment and other specified benefits to indigenous communities.

In addition, the ES Contractor’s ESHS resources for the project will assist in handling Right of Way
issues falling under the responsibility of the Employer and the Contractor.
The Contractor shall include clear procedures and means of verification, identification, control and
management of non-compliances as stipulated in Part 4 – Specifications for Worksite Environmental,
Social, Health and Safety Management (ESHS) – Volume 4.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 46 of 62

6.4 THE PURPOSE OF THE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

REQUIREMENTS
The construction, refurbishment or upgrading of Transmission Substations gives rise to potential
environmental impacts associated with earth-moving, loss of vegetative cover, foreclosure of other
land uses, soil erosion; degradation of vistas, destruction of cultural sites and interference with
movements of wildlife, livestock, and local residents. The impacts of maintenance and repair,
although similar, are less significant than those from construction because the latter breaks
previously undisturbed ground, with potential ecological and social implications. Substations exert
few indirect impacts. Virtually all-environmental impacts of substations are direct and occur at the
area of the substation.
Any standard contract for the construction, refurbishment or upgrading of substations contains
general clauses that promote environmental protection during construction.
In general efforts shall be made to prevent adverse impacts, as long as this is technically and
economically feasible. Other impacts shall be mitigated within the context of the construction
contract, hence the requirements in this Chapter.

6.5 ADMINISTRATIVE INSTITUTIONS

In addition to these requirements, the Contractor shall comply with the statutory requirements of
Zimbabwe.
Relevant institutions and offices that may be contacted as needed are listed in the Technical
Schedules. The Contractor shall adhere to the following acts:

• Environmental Management Act [Chapter 20:27]

• Water Act (Cap. 20:24]

• Forest Act [Chapter 19:05]

• Agricultural Land Settlement Act [Chapter 20:01]

• Parks and Wildlife Act [Chapter 20:14]

• National Museums and Monuments Act [Chapter 25:11]

• Communal Land Act [Chapter 20:04]
• Land Acquisition Act [Chapter 20:10]

• Mining and Minerals Act [Chapter 21:05]

• Explosives Act [Chapter 10:08]
• Parks and Wildlife Act [Chapter 20:14]

• The Roads Act [Chapter 20:14]

• Factories and Works Act [Chapter 14:08]

• Rural Land Act [Chapter 20:18].

Relevant ministries and offices that may be contacted as needed are listed in the Technical
Schedules. These institutions are located in the provinces where the following ministries or
authorities are located;.

• Environmental Management Authority

• Parks and Wildlife Management Authority
• Agricultural Rural Development Authority

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 47 of 62

• City / Town Councils (various)

• Rural District Councils (various)

• Department of Natural Resources

• Ministry of Agriculture
• Ministry of Economic Planning and Investment Promotion

• Ministry of Energy and Power Development

• Ministry of Environment
• Ministry of Health and Child Welfare
• Ministry of Industry and Commerce

• Ministry of Labour and Social Welfare

• Ministry of Lands and Rural Resettlement

• Ministry of Local Government and Urban Development

• Ministry of Mines and Mining Development
• Ministry of Public Works
• Ministry of Transport, Communication and Infrastructural Development

• Ministry of Water Resources and Development

• Ministry of Women’s Affairs, Gender and Community Development

• Ministry of Youth Development, Indigenisation and Empowerment

• National Museums and Monuments of Zimbabwe
• Provincial Governors (various)
• Rural Electrification Agency

• Village Development Committees

• Village Chiefs (various)

• Ward Development Committees
• Zimbabwe Electricity Supply Authority Holdings
• Zimbabwe Farmers’ Union

• Zimbabwe National Water Authority

In addition, various regulations and statutory instruments have been promulgated under the above
Acts. Of particular note are:-
i. Water (Effluent and Wastewater Standards) Regulations, 1977 (Amended 1982);
ii. Public Health (Effluent) Regulations, 1977;
iii. Explosives Regulations, 1989 (1990) Statutory Instrument 72 of 1989;
iv. Natural Resources (Protection) Regulations, 1976;
v. Factories and Works (General) Regulations RGN No. 263 of 1976
It should be noted that the Environmental Management Act above is an Act to provide for the
sustainable management of natural resources and protection of the environment; the prevention of

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 48 of 62

pollution and environmental degradation. This Act repealed the Natural Resources Act [Chapter
20:13]; the Atmospheric Pollution Prevention Act [Chapter 20:03]; the Hazardous Substances and
Articles Act [Chapter 15:05] and the Noxious Weeds Act [Chapter 19:07].
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to familiarise himself and ensure compliance with the above Acts,
regulations and statutory instruments, and any other Acts not listed above which might be relevant
to his operations. Additional guidelines and/or protection measures issued by the respective
Government Ministries or Departments shall also be considered by the Contractor.
In addition, the Contractor shall also adhere to international standards as stated in Part 4 –
Specifications for Worksite Environmental, Social, Health and Safety Management (ESHS) –
Volume 4, including the African Development Bank (AfDB) Integrated Safeguards System (ISS).
The Contractor shall also ensure that international best practice and applicable AfDB ISS are strictly
adhered to.

6.6 CONTRACTOR’S CODE OF CONDUCT

In general, human beings are normally averse to invasion of privacy, regardless of status of society
(modern or traditional). They expect an element of respect from outsiders.
Therefore, the contractor shall prepare a draft code of conduct for the workforce for submission to
the Employer before commencement of work. The code of conduct shall be discussed during the
planning phase of the project and thereafter finalised and implemented.

6.7 EMPLOYMENT AND SUB-CONTRACTING

6.7.1 Employment
It is preferred that the Contractor and his Sub-contractors employ local residents of the area in which
each substation site is located. In the case of unskilled labour, the Contractor shall endeavour to
avoid employment of people from outside the area at the expense of locals. Monitoring of local
recruitment shall be carried out by the Employer/Engineer and this shall be included in the periodic
monitoring reports.

6.7.2 Sub-Contracting
The Contractor shall endeavour to engage local sub-contractors where possible, particularly in areas
not requiring specialist substation construction skills, such as:

• Access road construction and maintenance;

• Excavation and/or concrete works for foundations;
• Haulage of materials;
• Watering of roads for dust abatement;
• Rehabilitation and maintenance of disturbed areas;
• Road maintenance;
• Construction and maintenance of any buildings required for site establishment;
• Catering;
• Refuse disposal;
• Security.

6.8 ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS OF DESIGN

The following safety feature shall be applied (where applicable):
The transformer foundation plinth for ground mounted transformers shall be designed with a sump
to trap oil in the event of accidental spillage; the sump shall be sized to accommodate all the oil in
the transformer, including allowances for expansion of the oil due to high temperature. The design
of the transformer sump / oil bund arrangement shall also include connection via concrete pipes to
a reinforced concrete oil containment tank sized to suit the specified volume of transformer oil. The

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 49 of 62

sump shall be covered with a steel grid overlaid by a layer of stones, to reduce oxygen supply and
thereby minimise the risk of oil fires. See also specifications for transformers and for civil works.

6.9 GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR CONSTRUCTION

In general the Contractor shall conduct his activities so as to cause the least possible disturbance to
existing amenities, whether natural or man-made, and so as to comply with all relevant statutory
requirements.
The Contractor shall abide by the following general environmental guidelines during the course of
undertaking the works.
• The Contractor shall produce their own Environmental Management Plan, Health and Safety
Plan, including an Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan and method statements for all
construction activities related to the distributio works for approval by the Employer / Engineer,
prior to commencement of physical works
• No work shall be carried outside the defined area of the Works without the prior written approval
from the Employer.
• The Contractor shall take all necessary actions to ensure that water quality in nearby rivers and
streams is not adversely affected. Other than that which must be there for operational reasons,
no construction activity will take place within 30 metres of a riverbank, whether the riverbed is dry
or wet.
• The effects of runoff and erosion within construction areas shall be minimised.
• To minimise air and noise pollution, contractors shall use only equipment in good condition, which
shall be properly maintained.
• Blasting shall only be carried out when unavoidable. Where blasting has to be carried out it shall
be strictly controlled.
• On-or off-site, workers shall not wantonly kill or injure any creatures except those (such as rats,
flies and mosquitoes) known to be vectors of disease.
• The Contractor's Health & Safety Officer and the Employer shall document accidents at a
construction site. Safety rules and procedures shall be tightened in the light of that information to
reduce the chances of recurrence.
• Contractors shall at all times exercise due care and diligence not to damage fences, walls, drains,
roads, tracks, buildings, fields, pasture, hedges and trees. All damage shall be made good at the
first opportunity, at the Contractor’s cost.
• Disturbance or disruption of the daily lives of local communities and their livelihood, including
noise and dust pollution shall be minimised in as far as is practicable.
• The contractor shall ensure that the construction Site is maintained in a neat and tidy condition
at all times.
• The Contractor shall employ as many locals as is practically possible for the execution of the
Works.

The following specific environmental guidelines shall be observed and implemented by the
Contractor in mitigation of potential environmental impacts in areas of activity, access roads, borrow
areas, spoil disposal areas, labour camps and storage areas.

6.10 TEMPORARY WORKS

• Use of existing facilities such as access roads and site establishment sites and/or their
improvement shall be preferred to the construction of new ones, wherever possible.
• Public access roads used by the Project shall be maintained in a trafficable, safe and minimum
dust condition, at all times. Driving speeds shall be limited to 40km/hr. Courtesy shall be extended
to other road users with all construction traffic expected to give way to members of the public.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 50 of 62

• A minimum of two toilets for temporary camps, and full ablution facilities for permanent camps
shall be provided. The use of the bush for relieving oneself shall be strictly prohibited. Latrines at
camps will be closed and sealed after completion of works.
• Camps and storage areas shall be located away from drainage courses and wetlands. Wherever
possible, they will be sited within urban industrial areas.
• Camps and work-sites shall be kept clean and tidy.
• Fuel, lubricants and other chemicals shall be stored in above ground storage facilities such that
the entire surface area can be visually inspected. Tanks shall be inspected twice daily and any
leakage stopped immediately.
• Sumps surrounded by low bunds and floored with impermeable material shall be constructed
beneath all oil storage tanks. Other than trivial amounts, oil spilled to sumps will be removed for
recycling or safe disposal.
• Oil changes in machinery and equipment including vehicles shall take place only in depots (never
in the field). Drip pans will be placed under the equipment throughout oil changes and lubrication.
• Construction workers are discouraged from woodcutting and fishing, and shall be dismissed for
unauthorised hunting. Contractors and their workforce may use local supplies of wood, within
moderation, if there is no local shortage; but they should purchase wood from the local population
rather than just taking it freely.
• Demobilisation from a site will include removal and safe disposal of all temporary structures and
wastes. Stored topsoil shall be restored to site which will be planted with indigenous grasses,
where instructed by the Employer. No un-drained water will remain on site.

6.11 PROTECTION OF VEGETATION

The Contractor shall submit clear procedures on how they intend to approach vegetation clearance
and management, including a restoration plan (species, selection, sites, planning, monitoring and
nursery)

6.11.1 General Woodland Vegetation

The Contractor shall ensure that all work is undertaken in a manner that minimises the impact on
vegetation, outside the immediate area of the Works. The following shall apply with respect to the
protection of areas of vegetation adjacent to the area of the Works.

• Spoil shall not be heaped directly against trees if in so doing it can damage the stem.
• No tree or other combustibles outside the area of the works shall be burned for any purpose.
• Where the Works involve clearing and ground excavation, top-soil and sub-soil shall be selectively
removed and stockpiled separately for replacement in the reverse order in which they were
removed, to facilitate reinstatement of sites and their subsequent natural rehabilitation.
• Earth-moving equipment shall be thoroughly washed before bringing to site and the washings
caught in a sump, and incinerated. So doing is intended to destroy adhering seeds and soil

6.11.2 Rare and Endangered Species

Prior to clearing or stripping any area, any protected plant species found should be reported to the
Employer, who will provide specific guidelines for their removal and transplanting.

6.11.3 Wetland Areas

Wetlands are frequently nesting areas for reed nesting bird species, and are natural habitats for a
variety of sensitive ecological communities. Where disturbance of these sensitive areas cannot be
avoided, the following construction guidelines shall apply:

• Construction work shall, where possible, be restricted to the late dry season.
• Wetlands shall be excavated by approved methods, that avoid the development of quagmire
conditions and subsurface compaction that would result from the use of heavy machinery.
• After construction, the natural ground level and drainage pattern shall be restored.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 51 of 62

6.11.4 Sites of Special Interest

These are sites that normally are very limited in extent and number. If they contain rare or
endangered species of flora and fauna, then it will be highly desirable that such sites are minimally
disturbed, or preferably, that the line route avoids them altogether.
Sites of special interest shall be identified during the survey, and the conservation practice shall be
specified on a case-to-case basis.

6.12 PROTECTION OF FAUNA

The mitigation guidelines on vegetation, if adhered to, will generally help to protect those species
whose habitat is in the project area.
The Contractor shall ensure that all work is undertaken in a manner that minimises the impact on the
local fauna. The following guidelines shall apply with respect to fauna management and protection.
• Under no circumstances shall any animals be handled, removed, killed or interfered with by the
Contractor, his employees, his subcontractors or his subcontractors’ employees.
• The Contractor, his subcontractors or their employees shall not bring any domestic animals onto
the Site.
• The Contractor shall ensure that the Site is kept clean and tidy and free from rubbish which would
attract animal pest species.
• There shall be no feeding of native animals.
• Where animal tracks are found, these paths shall be kept open and freely passable at all times.

6.13 PROTECTION OF ARCHAELOGICAL AND PALENTOLOGICAL SITES

AND MATERIALS
The following guidelines shall apply during construction:

• In carrying out construction of the Works, the Contractor, subcontractors and their suppliers of
materials shall comply with the provisions of local law.
• The Contractor shall ensure that key members of his staff are familiar with archaeological and
paleontological materials likely to be found in the project area.
• Should the Contractor expose any archaeological artefacts during excavation, work shall cease
immediately and the Employer shall be notified as soon as possible.
• Upon receipt of such notification, the Employer shall arrange for the excavation to be examined
as soon as is practicable, and shall advise the Contractor of necessary actions to be taken.
• Under no circumstances shall archaeological artefacts be removed, destroyed or interfered with
by the Contractor, his employees, his subcontractors or his subcontractors’ employees.

6.14 PROTECTION OF INFRASTRUCTURE AND PRIVATE PROPERTY

The following guidelines shall apply in order to mitigate the impacts of construction activities on public
infrastructure and private property in the project area.

6.14.1 Roads and Road Transport

6.14.1.1 General
In carrying out construction of the Works, the Contractor, subcontractors and their suppliers of
materials shall comply with the provisions of the relevant laws of Zimbabwe. The Contractor shall
submit Traffic Management Plans as part of the construction ESMP and required applicable
management plans as per the project ESMP
Where designated access routes are indicated in the Contract, the Contractor shall use no other
without the approval of the Employer.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 52 of 62

6.14.1.2 Maintenance of Roads

• All public and private roads used by the Contractor, subcontractors or suppliers for the
construction of the Works shall be kept trafficable and free of excessive dirt and mud arising from
the Works.
• Where existing gravel roads are used frequently by the project in any part of the works as access
roads for transporting labour, plant and materials, the Contractor shall contribute towards the
maintenance or upgrading of the roads in any one of the following ways:
a. Routine maintenance, consisting of gravelling and dust control by watering. The level of
contribution, specific programme and equipment to be used shall be agreed with the
Employer,
b. Negotiate a road maintenance/users “fee”, payable to the relevant authorities in lieu of road
maintenance described above.
• The Contractor shall select his preferred option, formulate and implement the necessary
administrative details with relevant parties, without any undue delay. Where there is delay for any
reason, contingency plans shall be put in place, upon approval of the Employer.
• Any area of public road, which is closed because of the Works, shall not be reopened until
appropriate safety and traffic management measures have been completed, and until the
Employer confirms that it is in a suitable condition for use by the public.
• The Contractor shall periodically water all gravel roads in the proximity of dwellings, where these
are heavily used by construction traffic, to minimise dust emission
6.14.1.3 Third Party Access
• The Contractor shall, at all times, maintain access for the authorised representatives of utility
providers and allow emergency operations to be carried out on any utility or service facilities within
the site.
• The Contractor shall not use public or private rights of way for depositing or storing plant or
materials, and shall maintain those parts of the public or private right of way not temporarily
occupied by the Works in a clean, passable and safe condition at all times.
• The Contractor shall execute the Works in such a manner that safe access, (including disabled
persons access, where they existed prior to site possession), to all properties is maintained at all
times. Methods of construction and programming of the Works shall be such that vehicular access
to properties affected by the Works is not restricted. Normal access shall be reinstated
immediately after completion of the Works.
• The Contractor, his employees, subcontractors and their employees, in all instances shall
exercise utmost driving control and driver care.
6.14.1.4 Traffic Safety and Management
• Where work is carried out on or adjacent to a trafficked highway, the Contractor shall ensure that
personnel shall, at all times, wear high visibility fluorescent garments.
• All proposals, details, execution, maintenance, removal and necessary reinstatement associated
with traffic safety and management, temporary decking, road crossings for transmission lines,
and other structures on public roads, shall be subject to the approval of the Roads Authority. The
Contractor shall supply all information required for consultation with appropriate authorities,
including the Local Authority and Police.
• All traffic safety and management measures necessitated by the Works shall be fully operational
before the Contractor commences work which affects a highway.
• The Contractor shall provide suitable entry and exit signs, at points of access to and from the site,
for vehicles and plant engaged on the Works.
• The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements including notices to relevant authorities
for the provision, erection, maintenance, repositioning, covering and uncovering and final removal
of all traffic signs as the progress of the works requires.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 53 of 62

6.14.1.5 Water Supplies

• In the event of unavoidable disruption to water supplies, the Contractor shall provide alternative
water supplies to those communities whose supply is affected.
• The provisions in these technical specifications on water pollution control shall apply

6.14.1.6 Private Property, Schools and Institutions

The following guidelines shall apply to mitigate the impacts on private property and institutions:

• The siting of spoil dumps, borrow areas, access roads and labour camps shall avoid areas where
valuable private property will be disturbed or destroyed.
• Where blasting is required, pre-blasting inspections of buildings falling inside the blast pressure
zone shall be carried out by the Contractor to establish and record the status of the buildings.
• Blasting shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of relevant Zimbabwe regulations.
• The provisions in these technical specifications on pollution abatement shall apply.
• Where possible, the Contractor shall confine construction work through schools and institutions
to periods during school holidays. Where this is not possible maximum care shall be taken when
working in and around schools to avoid injuring children and damage to property.
• Work through crop fields shall, if possible, be carried out during the agricultural off-season.
• Where fences are breached or sports fields dug up, the Contractor shall reinstate them
immediately after completion of construction. Where required, alternative facilities shall be
provided.
• The Contractor shall ensure that access to services, fields, water supply by private property
owners is not disrupted.
• Any reasonable conditions demanded by the land owner shall be respected and complied with,
in as far as it is practicable.
• Where any of the above cannot be avoided or is infringed upon, fair compensation shall be
negotiated and paid by the Employer.

6.14.1.7 Wildlife and Vermin Protection

The Contractor shall design, specify and provide adequate mitigation measures to protect the facility
against interaction/intrusion by relevant wildlife types. Consideration shall be given to the substation
location with respect to the prevailing wildlife habitat, the possible interaction/intrusion by specific
wildlife types, the current migration patterns of birds, bird types and any other associated wildlife
patterns.
All buildings shall be adequately bird and vermin proofed.
On award the Contractor shall issue detail designs and specifications for approval, prior to any
equipment/material procurement and installation.

6.14.1.8 Precaution Against Bees

The contractor shall take every precaution to ensure that bees cannot enter steel poles or cross
arms. Pole caps shall be correctly fitted so that no gaps occur and any spare holes in the pole shall
be closed by means of bolts and nuts

6.15 EROSION PROTECTION

• The Contractor shall provide sound procedures, plans and programs for land management and
erosion control measures for approval by the Employer/Engineer.
• Where construction is undertaken on steep embankments of loose soil, measures shall be taken,
as approved by the Employer, to prevent disturbed soil being washed into the rivers during
storms.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 54 of 62

• Slopes may be stabilised with lines of brushwood anchored in place by driven stakes. The stakes
shall be of durable timber so as not to rot or be eaten too quickly by termites. The steeper the
bank, and the looser the soil, the more deeply shall the stakes be driven in.

6.16 REFUSE AND WASTE CONTROL

• Littering shall be avoided. All refuse shall initially be placed in bins provided by the Contractor for
such purposes, and subsequently disposed of in approved refuse dumps. No burning of waste
shall be permitted.
• All hazardous wastes, materials soiled with hazardous wastes and non-biodegradable matter,
shall not be disposed of on the Site. All such waste shall be stored in an approved manner, on
Site, and removed at regular intervals to off Site waste disposal facilities designed to handle such
hazardous waste.
• Wooden packaging, conductor drums, nails and other waste material deemed to be useful might
be donated to the local communities on approval by the Employer.
• The Contractor shall submit Hazardous Materials Management Plans outlining inventory and
conditions of transportation, storage, use, etc.
• The Contractor shall submit clear procedures, plans and prgrams for waste management,
inventory, transportation, storage, reuse and disposal.
• All plans, procedures or programs shall be subject to approval by the Employer/Engineer prior to
being implemented by the Contractor.

6.17 WATER POLLUTION CONTROL

6.17.1 General Guidelines
• The Contractor shall submit procedures for water pollution control, use of water resources and
pollution control.
• The Contractor shall design, construct, maintain and operate suitable temporary pollution control
facilities necessary to prevent the discharge of polluting matter or visible suspended materials
into private property, rivers, streams or existing drainage systems.
• All diverted and pumped water shall be discharged at locations on the surface from which it cannot
re-enter the Works, and in a manner which does not cause erosion, pollution or nuisance to
landholders, other contractors employed by the Employer, or other persons within or adjacent to
the Site.
• Disposal of waste oil from workshops and other areas shall not cause pollution. Oil separators
shall be employed, where necessary.
• The burning of plastic material shall not be permitted and all such material shall be disposed of
in a manner acceptable to the Employer.
• Soil contaminated by cement or other chemicals shall be removed and placed in approved
disposal areas, identified by the Contractor.
• Before any work is carried out in any area of the site, all specified or directed or approved pollution
control measures shall be in place and operational.

6.17.2 Water Discharge from the Works

Wastewater quality standards of effluent from construction sites that shall be maintained for the
general protection of public health and the ecosystem are outlined below.

• Quality of Discharge Water

a. All water effluent discharge from the Works areas, whether from runoff or construction
operations, shall be free from chemical and oil pollution.
b. The wastewater or effluent shall contain no other constituents in concentrations which are
poisonous or injurious to humans, animals, fish or other forms of aquatic life, or which are
deleterious to agricultural use.
• Testing

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 55 of 62

a. Where there is a risk of pollution of water course from the Contractor’s operations, the
Contractor shall arrange to take water samples at each discharge point as and when
necessary, or as directed by the Employer, and shall have the samples analysed for pollutants
by an approved laboratory. Copies of the reports shall be submitted to the Employer within
fourteen days of the tests having been carried out.
b. In addition to samples from the discharge points, the Contractor shall take and have tested
water samples from 500 m upstream and 500 m downstream of the Works. The suspended
sediment concentration in the watercourse, 500 m downstream from the discharge point shall
be limited to 10% above baseline conditions.
6.17.3 Fuel Storage and Workshop Areas
• Fuel dispensing areas and workshop areas for machinery maintenance shall be provided with
concrete hard standing surfaces draining to oil separators.
• Drainage into watercourses from fuel storage and machinery maintenance areas shall be treated
to remove oil and/or fuel.
• Soil contaminated by fuel and oil leakage shall be removed and disposed of off Site in an
approved manner.

6.17.4 Ablution and Toilet Facilities

• The Contractor’s labour force shall be provided with approved adequate ablution and toilet
facilities within labour camps. All construction sites served by migratory site establishments shall
have Blair type or other approved toilet facilities, which shall be properly rehabilitated upon
demobilisation of the transit camp. Alternatively, transit camps may be provided with chemical
toilets.
• Pit latrines and septic tank soak-aways shall be sighted a minimum distance of 30 m down-slope
from wells, boreholes and springs. Distances should be greater in sandy soils, or fissured material
through which water can easily percolate.
• Relieving oneself in the bush or bathing and washing utensils, vehicles and equipment in rivers
and streams shall be strictly forbidden.

6.17.5 Silt Traps

Where necessary, the Contractor shall construct and maintain silt traps to comply with pollution
control requirements. Scoured and transported material shall be cleaned regularly from behind the
silt traps, and traps damaged by accumulation of material reinstated. Silt traps may be constructed
as follows:
• Supports
a. Steel posts 1.5 m long.
b. 100 x 100 x 4 mm diameter galvanised steel mesh.
c. Bidim A14 or equivalent geotextile fabric.
• Installation
a. Steel posts shall be installed at three metre centres maximum and driven into the ground to a
depth of one metre. The mesh shall be securely wired to the steel posts and the geotextile
secured to the mesh. The geotextile shall be buried in a trench to a minimum depth of 200
mm. The trap shall be so located as to impound all drainage water that could find its way into
the protected water
The Contractor is at liberty to propose, for approval, alternative silt trap design whose performance
shall be equal to or better than those specified above.

6.17.6 Sedimentation Ponds

• The Contractor shall construct, operate and maintain adequately sized sedimentation ponds with
suitable oil traps at each point where water is discharged from the works, or as otherwise directed

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 56 of 62

by the Employer. Construction of the ponds shall take place prior to topsoil stripping or any other
construction activity in the areas to be drained.
• Unless otherwise approved by the Employer, all water emanating from surface and underground
excavations shall be discharged into these sedimentation ponds, to remove sand, silt,
cementitious material and other suspended matter. The Contractor shall apply pH correction,
carry out other treatment as necessary to achieve the specified standard for water discharge from
the Works. Should any oil escape from the oil separator to enter the pond, the outflow from each
sedimentation pond shall be arranged so as to prevent any floating oil from leaving the pond
irrespective of the volume of water entering the pond.
• Drainage conduits or channels shall be sized to adequately handle the expected flows.
• Ponds shall be constructed using suitable materials natural to the site. They shall be sub-divided
to enable alternative sections to be cleaned while other sections are in operation.
• To ensure the satisfactory operation of the system, accumulations of silt and oil shall be removed
and disposed of by the Contractor at intervals, and in areas, approved by the Employer.
• The sedimentation ponds shall be emptied only by discharge from outlet pipes following treatment
of the stored water.
• Natural ground water and storm water from areas outside the immediate area of the Contractor’s
activities shall be prevented from flowing into the ponds.

6.17.7 Groundwater
• The Contractor’s working methods and systems shall be designed so as not to significantly affect
groundwater around the Works. Removal of ground water shall not cause damage to the Works,
or to the property of third parties, and shall not cause nuisance.
• Significant lowering of the natural groundwater table shall be avoided.
• Disposal of water taken from the works shall be in a safe and proper manner, and shall fulfil the
pollution control requirements specified in these specifications.
• Temporary works for the control of groundwater shall be removed and the ground reinstated when
they are no longer required.

6.18 AIR POLLUTION CONTROL

• The Contractor shall take measures, as necessary, to reduce the emission of particulate matter
from blasting operations, excavations, road transport, rock crushing, material sieving, borrow
areas, and other related construction activities.
• Equipment and vehicles that exhibit excessive emissions of exhaust gas due to poor engine
adjustment or other inefficient operating conditions shall not be used.
• Burning of cleared trees and brush, combustible materials, construction materials and rubbish
shall only be permitted when the Employer considers atmospheric conditions favourable. It is
preferable that such material be used in slope stabilisation, erosion control works, site
rehabilitation, or made available to local landowner or users.

6.19 NOISE POLLUTION CONTROL

The Contractor shall submit procedures for noise and vibration control for approval by the
Employer/Engineer. Construction activities such as blasting, operation of plant and equipment, and
heavy vehicles will result in noise nuisance to residents and animals in the project area. The following
guidelines shall be followed to restrict noise levels to acceptable limits:

6.19.1 Restriction on Working Hours

The Contractor shall restrict any of his operations, which result in undue noise disturbance to nearby
communities and dwellings to between the hours of 06:00 and 18:00, unless otherwise approved by
the Employer.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 57 of 62

6.19.2 Plant and Equipment

• As far as is practicable, the Contractor shall bring to Site, and employ on the works, only
environmentally acceptable and quietly operating plant and equipment, compatible with the safe
and efficient construction of the Works.
• All plant shall be properly maintained and relevant service records completed. All plant shall be
provided with effective silencers and anti-vibration devices, and shall be operated according to
the manufacturer’s recommendations, in such a manner as to avoid causing excessive noise
emissions or vibrations

6.20 EXPLOSIVES
• The Contractor shall use explosives only in circumstances where it is safe to do so, having due
regard to the safety of persons, third party property and the safety of the works.
• The Contractor shall obtain all necessary licences and shall provide and, where appropriate,
maintain a secure explosives store in accordance with the relevant Explosives Regulations and
to the approval of the Employer.
• Blasting shall be carried out carefully so as to avoid loosening or shattering rock beyond the
required line of excavation, and all loose or shattered rock shall be removed by scaling down or
other means before personnel will be permitted to restart operations after blasting.
• Notices of blasting operations shall be posted on site. Before each firing, the Contractor shall give
audible warning, clear the area, and shall take positive measures to prevent personnel from
entering the danger area.
• The Contractor shall strictly comply with the provisions of Zimbabwe law.
• Explosives shall be stored in structures appropriately designed for them.
• Where there is blasting in and close to rivers, no pollution of watercourses resulting from the
chemicals shall be permitted.
• Where explosives may damage existing foundations or structures, alternative methods, such as
silent demolition, shall be employed using approved chemicals.

6.21 STOCKPILES AND SPOIL DUMPS

• Where no longer required, stockpiles and spoil dumps shall be shaped and re-vegetated to blend
with the local topography as far as is practicable.
• Drainage shall be provided to control base water flow such that migration of fines is kept within
the stockpile or dump.
• Where possible, old borrow pits shall be used for disposal sites in preference to undisturbed sites.

6.22 BORROW AREAS AND QUARRY SITES

• The Contractor shall submit procedures for selection and management of borrow areas, backfill
material, stockpile sites and access roads.
• Borrow pits and quarry sites shall be excavated in such a manner that water, except for direct
precipitation, will not collect and stand therein.
• In operating borrow pits and quarry sites, the requirements in these specifications on water, air
and noise pollution shall apply.
• When locating borrow pits, all wetlands, archaeological sites, and burial sites shall be avoided.
• Special care shall be exercised for borrow areas located in stream courses. The following
guidelines shall apply:
a. Before removing or preparing to remove river sand from any stream, approval shall be
obtained from the relevant authorities.
b. The Contractor shall comply with provisions of Zimbabwe regulations regarding conditions for
abstraction of sand.
c. Sand abstraction and rehabilitation works shall, where possible, be undertaken in the dry
season.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 58 of 62

d. Before undertaking any sand abstraction, the Contractor shall submit plans, including safety
provisions, for sand abstraction for approval by the Employer.
e. In accessing the riverbed to remove sand, care shall be taken not to damage the stream banks,
and where possible existing access routes shall be utilised. In all cases a single route shall be
used to access the river. The extraction of sand shall be limited to riverbed deposits. Priority
shall be given to desilting operations where possible.
f. The use of plant and machinery in the riverbed to abstract the sand shall be minimised as
much as possible. A back-acting excavator, with limited usage of a bulldozer or a shovel dozer,
shall undertake excavation and loading.
g. The Contractor shall take all measures necessary to minimise water pollution for the protection
of downstream users. The measures shall include temporary diversion of the stream, if
necessary.
h. The Contractor shall avoid stockpiling sand in the vicinity of the sand abstraction site, and
shall, as far as possible, load sand directly onto trucks for haulage. If stockpiling cannot be
avoided, the sand piles shall be located a minimum distance of 30 m from the riverbanks.
i. The contractor shall rehabilitate the sand abstraction site soon after extracting the required
amount of sand, in accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
j. Boulders shall reinforce unconsolidated bank material disturbed by sand abstraction works or
gabions fitted flush with the bank.
k. Slopes on bank approaches shall be adequately protected as appropriate to prevent erosion.
6.23 LABOUR CAMPS
In establishing labour camps, the following general guidelines shall apply:

• Camps shall be sited on naturally level ground and on deep soils suited to the construction of
ablution and toilet facilities.
• Sites shall not impinge on scenic undisturbed areas or other areas used by the public, and shall
be screened from major roads. No labour camp shall be established in National Parks.
• The provisions in these specifications for the protection of vegetation, wetlands, animals and
pollution control shall apply.
• Drainage facilities shall be installed in and around the site to prevent storm water from flooding
the site.
• Cutting of indigenous trees for firewood for cooking and warming shall be strictly prohibited. The
Contractor shall supply the labour force with adequate firewood.
• Grass and forest fires shall be prevented by sound control of cooking and warming fires.
• Proper security measures shall be employed to ensure that public property in the vicinity of the
site is not pilfered or damaged by the labour force.
• The Contractor shall provide own facilities so as to avoid over-stressing of existing local medical
facilities.
• A First Aid post and portable chemical toilets shall be provided at each temporary labour camp.
• Adequate accommodation and ablution facilities shall be provided to avoid overcrowding.
• All non-migratory labour camps shall be fenced and gated. Access into and out of the camps shall
ensure human and traffic safety, at all times.
• On demobilisation, the area shall be made good and re-vegetated in accordance with the
provisions in these specifications.
• Permanent structures shall be handed over to local communities at the end of the Contract.

6.24 HEALTH
The transient nature of distribution lines and substations construction could serve as a vehicle for
spreading disease such as cholera and some resistant strains of STD and malaria, particularly in
densely populated areas. To minimise the spread of communicable diseases the following guidelines
shall apply during construction:

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 59 of 62

• Where practicable, and without prejudice to the Contractor’s other contractual obligations,
preferential employment shall be given to members of the local community through which the
work front or fronts will be located during the course of construction of the transmission line. This
policy will minimise migrant labour and the spread of communicable diseases with which it is
associated.
• The Contractor shall provide health facilities and First Aid posts for the labour force to avoid over-
stressing existing facilities. Such facilities shall be properly staffed.
• In areas where malaria is prevalent, preventive medicines shall be distributed to the workforce
free of charge, on a regular basis.
• The Contractor shall take measures to educate and sensitise the labour force on the risks of
communicable diseases such as malaria, STD’s, including AIDS. Male and female condoms shall
be distributed to contract workers.
• In the case of serious injuries on site, traffic accidents etc., the Contractor shall formulate a plan
to deal with such emergencies, prior to possession of site, for approval by the Employer.
• Protective clothing shall be issued to categories of the workforce who require such clothing, free
of charge.
• The provisions in these specifications on pollution control and sanitation shall apply.

6.25 TRAINING OF EMPLOYEES

The Contractor shall arrange that all his employees and those of his sub-contractors be trained to
ensure the following:

• All environmental and social aspects for the project, as well as all issues related to the ESHS
specifications (Part 4 – Volume 4).
• A basic understanding of the key environmental features of the Site and its environs.
• Thorough familiarity with the environmental protection requirements as they apply to the Works.
• The ability to identify archaeological artefacts, burial sites, special flora and fauna.
• Awareness of any other environmental matters, which are deemed to be necessary by the
Employer.
• Basic first aid.

6.26 RESPECT FOR CULTURAL VALUES, BELIEFS AND PROPERTY RIGHTS

Sacred sites may exist in the project area. Even if these sites do not fall within the substation impacts
zone, there is always a risk that members of the Contractor’s workforce might stray into them and
desecrate the shrines therein. This could create unnecessary friction between the project and the
local communities.
With respect to contractor/community relations the following guidelines and rules shall apply:
• The Contractor and his sub-contractors shall conduct their operations in a manner that will not
upset the socio-religious order of communities in the project area. Local traditional beliefs shall
be respected.
• In the interest of harmony and good public relations, the Contractor is strongly encouraged to
develop rapport with local chiefs and traditional leaders through regular consultations and
communications.
The Contractor or his sub-contractors are prohibited from entering places considered to be sacred.

6.27 COMPENSATION
Compensation related to the obtaining of Right of Way is the responsibility of the Employer, unless
otherwise agreed in the Contract between the Employer and the Contractor.
Damage occurring as a result of non-compliance with these specifications shall be made good by
the Contractor at his own expense.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 60 of 62

All claims for private property accidentally damaged by the Contractor shall be paid by the Contractor
within a reasonable period of time.

6.28 REHABILITATION OF WORKS AREAS

6.28.1 General
The Contractor shall provide a detailed method and management plan for reinstatement of site. The
Contractor shall rehabilitate disturbed areas of both Permanent and Temporary Works, including but
not limited to quarries, borrow and spoil areas, the Contractor’s works and accommodation areas
(including the areas designated for the Employer’s use) and the areas required for the construction
of temporary access roads, as well as such other areas as may be specified or instructed by the
Employer. Such rehabilitation shall comprise, where necessary, grassing and planting of trees and
shrubs, and erosion protection, and shall be carried out at the earliest opportunity during the course
of the Works. The following general guidelines for the rehabilitation of work areas shall apply:
• On slopes where the risk of erosion is likely, low ridges or beams parallel to the contours, or other
approved erosion control features shall be made across the working width.
• Heavily compacted soils shall be lightly ripped to encourage re-vegetation in areas not prone to
erosion.
• Where coarse substrate exists (e.g. rockwaste, gravel etc.), a layer of subsoil from the stockpiles
shall be placed to a minimum depth of 75 mm and lightly compacted. Topsoil shall then be placed
preferentially on sites of greatest disturbance to a depth of 75 mm on top of the sub-soil layer.
The natural seed store contained in the topsoil should be sufficient for natural re-vegetation over
one to two years.
• On loose or erosion-prone slopes, grass planting or seeding is required, preferably using local
indigenous creeping grasses.
• The planting of grass, trees and shrubs shall be carried out during periods most likely to produce
beneficial results.
• Rehabilitation measures shall be at the latest carried out immediately following completion of
construction of the permanent Works.

6.28.2 Shaping of Areas

• Cut and fill slopes shall be shaped in a manner such that the final ground appears as a natural
extension of the adjacent undisturbed ground profiles.
• Shaped surfaces shall be left slightly rough to facilitate binding with topsoil or the natural
establishment of vegetation.

6.28.3 Grassing
The method of establishing grass may be sodding, hydro seeding or hand seeding as approved by
the Employer.

• Sodding
Areas to be grassed by sodding shall be given a layer of topsoil at least 75 mm thick unless, due
to the presence of suitable subsoil, the Employer determines that the topsoil may be omitted. The
areas to be sodded shall be thoroughly watered beforehand, so that they are wet to a depth of at
least 150 mm when sods are placed. The surface shall be made slightly rough to ensure a good
penetration of roots into the soil. Sods shall be protected against drying out and shall be kept
moist from the time of harvesting until finally placed.
The first row of sods shall, where it is possible, be laid in a straight line and, if on a slope, starting
at the bottom of the slope. The sods shall be butted tightly against each other, care being taken
not to stretch or overlap sods. Where a good fit cannot be obtained, the intervening space shall
be filled with topsoil. Adjacent rows shall be placed with the joints staggered. Each sod shall be

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 61 of 62

held in position by a wooden stake approximately 300 mm long by 20 mm in diameter hammered

into the soil.
• Grass Types
Grass types planted shall be those normally endemic to the area, and shall not be of the exotic
type.

• Maintenance of Grass
All planted grass shall receive a good dressing of suitable fertiliser at about one handful per
square metre (about 400 kg per hectare).
The Contractor shall maintain the grassed areas for a period of 3 months.

6.28.4 Trees and Shrubs

Trees and shrubs shall be planted as directed by the Employer.
Directly after planting, each plant shall be well watered to establish the plant firmly in the soil. After
the soil is set, additional soil shall be added where necessary to bring the whole backfill to within 150
mm of the ground surface, in order to re-ensure that sufficient water can be retained. All trees shall
be tied to a suitable treated timber stake planted firmly in the ground. After planting, the ground
surface around the plant shall be covered with mulch in order to minimise evaporation.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)2_Dist. Gen. Specs.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 62 of 62

Norconsult AS
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission
Project - AKTP

Tender Documents
ZETDC Tender No.______________________

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution

Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)3,
Medium Voltage Overhead Lines – 33-11kV
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)3
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)3,
Medium Voltage Overhead Lines – 33-11kV Revision: 1

Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project

PART 2 – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS (VOLUMES 2A, 2B and 2C)

Section VI(A) - Employer’s Requirements, Substations (Volume 2A)
• A1: General Technical Specifications
• A2: Particular Technical Specifications (Schedules)
• A3: Drawings (Substations)
Section VI(B) - Employer’s Requirements, 132kV Transmission Line (Volume 2B)
• B1: General Technical Specifications
• B2: Particular Technical Specifications (Schedules)
• B3: 132kV Line Drawings
• B4: Line Route Images
Section VI(C) - Employer’s Requirements, Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C)
• C1: Detailed Scope of Works
• C2: Distribution General Specifications
• C3: Medium Voltage Overhead Lines – 33-11kV
• C4: Low Voltage Overhead Lines – 0.4kV
• C5: Underground Cables – 33-11kV
• C6: Substations 33/11-0.4kV
• C7: Technical Schedules
• C8. Distribution Drawings
PART 3 – CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS
(VOLUME 3)
Section VII: General Conditions of Contract (GC)
Section VIII: Particular Conditions of Contract with Appendices
Section IX: Contract Forms

PART 4 – SPECIFICATIONS FOR WORKSITE ENVIRONMENTAL,

SOCIAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT (ESHS) (VOLUME 4)

2020-08-09 Assignment no.: 6035357 7, GIFP, Gaborone, Botswana

1 09 August 2020 Part 2: Employer’s Requirements, Distribution Lines & TRK OLO OLO
Substations (Volume 2C) - Section VI(C)3 – Medium
Voltage Overhead Lines – 33-11kV
Revision Date: Description Compiled Checked Accepted

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 2 of 47

Norconsult AS
Assignment no.: 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)3
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)3,
Medium Voltage Overhead Lines – 33-11kV Revision: 1

Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations

(Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)3 – Medium Voltage Overhead Lines – 33-11kV
Contents
C1: Detailed Scope of Works
Index Contents
1.0 D-S-01-001 Scope of Works
C2: Distribution General Specifications
Index Contents
1.0 D-GS-01-001 General
2.0 D-GS-02-001 Mechanical Design of Overhead Lines
3.0 D-GS-03-001 Poles and Crossarms
4.0 D-GS-04-001 Foundations
5.0 D-GS-05-001 Grounding
6.0 D-SS-06-001 Environmental Requirements
C3: Medium Voltage Overhead Lines 33-11kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-MV-01-001 General
2.0 D-MV-02-001 Insulators and Stays
3.0 D-MV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-MV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-MV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-MV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C4: Low Voltage Overhead Lines 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-LV-01-001 General
2.0 D-LV-02-001 Clamps and Stays
3.0 D-LV-03-001 Conductors
4.0 D-LV-04-001 Hardware
5.0 D-LV-05-001 Apparatus
6.0 D-LV-06-001 Construction Specifications
C5: Underground Cables 33-11kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-UC-01-001 General
2.0 D-UC-02-001 33kV and 11kV Underground Cables
3.0 D-UC-03-001 LV Underground Cables
4.0 D-UC-04-001 Joints and Terminations
5.0 D-UC-05-001 Cable Lugs
6.0 D-UC-06-001 Warning Tape
7.0 D-UC-07-001 Protection Sheets and Pipes
8.0 D-UC-08-001 Cable Pillars
9.0 D-UC-09-001 Construction Specifications
C6: Substations 33/11 – 0.4kV
Index Contents
1.0 D-SS-01-001 General
2.0 D-SS-02-001 Power Transformers
3.0 D-SS-03-001 Pole Mounted Transformers
4.0 D-SS-04-001 Prefabricated Compact Type Substations

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 3 of 47

C7: Technical Schedules

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 4 of 47

Table of Contents

C3 – MEDIUM VOLTAGE OVERHEAD LINES 33-11kV 9

1 D-MV-01-001 GENERAL 10
1.1 General Requirements 10
1.2 Mechanical Design 10
1.3 Poles and Crossarms 10
1.4 Foundations 10
1.5 Grounding 10
1.6 Environmental Protection Requirements (EPRS) 10

2 D-MV-02-001 INSULATORS AND STAYS 11

2.1 Scope 11
2.2 Codes and Standards 11
2.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 11
2.2.2 Compliance with Standards ................................................................................................................ 13
2.3 Definitions and Abbreviations 13
2.4 Technical requirements 16
2.4.1 Description of Services ....................................................................................................................... 16
2.4.2 Compliance with the Specification ...................................................................................................... 16
2.4.3 Operating Environment ....................................................................................................................... 16
2.4.4 General ............................................................................................................................................... 16
2.4.5 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements – Suspension Insulators..................................................... 17
2.4.5.1 Composite Suspension Insulators 17
2.4.5.2 Glass or Porcelain Suspension Insulators 17
2.4.6 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements – Tension Insulators........................................................... 18
2.4.6.1 General 18
2.4.6.2 Material 18
2.4.6.3 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements 19
2.4.7 Pollution Categories ........................................................................................................................... 19
2.4.8 Requirements Common to all Insulator Types .................................................................................... 19
2.4.8.1 Arcing Horns 19
2.4.8.2 Insulator Connection Length 19
2.4.8.3 Dry Arcing Gap 19
2.4.8.4 Creepage or Leekage Length 19
2.4.8.5 Transposition (if applicable) 19
2.4.9 Pin and Shackle Insulators of Ceramic or Glass Materials ................................................................. 20
2.4.9.1 Scope 20
2.4.9.2 General Requirements 20
2.4.10 Pin Insulators of Polymeric Materials .................................................................................................. 20
2.4.10.1 Scope 20
2.4.10.2 General Requirements 20
2.4.10.3 Cores of Polymeric Insulators 20
2.4.10.4 Sheds of Polymeric Insulators 21
2.4.10.5 End Fittings for Polymeric Insulators 21
2.4.10.6 Tolerances on Dimensions 21
2.4.10.7 Adhesive Compounds 21
2.4.10.8 Unacceptable Materials 21

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 5 of 47

2.4.11 Line Post Insulators (where applicable) .............................................................................................. 22

2.4.11.1 Material 22
2.4.11.2 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements 22
2.4.12 Low Voltage and Stay Insulators ........................................................................................................ 22
2.4.12.1 Strain (Shackle) Insulators 22
2.4.12.2 Stay (Guywire Type) Insulators 22
2.4.13 Spares and Special Tools ................................................................................................................... 22
2.4.14 Insulator Designations and Marking ................................................................................................... 22
2.4.14.1 Ceramic and Glass Insulators 22
2.4.14.2 Polymeric Insulators 23
2.4.14.3 Pin Insulators 23
2.4.14.4 Insulator Pins 23
2.4.14.5 Strain Insulator Couplings 23
2.4.14.6 Line Post Insulators 23
2.4.14.7 Stay (Guy Type) Insulators 24
2.4.15 Preparation for Shipping and Storage ................................................................................................ 24
2.4.16 Quality Assurance Requirements ....................................................................................................... 25
2.4.17 Reliability ............................................................................................................................................ 25
2.5 Insulator Installation 25
2.6 Insulator Tests 25
2.6.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 25
2.6.2 Shop Tests ......................................................................................................................................... 26
2.6.3 Design Tests....................................................................................................................................... 26
2.6.3.1 General 26
2.6.3.2 Suspension Type Insulator Unit (for A.C. Insulators) 26
2.6.3.3 Horizontal Line Post /Long Rod Insulators and Insulator String Tests 28
2.6.3.4 Horizontal Line Post /Long Rod Insulators and Insulator String - Inspection and Test Plan
28
2.6.3.5 Quality Conformance Tests (for A.C. Suspension, Line Post and Long rod Insulators) 29
2.6.4 Test Reports ....................................................................................................................................... 29
2.7 Data and Documentation Requirements 29
2.7.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 29
2.7.2 Data and Information to be Furnished with Tender............................................................................. 30
2.7.3 Data and Information to be Furnished After Award of Contract .......................................................... 30
2.7.4 Data Submission Schedule................................................................................................................. 31
2.8 Strain Clamps 31
2.8.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 31
2.8.2 General ............................................................................................................................................... 32
2.9 Stay Insulators 32
2.9.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 32
2.9.1.1 Material 32
2.9.1.2 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements 32
2.9.1.3 Marking 32
2.9.1.4 Testing 32
2.10 Stay Wire 32
2.10.1 Material ............................................................................................................................................... 32
2.10.2 Construction and Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 32

3 D-MV-03-001 CONDUCTORS 33
3.1 Reference Standards 33
3.2 Material 33

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 6 of 47

3.3 Design and Dimensions 33

3.3.1.1 Conditions for Continuous Ratings 34

4 D-MV-04-001 HARDWARE 35
4.1 General 35
4.2 Splices 35
4.3 Repair Sleeves 35
4.4 Repair Sleeves 35
4.5 Jumpers 36

5 D-MV-05-001 APPARATUS 37
5.1 Auto Reclosers, Pole Mounted 37
5.1.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 37
5.1.2 Electrical Data .................................................................................................................................... 37
5.1.2.1 Short-Circuit Currents 37
5.1.2.2 Insulation level 37
5.1.2.3 Nominal Voltage Levels 37
5.1.2.4 Rated Current 37
5.1.2.5 Breaking Capacity 37
5.1.2.6 Duty Cycle 37
5.1.3 Protection and Auto Reclosure Functions........................................................................................... 37
5.1.4 Technical Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 38
5.1.4.1 Mounting 38
5.1.4.2 Design, Corrosion Protection 38
5.1.4.3 Terminals 38
5.1.4.4 Manoeuvre 38
5.1.5 Tests ................................................................................................................................................... 38
5.1.6 Information to be Submitted with the Tender ...................................................................................... 38
5.2 Load Switches 39
5.2.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 39
5.2.2 Electrical Data .................................................................................................................................... 39
5.2.2.1 Short-Circuit Currents 39
5.2.2.2 Insulation Level 39
5.2.2.3 Nominal Voltage Levels 39
5.2.2.4 Rated Current 39
5.2.2.5 Breaking Capacity 40
5.2.3 Technical Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 40
5.2.3.1 Mounting 40
5.2.3.2 Mechanical Strength 40
5.2.3.3 Design, Corrosion Protection 40
5.2.3.4 Terminals 40
5.2.3.5 Manoeuvre 40
5.2.4 Tests ................................................................................................................................................... 41
5.2.5 Information to be Given with the Tender ............................................................................................. 41
5.3 Single-Phase Loadbreak Fuse Cut-Outs 41
5.3.1 Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................... 41
5.3.2 Electrical Data .................................................................................................................................... 41
5.3.2.1 Short-Circuit Currents 41
5.3.2.2 Insulation Level 41
5.3.2.3 Nominal Voltage Levels 41
5.3.2.4 Rated Current 41

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 7 of 47

5.3.3 General Design................................................................................................................................... 41

5.3.4 Information to be Given with the Tender ............................................................................................. 42
5.4 Network Design 42
5.4.1 Placement of Disconnecting Apparatus .............................................................................................. 42

6 D-MV-06-001 CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 43

6.1 Line Routes 43
6.1.1 General Information ............................................................................................................................ 43
6.1.2 Clearing of the Line Route .................................................................................................................. 43
6.1.3 Survey ................................................................................................................................................ 43
6.2 Erection of Poles 43
6.2.1 Location of Poles ................................................................................................................................ 43
6.2.2 Excavation and Backfill ....................................................................................................................... 43
6.2.3 Type and Size of Foundation .............................................................................................................. 44
6.2.4 Erection .............................................................................................................................................. 44
6.2.5 Repair of Damage .............................................................................................................................. 44
6.3 Installation of Insulators and Conductors 44
6.3.1 Insulators ............................................................................................................................................ 44
6.3.2 Repair Sleeves ................................................................................................................................... 45
6.3.3 Stringing Pulleys ................................................................................................................................. 45
6.3.4 Stringing ............................................................................................................................................. 45
6.3.5 Sagging .............................................................................................................................................. 46
6.3.6 Binding................................................................................................................................................ 47

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 8 of 47

Norconsult AS
Assignment no.: : 6035357
Document no.: Section VI(C)3
Alaska – Karoi Power Transmission Project - AKTP | Part 2: Employer’s Requirements – Distribution Lines & Substations (Volume 2C) – Section VI(C)3,
Medium Voltage Overhead Lines – 33-11kV Revision: 1

C3 – MEDIUM VOLTAGE OVERHEAD LINES 33-11kV

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 9 of 47

1 D-MV-01-001 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 1, General.

1.2 MECHANICAL DESIGN

See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 2, Mechanical Design.

1.3 POLES AND CROSSARMS

See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 3, Poles and Cross Arms.

1.4 FOUNDATIONS
See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 4, Foundations.

1.5 GROUNDING
See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 5, Grounding.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS (EPRS)

See Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 6, Environmental Protection Requirements (EPRS).

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 10 of 47

2 D-MV-02-001 INSULATORS AND STAYS

2.1 SCOPE
This Specification sets out the technical (electrical and mechanical) requirements for the
performance, testing and supply of low and medium voltage insulators for the overhead distribution
system only. This specification should not be used for zone substation insulators or insulators that
form part of pole mounted equipment such as pole top switches.
This specification applies to pin, strain (shackle), line post and long rod insulators, which will be
installed on 3 phase 0.4, 11, 22, and 33 kV distribution systems, as well as 19.1 kV SWER single
phase distribution systems (if applicable) throughout the Zimbabwe Electricity Supply and
Distribution (ZETDC) Network. ZETDC operates several different voltage levels on its distribution
networks, hence the need to standardise for all low voltage insulators to 0.4 V and all medium voltage
insulators to 33 kV level.
This Specification also covers the requirements for guy-style stay wire insulators..
It is not the Employer's intent to specify all technical requirements nor to set forth those requirements
adequately covered by applicable codes and standards. The Contractor shall furnish high quality
materials meeting the requirements of this specification and applicable industry standards.
The Contractor shall bear full responsibility that the insulators have been designed and manufactured
in accordance with all standards and applicable regulations and perform under the conditions and to
the standards specified herein.
No deviations shall be made from this specification and standards unless waived or modified in
writing by the Employer. The Contractor shall obtain from its sub-contractor(s)/supplier(s) a
statement as to compliance with this specification without exception and/or if there are any
exceptions, these shall be described in detail and included in the Contractor’s Tender. The Contractor
shall add a statement that no other exceptions are taken to this specification.

2.2 CODES AND STANDARDS

2.2.1 General
The insulators furnished shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, the latest issues of the
following applicable standards, including all addenda, in effect at the time of the purchase order
unless otherwise stated in this specification.

ANSI American National Standards Institute

C29 Standards for Insulators – Composite Distribution Dead End Type
13-2000
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

D578-05 Standard Specification for Glass Fiber Strands

E1131-03 Standard Test Method for Compositional Analysis by Thermo-Gravimetric

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60060-1 General Definitions & Test Procedures

60120 Dimensions of Ball and Socket Couplings of String Insulator Units

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 11 of 47

60305 Characteristics of String Insulator Units of the Cap and Pin Type

60372 Locking Devices for Ball and Socket Couplings of String Insulators

60383-1, 2 Tests on Insulators of Ceramic Material or Glass for Overhead Lines with a
Nominal Voltage greater than 1000 V

60433 Ceramic insulators for A.C. systems. Characteristics of String Insulators

Units of the Long Rod Type

60437 Radio Interference Test on High Voltage Insulators

60471 Dimensions of Clevis and Tongue Coupling of String Insulator Units

60507 Artificial Pollution Tests on High Voltage Insulators to be used on A.C.

Systems
60575 Thermal-mechanical Performance Test and Mechanical Performance Test
on String Insulator Units
60672-1 Specification for ceramic and glass insulating materials. Part 1: Definitions
and classification
60672-2 Specification for ceramic and glass insulating materials. Part 2: Methods of
tests
60672-3 Specification for ceramic and glass insulating materials. Part 3: Individual
materials
60797 Residual strength of string insulator units of glass or ceramic material for
overhead lines after mechanical damage of the dielectric.
60720 Characteristics of Line Post Insulators

60812 Analysis Techniques for System Reliability – Procedure for failure Mode and
Effects Analysis (FMEA).

60815 Guide for Selection of Insulators in Respect of Polluted Conditions

61109 Composite Insulators for A.C. Overhead Lines with a Nominal Voltage
greater than 1 kV - Definitions, Test methods and Acceptance Criteria
61109-am1 Composite insulators for a.c. overhead lines with a nominal voltage greater
than 1000 V – Definitions, test methods and acceptance criteria

61211 Insulators of ceramic or glass for overhead lines. Impulse puncture test in
air
61245 Artificial Pollution Tests on High Voltage Insulators to be used on D.C.
Systems
61325 Insulators for Overhead Lines with a nominal voltage above 1000 V –
Ceramic or Glass Insulator Units for D.C. Systems
61466-1 Composite string insulator units for overhead lines. Standard strength
classes and end fittings
61466-2 Composite string insulator units for overhead lines. Dimensions and
electrical characteristics
61467 Insulators for overhead lines. A.C. power arc tests on insulator tests

61952 Insulators for overhead lines - Composite line post insulators for A.C. with
a nominal voltage above 100V.
ISO International Standards Organization

1459/1461 Hot Dip Zinc Coatings on Structural Steel & Other Allied Products

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 12 of 47

1460 Determination of Weight of Zinc Coating on Zinc Coated Iron and Steel
Articles
1461 (E) Recommended Practice for Hot Dip Galvanisation for Iron and Steel

2178 Methods of Testing of Local Thickness of Electroplated Coatings

9001 Quality System Model for Quality Assurance in Design/ Development,

Manufacture and Testing
9002 Quality System Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation and
Servicing

STRI Sweden Transmission Research Institute

1.92/1 Hydrophobicity Classification Guide

These codes and standards set forth the minimum requirements which may be exceeded by the
Contractor if, in the Contractor's judgment and Employer's acceptance, superior or more economic
designs or materials are available for successful and continuous operation of the Contractor's
materials as required by this specification.
In addition to the applicable standards, the Contractor shall comply with applicable national and local
laws, codes, regulations, statutes and ordinances. The materials and services furnished shall comply
with and not prevent the Employer's compliance with all applicable standards of the local codes.
It is the intent of this specification to allow supply of insulators according to IEC Standards. If the
Contractor customarily produces the specified insulator of national standards other than mentioned,
the Contractor shall describe the equivalences and/or differences of such standards with his Tender.
For any such standards, which are not written in the English language, the Contractor shall make
available copies of an English translation thereof. In any event, the Contractor shall list all those
standards he proposes to use in the supply of the specified insulator.
In the event of any apparent conflict among standards or theses specifications, the Contractor shall
refer the conflict to the Employer for written resolution.

2.2.2 Compliance with Standards

Various Standards are referenced in this Specification. If over the life of the Tender the Standards
change, the Contractor is required to conform to the new edition of the Standard.
Unless otherwise specified herein, the equipment shall be designed, manufactured and type and
routine tested in accordance with the referenced Standards, including all amendments. Where
there is no ZETDC Standard equivalent, International Standards or Codes as defined in this
Specification shall be used. The specified documents contain provisions that, through reference
in the text, constitute requirements of this Specification. At the time of publication of this
Specification, the editions indicated were valid. Information on currently valid national and
international standards may be obtained from the relevant websites of each organisation.

2.3 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

For the purposes of this specification, definitions shall apply as in the relevant standards with the
addition of a few general definitions listed below in alphabetical order.
BIL: Basic insulation level
Cantilever Load: A load applied at the conductor position on the insulator, perpendicular to the
conductor, and perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the insulator. Commonly referred to as
“bending load”.
Cantilever Breaking Load (CBL): A load specified by the manufacturer that represents the
failing load of a non-ceramic composite post insulator. The failing load is the maximum load
attainable under Cantilever load testing and is greater than or equal to the Specified Cantilever
Load (SCL).

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 13 of 47

Chalking: The powder result (usually aluminium oxide) of depolymerisation by UV of elastomers.

Chips, Pits or Blisters: Surface marks on insulator shed material usually caused during the
manufacturing process.
Class A Insulator: An insulator or insulator unit in which the length of the shortest puncture path
through solid insulating material is at least equal to half the arcing distance. Class A insulators are
considered to be un-puncturable.
Class B Insulator: An insulator or insulator unit in which the length of the shortest puncture path
through solid insulating material is less than half the arcing distance. Class B insulators are
considered to be puncturable.
Creepage Factor (C.F.): The ratio between the total creepage distance (It) of the insulator and the
arcing distance (St) of the insulator. It/St
Cycloaliphatic Epoxy Resin: A polymer material used for insulators.
De-lamination: The loss of bonding of fibres to the matrix.
End fitting: Integral component or formed part of an insulator intended to connect it to a supporting
structure, or to a conductor, or to an item of equipment.
Note: Where the end fitting is metallic, the term “metal fitting” is normally used.
EPDM: Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer. A polymer that is an elastomer (synthetic rubber).
EPM: Ethylene Propylene Monomer. A polymer that is an elastomer (synthetic rubber).
EPR: Ethylene Propylene Rubber. A general term encompassing both EPM and EPDM.
ESP™: A proprietary polymer, mainly consisting of an alloy of silicone and EPDM.
EVA: A proprietary polymer, mainly consisting of a co-polymer of ethylene and ethylene vinyl acetate.
Erosion: Irreversible but non-conducting degradation of the surface of the insulator that occurs by
loss of material which can be uniform, localised or tree- shaped.
ESDD: Equivalent Salt Deposit Density
Flashover: A disruptive discharge external to the insulator, and over its surface, connecting those
parts that normally have the operating voltage between them.
Note: The term “flashover” used in this part includes a flashover across the insulator surface as well
as disruptive discharges by spark-over through air adjacent to the insulator.
Highest voltage for equipment: These shall be as defined in the Technical Schedules
Hydrophobicity: A property of a surface material that causes water to bead, rather than forming a
film.
Maximum Design Cantilever Load (MDCL): The polymeric/composite line post insulator cantilever
load rating, assigned by the manufacturer. It is the maximum load that can be applied to the line post
insulator for 96 hours without damaging the core rod. Some manufacturers list this rating as the
Reference Cantilever Load (RCL). ZETDC refers this to term as “The load level above which damage
to the core begins to occur. This value and direction of the load are specified by the manufacturer”.
It forms the basis of the selection of line post insulators.
Minimum Failing Load (MFL): The glass/ceramic insulator minimum failing load rating, assigned by
the manufacturer.
Polymeric Insulator: Insulator whose insulating body consists of at least one organic based
material. Polymeric insulators are also known as non-ceramic insulators. It includes both composites
and cyclo-aliphatic epoxy resin insulator types. Coupling devices may be or not attached to the ends
of the insulating body.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 14 of 47

Note: In this document, when definition polymeric is used, it defines both composite and epoxy resin
insulators, as those form the subgroup of polymeric insulators. If used separately, composite or epoxy
resin terms are used to describe the specific property that belongs only to that subgroup.
Power-frequency withstand voltage: A rated insulation level. The voltage is sinusoidal, with a
frequency at 50 Hz, and a duration of 60 s. Unless stated otherwise this is the ‘wet’ withstand (as
opposed to ‘dry’ withstand).
Profile Factor (P.F.): The ratio of the simplified leakage distance to the actual insulating creepage
distance measured between the two points, which define the spacing - s.
Puncture Distance: The shortest distance through the insulating material between those parts which
normally have the operating voltage between them.
Radio Interference Voltage (RIV): Any effect on the reception of a radio signal due to an unwanted
disturbance within the Radio frequency spectrum. Radio interference is primarily of concern for
amplitude modulated systems (AM radio and television video signals) since other forms of modulation
(such as frequency modulation (FM) used for VHF radio broadcasting and television audio
signals) are generally much less affected by disturbances that emanate from overhead lines.
Rated insulation level: A set of standardised withstand voltages used to characterise an insulator’s
dielectric strength.
Ratios:
s/p: Ratio between shed spacing and overhang.
Note: The ratio s/p describes the limitation on providing arbitrarily too high a leakage distance by
either over dimensioning the shed overhang p or by unjustifiably increasing the number of sheds.
The ratio is important for self- cleaning properties of insulators.
Id/d: Ratio between the creepage distance and clearance.
Note: The ratio ld/d describes the use of the creepage distance in order to avoid local short-circuiting
Routine Test Load (RTL): The RTL is the load applied to all assembled composite suspension/strain
insulators during a routine mechanical test. The load applied to composite insulators that is equal to
or greater than 50 percent of the insulator Specified Mechanical Load (SML) rating. It is also
considered to be the maximum continuous working load of the insulator.
Silicone rubber: Elastomer polymer using silicone, typically polydimethylsiloxane.
Strain Insulator: An insulator placed in a structural support such as termination or any other
arrangement where the insulator is subjected to tensile load.
Specified Cantilever Load (SCL): A load specified by the manufacturer that represents the
ultimate strength of a polymeric line post insulator under cantilever loading. It is not the maximum
working load of the insulator. See MDCL. The strength should be verified during cantilever load tests,
and the historical failure loads (CBL) should justify the manufacturer’s choice of SCL. The SCL
forms the reference point for selection of a polymeric line post insulator.
Specified Mechanical Load (SML): A load specified by the manufacturer that represents the
ultimate strength of a composite suspension/strain insulator under tension. The strength should be
verified during Mechanical Load Tests, and the historical failure loads should justify the
manufacturer’s choice of SML. It is not the maximum working load of the insulator. See RTL. The
ultimate failing load shall be higher than the SML. It forms the basis of the selection of insulators
according to the Technical Schedules.
Note: The SML of an insulator may be reduced by the class of hardware used for the end fittings.
Specified Tensile Load (STL): The load specified by the manufacturer that represents the ultimate
strength of a polymeric line post insulator under tension. The strength is verified by the same testing

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 15 of 47

procedures used to determine the Specified Mechanical Load (SML) for composite suspension/strain
insulators. It forms the basis of the selection of a line post insulator according to the Technical
Schedules.
Standard lighting impulse withstand voltage: A rated insulation level. The voltage is an impulse,
with a front time of 1.2 µs and a time-to-half value of 50 µs.
Television Interference Voltage (TIV) (sometimes referred to as TVI): Special case of radio
interference for disturbances affecting the frequency ranges used for television broadcasting (video
signal).
Tracking: Irreversible degradation consisting of the formation of conductive paths starting and
developing on the surface of an insulating material. These paths are conductive even under dry
conditions.
UBL: Minimum mechanical failing load of a glass or ceramic type insulator.
ULS: Ultimate limit state.

2.4 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.4.1 Description of Services
The insulators covered by this specification are for use in distribution lines rated 0.4 kV and above.
Depending on the requirements stated in the Technical Schedules, the insulator unit should be of
wet-processed porcelain, toughened glass or composite materials.
The insulator unit shall be supplied complete with the required attachments and hardware to receive
the conductor required for the distribution line as specified in the Technical Schedules. The
characteristics of the various attachments or hardware shall be as required in the Technical
Specification for Hardware and its corresponding Technical Schedules.

2.4.2 Compliance with the Specification

Equipment offered that is found on inspection not to conform to this Specification shall be replaced
by the Contractor at no cost to ZETDC.

2.4.3 Operating Environment

The performance of equipment must meet the requirements set out in Distribution Lines &
Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General Specifications, Chapter 6,
Environmental Protection Requirements (EPRS).

2.4.4 General
ZETDC standardises its LV and MV insulators pin and shackle type insulators or suspension and
tension insulators (rated 0.4kV to 33kV) as follows:
1) Pin Insulators: These are mounted vertically, with the conductor above the insulator. They are
fixed to the crossarm by means of a threaded pin. They are also referred to as stand-off insulators.
2) Strain (Shackle) Insulators: These are mounted on a crossarm where the conductor is making
significant deviation. The conductor is supported on the side of the insulator, which is supported
from below by the crossarm.
3) Suspension Insulators: These are insulators which may be mounted vertically on a cross-arm.
These may either be of glass, ceramic (porcelain) or composite type
4) Strain Insulators: These are insulators which are attached to a crossarm (in a horizontal direction
of the line conductors) to hold a conductor at tension. These are used to terminate a conductor
at a crossarm or allow a conductor a significant deviation.
In addition to the above LV and MV insulators, Stay (Guy Type) insulators are also covered by this
specification.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 16 of 47

2.4.5 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements – Suspension Insulators

2.4.5.1 Composite Suspension Insulators
Composite pin insulators for 11kV and 33kV lines should fulfil the minimum requirements in the table
below, including all other details as stated in the relevant Technical Schedules:

Description 11kV Pin 33kV Pin

Insulator Type Polymeric composite Polymeric Composite
Reference Standard IEC 61109 IEC 61109
Rated Voltage 11kV 33kV
Highest Voltage 12kV 36kV
Dry Power Frequency Withstand Voltage 60kV 90kV
Wet Power Frequency Withstand Voltage 35kV 75kV
Dry Power Frequency Flashover Voltage 75kV 130kV
Wet Power Frequency Flashover Voltage 45kV 90kV
Dry Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage Positive: 75kV Positive: 170kV
Negative: 80kV Negative: 180kV
Dry Lightning Impulse Flashover Voltage Positive: 95kV Positive: 210kV
Negative: 100kV Negative: 230kV
Creepage Distance (min) 320mm 900mm
Minimum Failing Load 10-12kN 10-12kN
No. of Weather sheds 3 8

2.4.5.2 Glass or Porcelain Suspension Insulators

Glass or Porcelain (Ceramic) insulators for 0.4kV, 11kV and 33kV lines should fulfil the minimum
requirements in the table below, including all other details as stated in the relevant Technical
Schedules:

0.4kV
11kV Pin 33kV Pin Disc Insulator 0..4kV
Description Shackle Stay
and Shackle and Shackle 11kV Reel Type
Type
Glass or Glass or Glass or
Insulator Type Porcelain
Porcelain Porcelain Porcelain
Reference Standard IEC 60672
Rated Voltage 11kV 33kV 11kV 0.4kV 0.4kV
Highest Voltage 12kV 36kV 12kV 0.6kV
1-min Dry 70-80kV 110-130kV 75-80kV 20-35kV 17kV 25kV
power
Flashover frequency Wet 40-55kV 85-95kV 45-50kV 10-25kV 9kV 12kV
Voltage
+ve 105-115kV 205-210kV 115-130kV -
Impulse
-ve 110-140kV 225-250kV 120-135kV -
1-min Dry 65-75kV 100-110kV 70-75kV ≥23kV
power
Withstand frequency Wet 35-50kV 80-90kV 40-45kV ≥10kV
Voltage
+ve 95-105kV 180-200kV 110-120kV -
Impulse
-ve 105-120kV 190-220kV 115-125kV -
1.3 x
Power Frequency Puncture actual Dry
105-120kV 200-210kV 110-130kV
Voltage Flashover
Voltage
Creepage Distance (min) 270-320mm 600-900mm 290 - 350 -

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 17 of 47

0.4kV
11kV Pin 33kV Pin Disc Insulator 0..4kV
Description Shackle Stay
and Shackle and Shackle 11kV Reel Type
Type
Cantilever Strength 10-12kN 10-12kN - -
Combined Electro-Mechanical
- - 70-120kN 15-16kN 60kN
Strength
Transverse Strength - - - - 13kN
Leekage Distance - - - 66-75mm

2.4.6 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements – Tension Insulators

2.4.6.1 General
If glass or ceramic type, the tension string shall consist of two (2) U70BL discs at a nominal voltage
of 11 kV and four (4) U70BL discs at a nominal voltage of 33 kV and 19,1 kV SWER with shackles,
eye link, ball clevis 16 mm and arcing horns.
If a long-rod polymeric (composite) tension insulator (according to IEC 61466) is used, the SML for
the insulator (11kV, 33kV or 19.1kV SWER) shall be minimum 100kN.

2.4.6.2 Material
The insulators shall be in accordance with IEC 60383 or IEC 61466. The insulating part shall be of
brown-glazed porcelain or toughened glass or composite material and be designed to withstand
alternating current (a.c.).
The cap shall be of malleable cast iron, spheroidal graphite cast iron, or forged steel. The socket
coupling shall be in accordance with IEC 60120 or IEC 61466-1 and have an internal height in
accordance with IEC 60372.
The pin shall be of forged steel. In tensile tests, the pins shall exhibit ductile fractures characterised
by a considerable contraction of area. The pin coupling shall be in accordance with IEC 60120 or
IEC 61466-1.
Cap and pin shall be hot-dip galvanised. The pin shall be protected by a zinc-collar sleeve.
Split-pins shall be of copper alloy or stainless steel and be in accordance with IEC 60372.
W-clips are not accepted.
The materials shall be free from folds, cracks and other exterior and interior defects that can affect
its strength, ductility, durability or ability to function.
All materials shall be inspected and tested in full to prove compliance with the requirements of these
Specifications and to the satisfaction of the Purchaser/Engineer. The testing shall be carried out
according to the relevant standards approved by the Purchaser/Engineer.
Assembly shall be performed in such a way that the mechanical properties cannot be affected and
to ensure that the insulating part is not subject to any mechanical stress due to pressure exerted by
the bottom edge of the cap.
Free surface of insulating parts shall be cleaned from cement and other impurities.
Each insulator unit shall be marked with the name or trade mark of the manufacturer and the year of
manufacture in accordance with IEC 60383 and means to ensure the system of traceability for each
of the component parts.
In addition, each insulator unit shall be marked with the specified electro-mechanical or mechanical
failing load in conformity with IEC 60383 or 61466-1, or the first part of the designation in accordance
with IEC 60305.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 18 of 47

2.4.6.3 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements

The complete string insulator should fulfil the requirements given in the table below:

33kV
Nominal Voltage 11kV
19.1kV SWER (if applicable)
Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage (kV) 75 170
Wet Power-Frequency Withstand Voltage (kV) 28 70
Minimum Nominal Creepage Distance (mm) 350 1000
Minimum Mechanical Failing Load 100 100

2.4.7 Pollution Categories

Pollution categories for each insulator type to be supplied by the Contractor shall be as stated in the
Technical Schedules.

2.4.8 Requirements Common to all Insulator Types

2.4.8.1 Arcing Horns
For voltages up to 36kV, glass, ceramic or polymer insulators (tension and suspension) the complete
insulator unit shall generally be fitted with either arcing horns or grading rings on the live end only
(except for pin type insulators).
Within the first 1.5km of each substation, including the terminal poles, suspension and tension
insulators shall be fitted with arcing horns on both ends of the complete insulator unit (except for pin
type insulators).

2.4.8.2 Insulator Connection Length

The insulator connecting length shall be as stated in the Technical Schedules. Where the data is not
provided, the Contractor shall supply with their tender, drawings and completely filled in technical
schedules showing guaranteed data, following IEC guidelines, for each insulator type for review by
the Employer/Engineer.

2.4.8.3 Dry Arcing Gap

The dry arcing gaps shall be as stated in the Technical Schedules or the Conceptual Drawings.
Where the data is not provided, the Contractor shall supply with their tender, drawings and
completely filled in technical schedules showing guaranteed data, for each insulator type, following
IEC guidelines, for review by the Employer/Engineer.

2.4.8.4 Creepage or Leekage Length

The creepage or leakage length of each insulator string shall be as stated in the Technical
Schedules.
Where the data is not provided, the Contractor shall supply with their tender. drawings and
completely filled in technical schedules showing the creepage or leekage length for each insulator
type, following IEC guidelines and the pollution level as stated in the Technical Schedules, for review
by the Employer/Engineer.

2.4.8.5 Transposition (if applicable)

The Contractor shall supply with their tender, a detailed drawing of the proposed transposition
insulator set showing types of fittings to conductors, mechanical strength, etc., based on the
conductor arrangement, for approval by the Employer/Engineer.
The length of the transposition insulator set per conductor phase shall generally be
√3𝑥𝑥 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙ℎ 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 19 of 47

2.4.9 Pin and Shackle Insulators of Ceramic or Glass Materials

2.4.9.1 Scope
This part of the specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing at manufacturers premises,
transport to site, insurance, unloading & storage of 11 kV & 33 kV pin and 0.4kV shackle insulators
of ceramic or glass materials suitable for use on 11 kV & 33 kV distribution lines and 0.4kV low
voltage (LV) lines situated in any part of the country. The pin and shackle insulators should be
supplied with insulator spindles.

2.4.9.2 General Requirements

The equipment shall be of first class quality and designed for continuous satisfactory operation as
continuity of supplies is of prime importance.
The materials shall be suitable for the prevailing climatic conditions as stated in the document
Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General Specifications.
Insulators shall be made suitable for mounting in the vertical plane. The insulators shall be of the
top groove tie type and shall be mounted rigidly on a supporting structure by means of a galvanised
steel pin passing up inside the insulator. The insulator shall consist of one piece and the glazing of
insulators shall be as stated in the relevant Technical Schedules.
Insulators offered shall comply with the relevant Technical Schedule.
The pin-hole thread shall be of the cemented zinc thimble type. The top grooves of the insulator
shall be suitable for bare conductor of the type and diameter as stated in the Technical Schedules.
The dimensions, electrical and mechanical withstand properties of the pin and shackle insulators
shall be as stated in the Technical Schedules.

2.4.10 Pin Insulators of Polymeric Materials

2.4.10.1 Scope
This part of the specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing at manufacturers premises,
transport to site, insurance, unloading & storage of 11 kV & 33 kV pin insulators of polymeric
(composite material) suitable for use on 11 kV & 33 kV distribution lines situated in any part of the
country.

2.4.10.2 General Requirements

2.4.10.3 Cores of Polymeric Insulators

Cores shall be solid and made of epoxy resin, reinforced with load-bearing fibres. Cores shall be
solid and of even cross-section.
The core, which provides the strength, shall be made of an acid resistant glass fibre reinforced rod
(FRP) of high strength. Glass fibres shall be Boron free or Boron free E-Glass and shall exhibit both
high electrical integrity and high resistance to acid corrosion. The matrix of the FRP rod shall be

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 20 of 47

hydrolysis resistant. The FRP rod shall be manufactured through pultrusion process and shall be
void free.

2.4.10.4 Sheds of Polymeric Insulators

Materials for polymeric insulators are as shown in Table 1 below.
Table 1: Preferred Composite Materials for Insulator Sheds
Material Class Material Name Material Description

EPDM / Silicone alloy ESP™ Alloy of silicone and EPDM rubber

Polyolefin EVA Co-polymer of ethylene and ethylene vinyl acetate
For all composite insulators, results of the 5000 hour ageing test will be required.
Shed material shall be of a hardness sufficient to resist bird strike. Evidence of long term in-service
use should show geographic location to demonstrate resistance to fauna.
Shed material shall be stabilised against ultraviolet radiation, and stabilised against oxidation.
Shed material shall be bonded to the core by either high-temperature vulcanisation or by injection
mould, and shall use a method to minimise voids.

2.4.10.5 End Fittings for Polymeric Insulators

End fittings shall be crimped onto the fibreglass core. Shed material shall be formed such that it
overlaps the end fittings and prevents moisture ingress
The insulators shall also be suitable for the long rod type and shall have sheds with good self-cleaning
properties in accordance with IEC 60815. The composite insulators including the end fitting
connections shall be of a standard design suitable for use with the hardware fittings of any make
conforming to relevant IEC/ZETDC standards.
All surfaces shall be clean, smooth, without cuts, abrasions or projections. No part shall be subjected
to excessive localized pressure. The insulator and metal parts shall be so designed and
manufactured that it shall avoid local corona formation and not generate any radio interference
beyond specified limits under the operating conditions.

2.4.10.6 Tolerances on Dimensions

The tolerances on all dimensions, e.g. diameter, length and creepage distance shall be in accordance
with IEC 61109, i.e. ± (0.04d + 1.5) mm when d ≤ 300 mm or ± (0.025d +6) mm when d > 300mm,
where d = the dimension in millimetres (mm) for diameter, length or creepage distance as the case
may be. However, no negative tolerance shall be applicable to creepage distance.

2.4.10.7 Adhesive Compounds

The adhesive compound used for bonding the outer sheath to the FRP rod core and to the galvanised
end fittings shall not allow the ingress of moisture for the duration of the operational design life of the
insulator.
Evidence confirming the adhesive and nonporous properties for the operational design life of the
insulator of the compound used shall be provided by the vendor as part of their submission.

2.4.10.8 Unacceptable Materials

Hybrid insulators (polymeric sheds with a ceramic core) are not acceptable. Cast epoxy
(cycloaliphatic) resin insulators are not acceptable.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 21 of 47

2.4.11 Line Post Insulators (where applicable)

2.4.11.1 Material
The insulating part should be made of porcelain, tempered glass, composite material or other similar
material. The metal fitting should be made of hot-dip galvanised steel.
The materials shall be free from folds, cracks and other exterior and interior defects that can affect
its strength, ductility, durability or ability to function.
All materials shall be inspected and tested in full to prove compliance with the requirements of these
Specifications and to the satisfaction of the Purchaser/Engineer.
The testing shall be carried out according to the relevant standards approved by the
Purchaser/Engineer. Free surface of insulating parts shall be cleaned from cement and other
impurities.

2.4.11.2 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements

The dimensions, electrical and mechanical withstand properties of the pin and shackle insulators
shall be as stated in the Technical Schedules.

2.4.12 Low Voltage and Stay Insulators

All low voltage and stay insulators shall be made of ceramic (porcelain) materials.
They shall be free from chips, pits, blisters or cracks. All ceramic insulators shall be non-porous and
pass the relevant IEC standard porosity test requirements. These insulators shall be of Class A.

2.4.12.1 Strain (Shackle) Insulators

Insulators shall be made suitable for mounting in the horizontal plane. The insulators offered shall
comply with the relevant IEC or ZETDC standard The insulator shall consist of one piece and shall
be secured to the construction by means of a steel spindle passing through it. The Contractor shall
fill in the relevant Technical Schedules for strain (shackle) insulators.

2.4.12.2 Stay (Guywire Type) Insulators

Stay insulators shall have smooth transitions between radii, transverse holes and the longitudinal
grooves. Stay insulators shall accept the relevant galvanized steel stay wire termination units. Stay
insulators shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the relevant IEC or ZETDC
standard. Where no such standard exists, the Contractor shall provide a standard for approval by
the Client and the Engineer. The Contractor shall fill in the relevant Technical schedule for stay
insulators.

2.4.13 Spares and Special Tools

If required, the Contractor shall furnish spares and special tools described in the Technical
Schedules, which are necessary for normal installation and maintenance of the insulators furnished
by Contractor.

2.4.14 Insulator Designations and Marking

2.4.14.1 Ceramic and Glass Insulators
Each insulator unit shall be marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer and the year of
manufacture in accordance with IEC-60383. In addition, each insulator unit shall be marked with the
specified electromechanical or mechanical failing load in conformity with IEC 60383, or the first part
of the designation in accordance with IEC-60305.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 22 of 47

2.4.14.2 Polymeric Insulators

Each insulator unit shall on the top weathershed be marked with the name or trademark of the
manufacturer, manufacture code date, production lot number and mechanical strength rating. Typical
marking shall be as follows:
1) The letters ‘PI’;
2) The specified mechanical load (tension) in kN;
3) The type and size of coupling for the upper end of the insulator:
a) ‘B’, ‘S’, ‘T’, ‘C’, ‘Y’, or ‘E’ for ball, socket, tongue, clevis, y-clevis or eye coupling, followed by
the size in mm; and
4) The type and size of coupling for the lower end of the insulator (in the same format as the upper
end designation).
An example designation is PI 70 S16 B16 for a 70 kN ball-and-socket polymeric insulator.

2.4.14.3 Pin Insulators

Pin Insulators shall be labelled with three markings according to IEC-60383], including for LV pin
insulators, with the following:

1) Shed profile: S is standard, F is fog, A is aerodynamic, followed by ‘LP’ for ‘line pin’;
2) Two digits representing typical operating voltage; and
3) Three digits representing the nominal minimum creepage distance in mm.
For example ALP/33/710 is a line pin insulator with aerodynamic profile, for 33 kV, with a 710 mm
nominal minimum creepage distance.

2.4.14.4 Insulator Pins

Pins shall be labelled with three markings according to AS 4899 [14]:
1) Head pattern: A, B or C;
2) Stem length in mm; and
3) Cantilever minimum failing load in kN.
For example A/130/7 is a pin with head pattern A, a stem length of 130 mm, and a 7kN cantilever
minimum failing load.

2.4.14.5 Strain Insulator Couplings

Couplings for strain insulator strings shall be labelled according to IEC-60383, with the following:
1) The nominal diameter of the coupling pin in mm; and
1) The letter ‘C’ for cap and pin insulators, or ‘L’ for long rod or composite insulators.
Ball and socket couplings are designated a number that is the nominal diameter of the pin in mm.
The sockets are designated the same, with the addition of an ‘A’ or ‘B’ for two types of sockets
according to the socket coupling size.

2.4.14.6 Line Post Insulators

Designation shall be as for ceramic line post insulators. These shall be labelled with five markings
as follows:
1) ‘R’ indicating line post insulator;
2) The minimum bending failing load in kN;

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 23 of 47

3) ‘E’ or ‘J’ indicating external or internal fixing of the metal parts;

4) ‘T’, ‘C’ or ‘H’ indicating tie-top, vertical clamp top or horizontal clamp top;
5) The lightning withstand voltage in kVp; and
6) ‘N’ or ‘L’ indicating normal or longer creepage distance. An example would be R 12.5 ET 170 N.

2.4.14.7 Stay (Guy Type) Insulators

Stay insulators shall be labelled with ‘GY’, followed by a type number, defining mechanical and
electrical strength.
For example, Type number 3 indicates a minimum failing load of 222 kN and a power- frequency
withstand voltage of 20 kV.
The actual mechanical strength is also dependent on the steel cable used

2.4.15 Preparation for Shipping and Storage

The Contractor shall prepare the insulator units for shipment to protect them from damage during
shipment and transport and subsequent storage not exceeding one year, unless specified otherwise
in the Technical Schedules.
The storage will be in an environment similar to the installed location. The Contractor shall provide
storage and handling instructions including descriptions for periodic inspection and/or storage
maintenance to ascertain that no deterioration will occur during storage. One set of these instructions
shall be fastened securely to the outside of the shipping unit. The Contractor shall provide, at the
Employer’s request, the Contractor’s recommended instructions for long term storage.
For shipping limitations, length, width, weight, etc., reference is made to the Technical Schedules.
For suspension type insulator units, packing shall comply with the Technical Schedules and the
following:
a. Insulators, unless otherwise specified, shall be packed for shipment in crates with closed
ends of sufficient strength to prevent injury to the contents, withstand palletizing and resist
failure during transit, storage, and subsequent handling in the field.
b. Unless otherwise specified, each crate of insulators with a unit spacing of from 127 mm to
165 mm shall consist of a string of six assembled and connected units or each crate shall
consist of two parallel strings of six units each, with each string of six units assembled and
connected.
c. Each crate of insulators with a unit spacing of up to 200 mm shall consist of a string of five
assembled and connected units.
d. In addition each crate shall be marked on the sides and on each end with a distinguishing
code for insulators of different type. The Contractor shall submit a description of marking he
proposes for each type, for the Employer’s review. Prominent weather-resistant coloured
marking will be acceptable.
e. Individual crates may be shipped in larger shipping units such as containers or pallets. Such
shipping units shall be plainly marked by stencil or with a firmly fastened tag with the following
information as a minimum:
a - Name of the Employer
b - Name of the Contractor
c - Name of the Project
d - Project/order number

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 24 of 47

e - Destination
f - Name of Supplier
g - Case Number
h - Shipping Unit (e.g., 1 of 3, etc.)
i - Dimensions
j - Handling instructions
k - Quantity
l - Gross weight (kg)
m - Net weight (kg)
n - Tare weight (kg)
For all other insulator units including polymeric insulators, adequate support shall be provided to
prevent breakage of the units during shipment and transport.
Each box or container of insulator units shall be marked with the number of pieces contained therein,
the catalogue number or class number or description of the contents and the manufacturer’s name.

2.4.16 Quality Assurance Requirements

The Contractor shall have methods to assure that items and services, including subcontracted items
and services, comply with this specification. The provisions of the Contract shall apply.

2.4.17 Reliability
Contractors shall provide information on the reliability of the equipment and the performance of the
materials offered over an operational life of 50 years under the specified field of application and
conditions of service.
Information provided shall evidence the claimed reliability and performance for the equipment
offered, including information on failure mode and effect analysis, carried out in accordance with IEC
60812. Failure modes should be described: taking cantilever mechanical failure as an example, the
failure may be excessive deflection, or brittle fracture. Electrical failure may be material damage such
as puncture, polymer degradation, carbonisation, loss of hydrophobicity, etc.
Contractors may offer their standard equipment but any variation to the foregoing standards must be
clearly stated in writing at the time of the proposal. The products offered in the standing offer should
be equal to or better in quality and performance than the existing items as listed under this
Specification.

2.5 INSULATOR INSTALLATION

Installation will be by the Employer or Contractor as specified in the Technical Schedules and
monitored by the Employer’s representative(s).
When the installation is by the Contractor such as for turnkey contracts, complete details of
installation and stringing methods, proper handling and storage, stringing methods and performance
records, etc. shall be furnished for the Employer’s review and approval.

2.6 INSULATOR TESTS

2.6.1 General
All materials shall comply with the test criteria, and the Employer's acceptance of the insulators shall
not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 25 of 47

The Contractor shall carry out, at his own expense, all tests necessary to ensure the satisfactory
design and manufacture of the insulator units in accordance with IEC Standards.
If so required in the Technical Schedules the Employer or his authorized representative shall witness
all tests unless waived in writing, and no insulator units shall be shipped until released for shipment
by the Employer or his authorized representative.
The Contractor shall make all preparation for the tests and provide the test apparatus and personnel
and shall notify the Employer the date of the tests to be witnessed in accordance with the
requirements of this specification.
Actual test procedures to be used shall be subject to Employer’s acceptance and approval.

2.6.2 Shop Tests

Insulator units shall be subjected to the design, quality conformance, and routine tests in accordance
with IEC test requirements and all other applicable tests mentioned in this Specification. Even though
the Contractor performs the required tests and the insulators meet the acceptance criteria, the
Contractor shall not be relieved of the responsibility of providing insulators conforming to all
requirements of the specification.

2.6.3 Design Tests

2.6.3.1 General
Design tests in accordance with applicable IEC standards and corresponding certified test reports
are always required when the insulator type is the Contractor’s new design or the Contractor’s
previous design with significant design changes (i.e. prototype). For this, the Contractor shall submit
the test procedures he intends to use for the Employer’s review and acceptance.
If the insulator units to be supplied are not a prototype, a certified design test report of duplicated
production type following the prescribed tests as for shop tests shall be submitted as specified in the
Technical Schedules.
Certificates of all design or type tests required for suspension insulator units under IEC Standard
shall be of the latest supply conducted by an internationally known, reputable and independent
testing laboratory. Certificates of design tests or type tests conducted at the manufacturers own
testing laboratory will not be accepted.

2.6.3.2 Suspension Type Insulator Unit (for A.C. Insulators)

The insulator units to be supplied shall comply with the Design Test specified in IEC and the following
additional tests:
a. Steep front-of-wave test
Steep front-of-wave test shall be performed on ten (10) insulator units selected at random from
the first production lot offered for inspection:
1. The insulator units shall be subjected to five successive positive and negative impulse
flashovers with a wave having an effective rate of rise of 2,500 kV per microsecond. The
insulator units shall be tested singly.
2. Each unit shall then be verified to be electrically intact by applying low-frequency voltage. The
rated wet-low frequency withstand voltage shall be applied to each unit and no electrical
puncture shall occur.
Failure of any one unit either in the front-of-wave or subsequent low frequency withstand
voltage test shall be cause for testing another twenty (20) units.
Failure of more than one unit from the total so tested shall constitute failure to meet the
requirements of this specification.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 26 of 47

b. Thermal-Mechanical Performance Test

A Thermal-Mechanical Performance Test shall also be performed in accordance with IEC
Publication 60383 with the acceptance criteria as follows:
1. The result of this performance test shall match the result of the ordinary M & E failing load test.
i. Mean value and standard deviation of the performance test shall not change.
ii. Fracture pattern shall not change.
2. Acceptance constant, K, should be equal to or greater than 3, when the sample size is ten.
That is, R − Rs
3≤ K =
S
where R = Mean value
Rs = M & E rated value
S = Standard deviation
3. Each value measured should not be lower than the specified M & E strength.
4. Electrical puncture should not occur before the ultimate fracture.
c. Sample Tests
The Contractor shall keep the Employer informed on the progress on the manufacturing of
materials and works, so that the inspection and testing can be performed in the presence of
Employer’s representative.
Before every inspection and test supervised by the Employer, the Contractor shall assure himself
that the work is in all respects ready for inspection and testing, in accordance with these
specifications.
Full and complete testing of all components shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Employer.
The test listed below shall be carried out on each production lot of insulators at the expense of
the manufacturer, and these insulators and split pins shall be added by the Contractor, free of
charge, to the number specified in the tender documents. The insulators as have been subjected
to sample tests shall not be included in the delivery lot.
The sample tests are to be performed on the sample E1, E2 or E3. The size of these samples
shall be determined in IEC 61325 Clause 10.
Lot Size (N) Sample Size
E1 E2 E3
N < 300 Subject to Agreement
300 <N < 2000 4 3 4
2000 <N < 5000 8 4 8
5000 <N < 10000 12 6 12
1. Verification of the dimensions, in accordance with IEC 61325 Clause 22.
2. Body resistance test, in accordance with IEC 61325 Clause 19.
3. Verification of the displacement, in accordance with IEC 61325 Clause 27.
4. Verification of the locking system, in accordance with IEC 61325 Clause 28.
5. Temperature cycle test, in accordance with IEC 61325 Clause 29.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 27 of 47

6. Electromechanical failing load test, in accordance with IEC 61325 Clause 23. The acceptance
criteria shall be as follows:
i) X > Rating + 3S where: X – mean value of test results
S – standard deviation of the test results
ii) Each value measured shall not be lower than the specified electromechanical failing load.
iii) Electrical puncture shall not occur before reaching ultimate failure.
7. Impulse over voltage test, in accordance with IEC 61325 Clause 17 with steepness of impulse:
2500 kV/microsecond
8. Residual mechanical performance test, in accordance with IEC 61325 Clause 26.
9. Porosity test, in accordance with IEC 61325 Clause 31.
10. Zinc sleeve test, in accordance with IEC 61325 Clause35.
11. Galvanizing test, in accordance with IEC 61325 Clause 32.
c. Routine Tests
The manufacturer shall carry out, at his own expense, the routine tests specified in IEC 61325.
The routine tensile load shall be 50% of the electromechanical failing load.
1. Routine visual inspection in accordance with IEC 61325 Clause 33.
Number of insulator units to be tested: All
2. Routine mechanical test in accordance with IEC 61325 Clause 34.
Number of insulator units to be tested: All
3. Routine electrical inspection in accordance with IEC 61325 Clause 21.
Number of insulator units to be tested: All

2.6.3.3 Horizontal Line Post /Long Rod Insulators and Insulator String Tests
The insulator units to be supplied shall comply with all the design tests specified in in accordance
with IEC Publ. 61109/1992 in context with IEC Publication 60383/1992, including Amendment 1 to
IEC Publication 61109/1992.

2.6.3.4 Horizontal Line Post /Long Rod Insulators and Insulator String - Inspection and
Test Plan
The inspection and test plan shall be as per the table below, in accordance with IEC 61109/1992
and the latest IEC60383 publication.

TEST DESCRIPTION CLAUSE(S) QUANTITY DIMENSIONS

Type Tests Verification of dimensions IEC 61109, E1 + E2 As per Contractor’s

Clause 6 drawing

Dry lightning impulse withstand IEC 61109, 1 As per Contractor’s

voltage test Clause 6.1 and drawing
IEC 60383, new
pg.2 Cl.9
Wet switching impulse IEC 61109, 1 As per Contractor’s
withstand voltage test for Um ≥ Clause 6.1 drawing
300kV and
IEC 60383, new
Pg 2, Cl.11
Radio Interference Test (to be IEC 60437 1 As per Contractor’s
conducted with corona rings drawing
and Hardware)

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 28 of 47

TEST DESCRIPTION CLAUSE(S) QUANTITY DIMENSIONS

Corona inception voltage IEC 60347 1 As per Contractor’s

measurement with hardware drawing
Sample Test Verification of dimensions IEC 61109, E1+E2 As per Contractor’s
Clause 7.2 drawing
Verification of the IEC 61109, E2 As per Contractor’s
locking system Clause 7.3 drawing

Verification of tightness of IEC 61109, 1 out of E2 As per Contractor’s

the interface end fittings and Clause 7.4a drawing
insulator housing

Verification of the specified IEC 61109, E1 As per Contractor’s

mechanical load (SML) Clause 7.4b drawing

Galvanizing test (Average IEC 61109, E2 As per Contractor’s

thickness on individual sample Clause 7.5 and drawing
≥ 85 µm equivalent to a coating IEC 60383, Cl.26
mass of 610 g/m2)

Routine tests Identification of the composite All As per Contractor’s

(These tests are insulators drawing
conducted during
Visual Examination All As per Contractor’s
production and a
drawing
relevant report to be
made available) Mechanical Routine Test All As per Contractor’s
drawing
Sample size tests The lot and sample size shall IEC 61109, As per Contractor’s
be as stated in these Clause 7.1 drawing
specifications under sub-
clause 8.5.3.3 above.

2.6.3.5 Quality Conformance Tests (for A.C. Suspension, Line Post and Long rod
Insulators)
If so specified in the Technical Schedules the Employer shall witness all quality performance tests.
All tests shall be in accordance with the applicable IEC standards, except for the acceptance criteria
for the combined Mechanical and Electrical Strength tests for ceramic and glass A.C. suspension
insulator units where the acceptance criteria shall be as follows:

𝑋𝑋 =≥ 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 + 3𝑆𝑆

where: 𝑋𝑋 = average value obtained on the sample of the ten insulator units tested
𝑆𝑆 = standard deviation for the ten insulator units tested
Each value measured shall not be lower than the specified mechanical and electrical strength.
Electrical puncture shall not occur before reaching ultimate failure.

2.6.4 Test Reports

Six (6) copies of test reports of all standard tests performed subsequent to the date of award and all
routine and quality conformance tests shall be certified by the inspector and submitted to the
Employer within fifteen (15) days after test.
The Contractor shall bear the cost of furnishing these records and reports.

2.7 DATA AND DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS

2.7.1 General
Contractor-furnished data and information shall be the performance data, predicted performance and
installation features of all Contractors' finished materials. The accuracy of such information and its
compatibility with overall performance requirements specified by Employer are the sole responsibility
of the Contractor.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 29 of 47

All information submitted as part of the Tender Data will become part of contract data for the
successful Contractor. Any deviation from such data requires the Employer’s approval.

2.7.2 Data and Information to be Furnished with Tender

Together with the tender, the Contractor shall submit the following information:
a. Filled-in Technical Schedules
b. An outline drawing of each insulator unit including a cross-sectional view of the insulator shell,
and the following information:
1. Type designation in accordance with Standards used, if applicable;
2. Shell diameter and unit spacing with manufacturing tolerances;
3. Leakage distance, total and shielded portions;
4. Mechanical and electrical characteristics;
5. Size of ball and socket or tongue-clevis parts, if suspension type of insulator unit is to be
supplied;
6. Materials
7. Unit weight
8. Identification marking
9. Manufacturer’s catalogue number
10. Each drawing shall be identified by a drawing number
c. Additional descriptive material brochures, additional drawings and other reference material to
support the filled-in Technical Schedules and to allow the Employer to properly evaluate the
insulators being offered;
d. A detailed overall schedule, sufficient to demonstrate the Contractor’s ability to perform the
work to meet the delivery and installation;
e. Certified type test reports performed by an independent testing laboratory;
f. Tentative QA Program and ISO 9001 Certification;
g. Detailed list of all exceptions and/or deviations taken by the Contractor to the requirements of
this specification or, if none are taken, a statement indicating that no exceptions or deviations
are taken by the Contractor.

2.7.3 Data and Information to be Furnished After Award of Contract

The following shall be submitted after award of contract:
a. Certified Quality Conformance and Routine Test Reports;
b. Bill of materials and parts list or identifying sketch showing components;
c. Detailed insulator outline drawings;
d. Installation procedures;
e. Detailed QA Program based on ISO 9001;
f. Detailed Project Progress and Performance Review (PPR) for the insulators;
g. As-built drawings as finally approved.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 30 of 47

The Contractor shall furnish in the manner, number of copies and within the time set forth in the
Contract, instruction manuals in accordance with the requirements of the Contract.
The Contractor shall furnish information indicating recommended maintenance practice,
approximate time required for routine maintenance, and test of spare parts (if any) and tools required
for this maintenance.
The Contractor shall provide the required installation instructions and technical data for proper
installation.

2.7.4 Data Submission Schedule

To be reviewed by the
Item/ Contractor’s submittal
Employer before
Description date
fabrication or shipment
a Technical Data requested by With Tender Yes
this specification
b Proposed schedule to meet With Tender Yes
delivery date
c QA Program and ISO With Tender Yes
9001Certification
d Design or Type Test Reports With Tender Yes
e List of standards used With Tender Yes
f Fabrication Sequence 45 days before No
fabrication
g Notification of Factory Test 30 days before test No
h Packing and Storage 30 days before No
fabrication
j Installation Instruction 30 days before shipment No
j Documents for Records With shipment No
k Tests Reports 15 days after test Yes

2.8 STRAIN CLAMPS

2.8.1 Reference Standards
The following standards shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60120 Dimensions of ball and socket couplings of string insulator units
60372 Locking devices for ball and socket couplings of string insulator units.
Dimensions and tests
60372-am1 Amendment 1 - Locking devices for ball and socket couplings of string insulator
units - Dimensions and tests.
60372-am2 Amendment 2 - Locking devices for ball and socket couplings of string insulator
units - Dimensions and tests.
61466-1 Composite string insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage greater
than 1000 V-Part 1: Standard strength classes and end fittings

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 31 of 47

2.8.2 General
The strain clamp shall be delivered incl. socket clevis 16 mm

2.9 STAY INSULATORS

2.9.1 Reference Standards

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60381-1 Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000 V-Part l:
Ceramic or glass insulator units for a.c. systems - Definitions, test methods and
acceptance criteria
61109 Composite insulators for a.c. overhead lines with a nominal voltage greater
than 1000 V – Definitions, test methods and acceptance criteria

2.9.1.1 Material
The insulating part should be made of porcelain or composite material.
The materials shall be free from folds, cracks and other exterior and interior defects that can affect
its strength, ductility, durability or ability to function.

2.9.1.2 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements

Stay insulators shall fulfil the following requirements

Requirement Value
Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage 40kV
Wet Power-Frequency 23kV
Minimum Nominal Creepage Distance 76mm
Minimum Tensile Strength 91kN

2.9.1.3 Marking
The insulating part should be clearly and lasting marked with the name of the manufacturer or
trademark, year of manufacture and type.

2.9.1.4 Testing
The Contractor shall carry out the type, sample and routine tests as prescribed in IEC 60383 for
ceramic stay insulators and IEC 61109 for composite ones.
Certificate from type tests shall be performed by an internationally known, independent testing
laboratory. Said test certificate shall be submitted together with the Bid.

2.10 STAY WIRE

2.10.1 Material
The stay wire shall be hot dip zinc-coated and manufactured from steel.

2.10.2 Construction and Dimensions

The stay wires commonly in use in the ZETDC system have the following properties:

Type 7/2.65mm (formerly 7/4mm (formerly 7/8 19/2.35mm (formerly

7/12 SWG) SWG) 19/10 SWG)
Safe Working Load 1100kg 24664kg 4472kg

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 32 of 47

3 D-MV-03-001 CONDUCTORS
3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The following publications shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60104 Aluminium-magnesium-silicon wire for overhead line conductors.
60888 Zinc-Coated Steel Wires for Stranded Conductors.

60889 Hard-Drawn Aluminium Wire for Overhead Lines

61089 Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded conductors.

61232 Aluminium-clad steel wires for electrical purposes

61284 Overhead lines - Requirements and tests for fittings

3.2 MATERIAL
Conductors should be manufactured from aluminium alloy meeting the requirements on resistivity,
tensile strength, etc. given in this specification.
In addition the material shall have a resistance against corrosion at least on the level of Al/Mg/Si wire
according to IEC 60104. Conductors intended for SWER systems (if applicable) should be extra high
strength ACSR conductors.

3.3 DESIGN AND DIMENSIONS

The following are the standard conductors used in the ZETDC Distribution system:

Calculated
Code Stranding
Nominal Actual Overall Calculated Current –
Name & Wire Weight
Al Area Area Diameter Breaking Carrying
SCA Diameter (kg/km)
(mm2) (mm2) (mm) Load (kN) Capacity
/ACSR (mm)
(A)1
6x2.36 Al
Gopher 25 30.62 7.08 106 9.61 150
1x2.36 St
6x3.35 Al
Rabbit 50 61.72 10.05 214 18.35 240
1x3.35 St
6x4.10 Al
Raccoon 75 92.4 12.3 320 27.2 300
1x4.10 St
6x4.72 Al
Dog 100 118.50 14.15 394 32.7 360
7x1.57 St
30x2.59 Al
Wolf 150 194.90 18.13 726 69.2 470
7x2.59 St

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 33 of 47

Calculated
Code Stranding
Nominal Actual Overall Calculated Current –
Name & Wire Weight
Al Area Area Diameter Breaking Carrying
SCA Diameter (kg/km)
(mm2) (mm2) (mm) Load (kN) Capacity
/ACSR (mm)
(A)1
30x2.79 Al
Lynx 183.4 226.20 19.53 842 79.8 520
7x2.79 St
30x3.00 Al
Panther 200 261.50 21 974 92.25 560
7x3.00 St
1) At 45oC

3.3.1.1 Conditions for Continuous Ratings

 Maximum Conductor temperature +70oC
 Ambient Temperature +45oC
 Solar Radiation 1200W/m2
 Wind Velocity 0.6 m/s
 Thermal Emissivity Constant 0.8
 Solar Absorption Constant 0.7

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 34 of 47

4 D-MV-04-001 HARDWARE
4.1 GENERAL
Clamps and fittings shall be of a design approved for the conductor in accordance with the relevant
clause.
All hardware shall at least provide the same ultimate strength as the chosen insulator.
The connecting attachments, including bolts, nuts and washers, shall be included in the insulator
assemblies.
All materials shall be free from folds, cracks and other exterior and interior defects, which can affect
its strength, ductility, durability of ability to function.
All materials shall be inspected and tested in full to prove compliance with the requirements of the
Specifications and to the satisfaction of the Purchaser/Engineer. The testing shall be carried out
according to the relevant standards approved by the Purchaser/Engineer.

4.2 SPLICES
All splices shall develop at least 95% of the ultimate strength of the conductor, in accordance with
BS 3288 part 2.
The resistance of all splices shall not be more than 50% of the resistance of the conductor itself on
the same length as the splice.
Splices in jumpers shall consist of at least two parallel groove clamps.

4.3 REPAIR SLEEVES

The repair sleeves shall be of the compression type.
When properly applied such repair sleeves shall achieve 95% of the ultimate strength of the
conductor, when less than one fourth of the aluminium wires of the outer layer is damaged, in
accordance with BS 3288 part 2.
The resistance of the repair sleeves shall not be more than 50% of the resistance of the conductor
itself on the same length as the repair sleeve.

4.4 REPAIR SLEEVES

The tension clamps shall be of the compression, wedged or bolted type and be as light as possible.
The part in contact with the conductor shall be of aluminium.
The tension clamps shall be connected to the live end of the tension insulator set so as to ensure
adequate flexibility.
When installed, the tension clamps shall develop a holding force of at least 95% of the ultimate
strength of the conductor without causing slipping off, or damage to the conductor or any part thereof,
in accordance with BS 3282 Part 2.
Bolts shall be used as clamping devices only and not as current carrying parts. All screws, nuts and
washers shall be of high strength galvanised steel.
The current carrying capacity shall be equal to or better than that of the conductor.
Tension clamps of the wedged or bolted type shall allow the conductor to run continuous trough the
clamp. No cutting off of the conductor inside the clamp will be permitted.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 35 of 47

4.5 JUMPERS
Jumpers are included in the contract.
The jumper for tension poles with tension clamps of wedged or bolted type shall consist of a jumper
conductor from both tension clamps spliced together with two parallel groove clamps.
The resistance over the parallel groove clamps shall be less than 50% of the resistance of the
conductor itself on the same length as the parallel groove clamps.
Bolts shall be used as clamping devices only and not as current carrying parts. All screws, nuts and
washers shall be of high strength galvanised steel.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 36 of 47

5 D-MV-05-001 APPARATUS
5.1 AUTO RECLOSERS, POLE MOUNTED
5.1.1 Reference Standards
The following standards shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60060-1 High-voltage test techniques. Part 1: General definitions and test requirements.
60060-2 High voltage test techniques - Part 2: Measuring systems.

60071-1 Insulation co-ordination, Part 1: Terms, definitions, principles and rules.

60265-1 High-voltage switches - Part 1: Switches for rated voltages above 1 kV and
less than 52 kV.
60694 Common specifications for high-voltage switchgear and control gear
standards.
5.1.2 Electrical Data
5.1.2.1 Short-Circuit Currents
According to Clause 1.1.

5.1.2.2 Insulation level

According to Clause 1.1.

5.1.2.3 Nominal Voltage Levels

According to Clause 1.1.

5.1.2.4 Rated Current

The rated current shall be minimum 200 A.

5.1.2.5 Breaking Capacity

The below given currents should be able to break at manoeuvre by motor operated mechanism,
during normal conditions and nominal voltage.
a) Breaking capacity 630 A.
b) Breaking of transformer at no-load. (Inductive breaking capacity) 25 A.
c) Breaking of line at no-load (Capacitive breaking capacity) 20 A
The voltage across the isolating distance should be 10% of the nominal voltage after breaking.

5.1.2.6 Duty Cycle

The minimum allowable duty cycle at full time short-circuit current should be
Open - 0.5 s - Close

5.1.3 Protection and Auto Reclosure Functions

The auto recloser should include in-built protection and auto reclosure relay with the following
functions:

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 37 of 47

Reclosure
Trips in sequence to Lockout Range 1 to 3
Dead time after first trip in sequence Min. range 0.5 to 60 sec.
Dead time after second trip in sequence Min. range 5 to 180 seconds
Inverse time protection
Phase trip current setting range Minimum range 50 to 1000 A
Earth trip current setting range Minimum range 10 to 1000 A

5.1.4 Technical Requirements

5.1.4.1 Mounting
The auto recloser should be designed for three-pole operation and outdoor mounting.
The auto recloser should be supplied with brackets for pole mounting.

5.1.4.2 Design, Corrosion Protection

The auto recloser should be designed in such a way that minimum maintenance should be required.
Contacts should be designed in such a way that the electrical and mechanical wear is kept at a low
level.
All parts exposed to corrosion should be made of corrosion resistance or corrosion protected
material. Preferably should steel parts be hot-dip galvanised to a mean thickness of 60 µm and a
minimum thickness of 50 µm. All screws and nuts should be hot-dip galvanised or made of stainless
steel ISO class F1 or A2.

5.1.4.3 Terminals
The terminals should be made of copper or aluminium suitable for connection of ACSR.

5.1.4.4 Manoeuvre
All three poles should be able to operate simultaneously from the ground level.
The position of the auto recloser should be clearly marked on the operating device.

5.1.5 Tests
The auto recloser should be type tested according to IEC 60056. Type test records not older than 5
years should be submitted on request.

5.1.6 Information to be Submitted with the Tender

 Rated voltage
 Rated insulation level
 Rated current
 Rated short-circuit current
 Rated breaking capacity
 Rated making capacity
 Rated duty cycle
 Phase-phase distances
 Design and dimensions of the terminals
 Weight of complete auto recloser

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 38 of 47

 Dimensioning sketches, descriptions, mounting instructions, etc.

 Type of closing mechanism
 Auxiliary power supply, voltage, current.
 Type test records if required
 Maintenance instructions
 Deviations from Technical Specifications
5.2 LOAD SWITCHES
5.2.1 Reference Standards
The following publications shall be applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60060-1 High-voltage test techniques. Part 1: General definitions and test requirements.
60060-2 High voltage test techniques - Part 2: Measuring systems.

60071-1 Insulation co-ordination, Part 1: Terms, definitions, principles and rules

60168 Test on indoor and outdoor post insulators of ceramic material or glass for
systems with nominal voltages greater than 1 000 V
60265-1 High-voltage switches - Part 1: Switches for rated voltages above 1 kV and
less than 52 kV
60694 Common specifications for high-voltage switchgear and control gear standards

60383-1 Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000 V - Part 1:
Ceramic or glass insulator units for a.c. systems - Definitions, test methods and
acceptance criteria
60720 Characteristics of line post insulators

61109 Composite insulators for a.c. overhead lines with a nominal voltage greater
than 1000 V – Definitions, test methods and acceptance criteria
61109-am1 Amendment 1 - Composite insulators for a.c. overhead lines with a nominal
voltage greater than 1000 V – Definitions, test methods and acceptance criteria
61952 Insulators for overhead lines – Composite line post insulators for alternative
current with a nominal voltage > 1000 V.

5.2.2 Electrical Data

5.2.2.1 Short-Circuit Currents
According to Clause 1.1.

5.2.2.2 Insulation Level

According to Clause 1.1.

5.2.2.3 Nominal Voltage Levels

According to Clause 1.1.

5.2.2.4 Rated Current

The rated current value shall be 200A.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 39 of 47

5.2.2.5 Breaking Capacity

The below given currents should be able to break by hand operated mechanism, during normal
conditions and nominal voltage.
a) Breaking capacity 200 A
b) Breaking of line at no-load (Capacitive breaking capacity) 10 A
c) Breaking of load current at parallel operation 200 A
The voltage across the isolating distance should be 10% of the nominal voltage after breaking.

5.2.3 Technical Requirements

5.2.3.1 Mounting
The load switch should be designed for three-pole operation and outdoor mounting.
The load switch should be able to mount horizontally or vertically in two-pole design and horizontally
in single-pole design. The pole elements should be mounted in parallel.

5.2.3.2 Mechanical Strength

The load switch should be mechanical dimensioned for the following forces:
 Short-circuit forces.
 Wind load
 Pulling forces in the terminals
The static pulling force at the terminals of the load switch during normal operation could reach the
following values:
 Horizontally 500 N
 Vertically 500 N
The permissible static pulling force for cross-arm intended for suspension of conductors should, at
equal load in all phases be 11.5 kN/phase.

5.2.3.3 Design, Corrosion Protection

The load switch should be designed in such a way that minimum maintenance should be required.
The bearings should be of self-lubricating type and the material should be chosen so that corrosion
is prevented. Contacts should be designed in such a way that the electrical and mechanical wear is
kept at a low level.
All parts exposed to corrosion should be made of corrosion resistance or corrosion protected
material.
Large steel parts should be hot-dip galvanised to a mean thickness of 70 µm and a minimum
thickness of 65 µm. Steel sheets with a thickness of less than 5 mm may be hot-dip galvanised to a
mean thickness of 60 µm and a minimum thickness of 50 µm. All screws and nuts should be hot-dip
galvanised or made of stainless steel ISO class F1 or A2

5.2.3.4 Terminals
The terminals should be made of copper or aluminium.

5.2.3.5 Manoeuvre
All three poles should be operated simultaneously from the ground level.
Load switches should be operated by means of a linkage system and equipped with a control handle
of insulating material. The handle should be able to lock in both end positions with a pad lock.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 40 of 47

The load switch should have fixed end positions so that it can not move from these positions by
influence form wind, etc.
The position of the load switch should be clearly marked on the operating device.

5.2.4 Tests
The load switch should be type tested according to IEC 60694. Type test records not older than 5
years should be submitted on request.

5.2.5 Information to be Given with the Tender

 Rated voltage
 Rated insulation level
 Rated current
 Rated short-circuit current
 Rated breaking capacity
 Phase-phase distances
 Creepage distances
 Design and dimensions of the terminals
 Dimensioning sketches, descriptions, mounting instructions, etc.
 Deviations from Technical Specifications
5.3 SINGLE-PHASE LOADBREAK FUSE CUT-OUTS
5.3.1 Reference Standards
The following standards are applicable:

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee Publications

60281-1 High-voltage fuses - Part 1: Current-limiting fuses.
60282-2 High-voltage fuses - Part 2: Expulsion fuses.

NEMA SG2

5.3.2 Electrical Data

5.3.2.1 Short-Circuit Currents
According to Clause 1.1.

5.3.2.2 Insulation Level

According to Clause 1.1.

5.3.2.3 Nominal Voltage Levels

According to Clause 1.1.

5.3.2.4 Rated Current

The rated current value shall be 100A.

5.3.3 General Design

The cut-outs should be equipped with brackets for crossarm mounting and terminals for 99 - 241
mm2 Al-conductors.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 41 of 47

5.3.4 Information to be Given with the Tender

 Rated voltage
 Rated insulation level
 Rated current
 Rated short-circuit current
 Rated breaking capacity
 Creepage distances
 Design and dimensions of the terminals
 Dimensioning sketches, descriptions, mounting instructions, etc.
 Deviations from Technical Specifications
5.4 NETWORK DESIGN
5.4.1 Placement of Disconnecting Apparatus
The following “or” criteria shall be applicable while placing disconnecting apparatus in the network in
order to protect a T-off:

km OH line in
Number of Number of
km OH line in T- rough or
Item transformers in customers in T-
off inaccessible
T-off off
terrain1)

Auto Recloser 5 2 6 500

Load Switch 2 1 3 100

Single-Phase
loadbreak fuse 0 0 1 1
cut-out
1) Terrain with high bush or trees with increased risk of short circuit the line, rough terrain with
difficulties to access the line.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 42 of 47

6 D-MV-06-001 CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

6.1.2 Clearing of the Line Route

As stated in Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 1, General.

6.1.3 Survey
As stated in Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2, Distribution General
Specifications, Chapter 1, General.

6.2 ERECTION OF POLES

6.2.2 Excavation and Backfill

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 43 of 47

6.2.3 Type and Size of Foundation

6.2.5 Repair of Damage

Damaged poles shall be repaired in a manner approved by the Engineer, or replaced. Damaged
wooden poles should always be replaced.
Crossarms, which may have suffered a strength reduction by deformation, shall be replaced. If
fabrication errors are discovered, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, who will decide whether
the errors may be corrected in the field or if the part shall be replaced. No field welding will be
accepted. Repair and means of repair of damaged zinc coating, including white rust, shall be subject
to the approval of the Engineer.

6.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATORS AND CONDUCTORS

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 44 of 47

Before assembly, all units shall be closely inspected. Bent pins will not be allowed. In order to
minimise the risk of pin bending, no rope slings shall be used for lifting assembled units, but a suitable
hook shall be applied to the insulator.
Damaged insulator units shall be replaced. Invisible cracks may be detected by sounding each unit
with a light wood or hard-rubber club. The cracked ones shall immediately be destroyed in order to
avoid unintentional re-use.
Immediately before and installation, the insulator shall be thoroughly cleaned, and all cotter pins shall
be checked for correct positioning and freedom from defects.
All screws, nuts and cotter pins shall be installed so as to facilitate easy, inspection and live line
maintenance work.
Compression joints and tension clamps shall be installed in accordance with good engineering
practice. The Contractor shall submit detailed written instructions for the complete installation
procedure for the approval of the Engineer.
Wherever possible, full use shall be made of maximum drum lengths of conductors in order to reduce
the number of joints.
The number of joints and their location in the spans shall be approved by the Engineer.
No joints shall be made in spans which cross main roads, power lines or in the major river crossings,
nor, whenever conductor drum lengths permit, in spans immediately adjacent thereto.
The distance between joints of the same conductor shall in no case be less than 100 m. Joints shall
in no case be installed closer than 20 m to the centre of suspension clamps.
The Contractor shall keep a record of all joints and tension clamps indicating the location, type and
date of each assembly.

6.3.2 Repair Sleeves

6.3.3 Stringing Pulleys

6.3.4 Stringing
Conductors shall be pulled out and strung by an approved stringing method. Conductors shall, as a
principle, never be allowed to touch ground.
The Contractor shall submit in writing, for the approval of the Engineer, a complete and detailed
description of the stringing equipment and the stringing and sagging procedure intended for use.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 45 of 47

Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the stringing procedure shall be in strict conformity with
the recommendations of the manufacturer of the stringing equipment. Only specially trained linesmen
must be employed who are well acquainted with the handling and running of the particular equipment
to be used.
Reliable means of instantaneous two-way communication must be available between the pulling and
the braking crews, and between these crews and any observation posts that may be placed along
the stringing section.
The stringing equipment shall be set up so as not to cause excessive vertical loads on the poles.
The distance to the nearest pole through which the cables are being strung shall be selected with
due regard to the relative levels of the pulleys on the pole and the stringing equipment reasonable
allowance should also be made for possible accidental over-tensioning of the cables.
Stringing pulleys shall preferably be located at approximately the same levels as that which the
conductors will occupy when installed.
At all times during stringing, the conductors shall be handled and protected so as not to be scratched,
nicked, abraded, kinked or damaged in any way. If during stringing it should prove inevitable to lower
the conductors to the ground, suitable non-metallic lagging shall be placed underneath.
Conductors, which have been subject to bird-caging during stringing, will not be accepted.
Stringing tensions shall at no time exceed corresponding sagging tensions.
Clamps for attaching the conductors to the hauling device shall be of approved design and shall
prevent relative movement of strand or layers of the conductors or overhead ground wires. Freely
rotating ball bearing swivels shall be used for each cable to be strung.
If, for any reason, stringing operations in progress must be interrupted, the conductors may be left in
the stringing pulleys, but their tension shall be reduced as far as possible.
In all cases, however, the cables must be kept completely clear of the ground, not lower than the
min. clearances given in Clause 2.5 of Distribution Lines & Substations, Volume 2C, Section VI(C)2,
Distribution General Specifications, Chapter 1, General and sufficiently far from any obstacles which
might cause abrasion of the cables, if touched by them.
If the interruption lasts for more than 40 hours or if stormy weather has prevailed, the cables shall be
closely inspected for damage.
Such inspection applies particularly to the suspension points where the cables have been resting in
the pulley sheaves.
At all times during stringing, sagging and clamping operations, the conductors, reels and hauling
equipment shall be effectively grounded.
The Contractor shall make suitable arrangements for temporary staying of poles, where necessary.
Damages to the conductors shall be immediately reported to the Engineer who will instruct the
Contractor on how to proceed.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 46 of 47

Sagging temperature shall be read from a certified thermometer, the bulb of which has been inserted
in an approximately 50 cm long piece of conductor with the inner layers removed. The thermometer
so equipped shall be freely suspended in the air without any shielding and not less than 3 m above
ground. Temperature readings will be taken only after 20 minutes exposure.
After finishing stringing operations, the conductors and overhead ground wires shall be sagged in
accordance with agreed sagging procedure and relevant erection sagging chart or table.
It is essential that prescribed hold periods before definite sagging are rigorously observed.
The Contractor shall check the sag of each conductor of a sagging section in at least one span of
approximate ruling span length. The sags shall also be checked in all spans exceeding 120 m and
in spans on each side of angle structures and sharp breaks in profile. Intermediate spans shall be
inspected for uniform sag.
Sag at the option of the Engineer will be checked by him, and the Contractor shall furnish such
assistance in equipment and personnel as may be required for this purpose.
Sagging sections shall be limited to such length as can be sagged satisfactorily.
Final sagging of conductors shall not be made earlier than 8 hours but not later than 48 hours after
they have been taken up to approximate specific sag. All conductors of a sagging section shall be
sagged at the same time.
Conductor tension shall be equalised between sagging sections so that the insulator strings will
assume the proper position when successive sagging sections have been clamped in.
The Contractor shall keep a record on approved schedules of the particulars of the sagging of
conductors and overhead ground wires on each sagging section.

2020 08 09 Pt2_Employer's_Requirements_Section_VI_(C)3_MV Lines-33_11kV.docx 2020-08-09 | Page 47 of 47

Norconsult AS

Insulation Coordination For GIS - New Aspects
No ratings yet
Insulation Coordination For GIS - New Aspects
6 pages
Python Code For Transmission Line
100% (1)
Python Code For Transmission Line
5 pages
P-90-82 F - CT's 33 To 132 KV
No ratings yet
P-90-82 F - CT's 33 To 132 KV
13 pages
Vesta WhitePaper
No ratings yet
Vesta WhitePaper
12 pages
Technical Specification of Overhead Line Porcelain Insulators
No ratings yet
Technical Specification of Overhead Line Porcelain Insulators
7 pages
Disconnectors
No ratings yet
Disconnectors
75 pages
D-70 Piller
No ratings yet
D-70 Piller
10 pages
Substation Fittings
No ratings yet
Substation Fittings
12 pages
03 Long Rod Porcelain Insulators e 2219
No ratings yet
03 Long Rod Porcelain Insulators e 2219
25 pages
ICTRAM06 - DNV Full-Paper Final After Review
No ratings yet
ICTRAM06 - DNV Full-Paper Final After Review
6 pages
33kv Cables Specs
No ratings yet
33kv Cables Specs
20 pages
مواصفات اعمده كهرباء الضغط العالي
No ratings yet
مواصفات اعمده كهرباء الضغط العالي
8 pages
15-TMSS-06 R.0
No ratings yet
15-TMSS-06 R.0
13 pages
Auxiliary Transformer
No ratings yet
Auxiliary Transformer
22 pages
GAE630 Catalogue CA - 501 - GB - 0601
No ratings yet
GAE630 Catalogue CA - 501 - GB - 0601
38 pages
Unistar Catalouge
No ratings yet
Unistar Catalouge
98 pages
3 Silicone Rubber Insulators
100% (1)
3 Silicone Rubber Insulators
24 pages
Appendix-12 Spare Parts For Standared Substaions
No ratings yet
Appendix-12 Spare Parts For Standared Substaions
47 pages
11kv Network On Wooden Poles Standards PDF
No ratings yet
11kv Network On Wooden Poles Standards PDF
69 pages
Transformer Protection and Control RET620: Application Manual
No ratings yet
Transformer Protection and Control RET620: Application Manual
108 pages
ZS2 Panel Manual
No ratings yet
ZS2 Panel Manual
40 pages
Transmission Tower Presentation PDF
No ratings yet
Transmission Tower Presentation PDF
27 pages
S1-1-Design Considerations For Transformers in Unusual Service Condition-Prashant Kumar-ABB
No ratings yet
S1-1-Design Considerations For Transformers in Unusual Service Condition-Prashant Kumar-ABB
6 pages
RTV (Chinese National Standard)
No ratings yet
RTV (Chinese National Standard)
16 pages
Development of A Low Sag Aluminium Conductor Carbon Fibre Reinforced For Transmission Lines
No ratings yet
Development of A Low Sag Aluminium Conductor Carbon Fibre Reinforced For Transmission Lines
6 pages
02. UniGear ZS1-Installation, Operation and Maintenance Instruction Manual
No ratings yet
02. UniGear ZS1-Installation, Operation and Maintenance Instruction Manual
110 pages
LUMA RFP 216424 - Attachment B - Technical Specifications
No ratings yet
LUMA RFP 216424 - Attachment B - Technical Specifications
16 pages
4 GHA Presentation Englisch SE Nov2011
No ratings yet
4 GHA Presentation Englisch SE Nov2011
49 pages
Manual Truss 2019 English PDF
No ratings yet
Manual Truss 2019 English PDF
11 pages
Technical Specification of Lattice Steel Poles
No ratings yet
Technical Specification of Lattice Steel Poles
9 pages
Guidelines For The Construction and Maintenance of Transmission Lines
No ratings yet
Guidelines For The Construction and Maintenance of Transmission Lines
8 pages
15-TMSS-02 R.1
No ratings yet
15-TMSS-02 R.1
15 pages
IEEE STD C57.12.90-1999 - Test Power Transf
No ratings yet
IEEE STD C57.12.90-1999 - Test Power Transf
89 pages
12SDMS01
No ratings yet
12SDMS01
14 pages
Schedule of Charges and Procedure PDF
No ratings yet
Schedule of Charges and Procedure PDF
58 pages
Transformer Gassing and Core Grounds
100% (1)
Transformer Gassing and Core Grounds
6 pages
For 132Kv Capacitor Voltage Transformers: Guaranted Technical Particulars
No ratings yet
For 132Kv Capacitor Voltage Transformers: Guaranted Technical Particulars
1 page
CLF Computation
No ratings yet
CLF Computation
13 pages
Pole ABC Accessories
No ratings yet
Pole ABC Accessories
19 pages
CBIP Manual 317 Page 429 OTI and WTI
100% (1)
CBIP Manual 317 Page 429 OTI and WTI
1 page
Product Catalogue of ELK-04
No ratings yet
Product Catalogue of ELK-04
28 pages
TJ - Ii.i: Medium Voltage Cables (Factory Acceptance Test)
No ratings yet
TJ - Ii.i: Medium Voltage Cables (Factory Acceptance Test)
4 pages
Gas Insulated Substations A Comprehensive Guide
No ratings yet
Gas Insulated Substations A Comprehensive Guide
10 pages
132 KV Surge Arrester - Technical Specification
No ratings yet
132 KV Surge Arrester - Technical Specification
11 pages
Tech - Spec. LA For WBSEDCL Sept.07, Arrester
100% (1)
Tech - Spec. LA For WBSEDCL Sept.07, Arrester
6 pages
M S Distribution Board
No ratings yet
M S Distribution Board
7 pages
Hitachi MLFC
No ratings yet
Hitachi MLFC
8 pages
11kv and 33KV
No ratings yet
11kv and 33KV
43 pages
Transpares LTD Profile
No ratings yet
Transpares LTD Profile
29 pages
Precimeasure: MODEL - 1007 SERIES...
No ratings yet
Precimeasure: MODEL - 1007 SERIES...
4 pages
Kyn28 12
100% (1)
Kyn28 12
2 pages
Nynas Oil
No ratings yet
Nynas Oil
2 pages
HVDC Rihand 500KV
No ratings yet
HVDC Rihand 500KV
6 pages
HT Switch Gear & Breakers Manual
100% (9)
HT Switch Gear & Breakers Manual
73 pages
Conductor Parameters-SI Units
0% (1)
Conductor Parameters-SI Units
17 pages
33KV GTP Wbseb
100% (1)
33KV GTP Wbseb
13 pages
Load Banks Catalog
No ratings yet
Load Banks Catalog
10 pages
Condensor Details
No ratings yet
Condensor Details
241 pages
AIS Specification PDF
100% (1)
AIS Specification PDF
574 pages
Bhel Isg Spec
No ratings yet
Bhel Isg Spec
359 pages
262413 - Switchboards - REV-01
No ratings yet
262413 - Switchboards - REV-01
18 pages
Audel House Wiring
From Everand
Audel House Wiring
Paul Rosenberg
2.5/5 (2)
AC Interference Mitigation Study
No ratings yet
AC Interference Mitigation Study
11 pages
HVDC Transformer Volume 2
No ratings yet
HVDC Transformer Volume 2
85 pages
Ch4 Power System Slide07
100% (4)
Ch4 Power System Slide07
89 pages
TOR - Review and Update of Pakistan Grid Code
No ratings yet
TOR - Review and Update of Pakistan Grid Code
10 pages
Power System Technical Performance Issues Related To The Application of Long HVAC Cables
No ratings yet
Power System Technical Performance Issues Related To The Application of Long HVAC Cables
124 pages
EE 424 Module 2
No ratings yet
EE 424 Module 2
42 pages
ETAP User Guide 16.0. - Part55
No ratings yet
ETAP User Guide 16.0. - Part55
47 pages
Bora Scu 2015
No ratings yet
Bora Scu 2015
6 pages
11.3 Three-Phase CTPT Operated Keypad Energy Meter
No ratings yet
11.3 Three-Phase CTPT Operated Keypad Energy Meter
195 pages
Introduction To Transformers
No ratings yet
Introduction To Transformers
4 pages
Cambridge Pre-U: PHYSICS 9792/02
No ratings yet
Cambridge Pre-U: PHYSICS 9792/02
28 pages
NNB Jan-Apr 2022
No ratings yet
NNB Jan-Apr 2022
20 pages
Design Manual For HV Transmission Lines
No ratings yet
Design Manual For HV Transmission Lines
9 pages
Section 14 HV Network Design
No ratings yet
Section 14 HV Network Design
11 pages
Smart Grid Topic 1 Power Systems
0% (1)
Smart Grid Topic 1 Power Systems
53 pages
The Worlds Water Battery - Pumped Storage and The Clean Energy Transition 2
No ratings yet
The Worlds Water Battery - Pumped Storage and The Clean Energy Transition 2
15 pages
EE6711 Power System Simulation Lab Manual R2013
100% (1)
EE6711 Power System Simulation Lab Manual R2013
101 pages
Eee 306
No ratings yet
Eee 306
19 pages
124922054947scope cpc19 12092022
No ratings yet
124922054947scope cpc19 12092022
36 pages
Energies 14 08294
No ratings yet
Energies 14 08294
36 pages
LT0407 Critec.
No ratings yet
LT0407 Critec.
64 pages
Electrical Syllabus
No ratings yet
Electrical Syllabus
2 pages
Electrostatic Generator and Electronic Transformer
No ratings yet
Electrostatic Generator and Electronic Transformer
12 pages
Communication of Smart Grid
No ratings yet
Communication of Smart Grid
19 pages
Ethiopian Power Grid
No ratings yet
Ethiopian Power Grid
33 pages
Recent Research Papers in Electrical Engineering
No ratings yet
Recent Research Papers in Electrical Engineering
5 pages
Islanding Network With STATCOM
No ratings yet
Islanding Network With STATCOM
4 pages
PSM Lab10
No ratings yet
PSM Lab10
5 pages